5 - Welcome to University of Madras
VERY IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS:
Kindly refer the official communication of the University in the
B.A. R&S (from III semester onwards) file .
APPENDIX –16 (R)
UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS
M.A. DEGREE COURSES
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
(w.e.f. 2008-2009)
second year
(i.e.III & IV SEMESTERS)
Course of Study and Scheme of Examination
NAME OF THE COURSES
1. M.A. APPLIED HISTORY
2. M.A. APPLIED SANSKRIT
3. M.A. COMMUNICATION
4. M.A. CORPORATE SOCIOLOGY
5. M.A. ENGLISH
6. M.A. ECONOMICS
7. M.A. F- ECONOMICS (BUSINESS ECONOMICS)
8. M.A. HISTORICAL STUDIES
9. M.A. HUMAN RESOURSE MANAGEMENT
10. M.A. HUMAN RIGHTS AND DUTIES EDUCATION
11. M.A. LABOUR MANAGEMENT
12. M.A. NATYA (FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED)*
13. M.A. PHILOSOPHY
14. M.A. POLITICAL SCIENCE
15. M.A. PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
16. M.A. PUBLIC RELATIONS
17. M.A. SANSKRIT
18. M.A. SOCIOLOGY
19. M.A. TOURISM AND TRAVEL MANAGEMENT
20. MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK(MSW)
21. M.A. TAMIZHIAL
The scheme of examinations for different semesters shall be as follows:
Vide APPENDIX-B
APPENDIX-B
1. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED HISTORY
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. |CREDITS |Exam |MAX MARKS |
| | | |HOURS | |Duration | |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNA|
| | | | | | | |L |
|CORE |India and Her Neighbours Since 1947 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER IX | | | | | | | |
|CORE |History of World Civilization (Excluding |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER X |India) Medieval and Modern period | | | | | | |
|CORE |History of Europe from |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XI |A.D. 1789 to 1919 | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE– III |Historiography and Historical Methods |III |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|EXTRA DISCIPLINARY- II |Archives Keeping |III |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|SOFT SKILL | |III | |2 | |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |Exam |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | |Duration | |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL |
|CORE |History of Peasant and Labour|IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XII |Movements in India from AD | | | | | | |
| |1900 to 1947 | | | | | | |
|CORE |Development of Science and |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XIII |Technology in India since AD | | | | | | |
| |1947 – 2000 | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE-IV |International Relations since |IV |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |AD 1919 – 2000 | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE – V |Studies in Human Rights |IV |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|SOFT SKILL | |IV | |2 | |40 |60 |
|PROJECT | | | |8 | |20+20+60=100 |
|PLUS | |IV | | | | |
|VIVA VOCE | | | | | | |
* Project: Internal - 20 Marks 2 out of 3 presentations - 20 marks
Viva - 20 marks
Project Report - 60 marks
2. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED SANSKRIT
THIRD SEMESTER
| | |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |EXAM. |MAX |
|COURSE | | | | |HRS. |MARKS |
|COMPONENTS | | | | | | |
| |NAME | | | | | |
| |OF | | | | | |
| |COURSE | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |EXT. |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA | |
|CORE |Paper 11 : Introduction to |III |5 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Indian Architecture – I | | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper 12 : |III |5 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Agamas – I | | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper 13 : Introduction to |III |5 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Ayurveda | | | | | | |
|Elective |Paper 14 : |III |5 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Principles of Indian Astronomy| | | | | | |
| |and Mathematics – II | | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper 15 : |III |5 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Systems of Indian Philosophy | | | | | | |
|Extra Disciplinary- | |III |3 Hrs |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|I I | | | | | | | |
|Soft Skills – III | |III |2 Hrs |2 |- |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE | |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |EXAMDURATO|MAX |
|COMPONENTS | | | | |ON HRS. |MARKS |
| | | | | | | |
| |NAME | | | | | |
| |OF | | | | | |
| |COURSE | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |EXT. |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA | |
|CORE |Paper 16 : Agamas II |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Paper 17 : |IV |5 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|ELECTIVE – I |Indian Fine | | | | | | |
| |Arts – I | | | | | | |
| |Paper 18 : |IV |5 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|ELECTIVE – II |Indian Fine | | | | | | |
| |Arts - II | | | | | | |
| |Paper 19: |IV |3 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |Introduction to Indian | | | | | | |
| |Architecture – II | | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper 20 : |IV |3 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Principles of Management | | | | | | |
|Soft | | |2 |2 |- |40 |60 |
|Skills –IV | | | | | | | |
3. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN COMMUNICATION
|Semester III |NAME |INST. |CREDITS |EXAM. HRS. |MAX |
| |OF |HOURS | | |MARKS |
| |COURSE | | | | |
| | | | | |CIA |EXT. |
|Core 9 |Communication Research Method I |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 10 |Film Studies |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 11 |Broadcast Production Techniques II |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective 5 |Technical Communication |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective 6 |Public Relations & Corporate |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Communication | | | | | |
|Soft Skills |Soft Skills |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|Soft Skills |Internship | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
|Semester IV | | | | | | |
|Core 12 |Communication Research Method II |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 13 |Cross-Cultural Communication |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core14 |Research Project Work |6 |6 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 15 |Practice Journal |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core 16 |Media Practice (Internship II) |2 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective 7 |Media Analysis Technique |2 |2 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills |Soft Skills |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |
| |Total Credits |90 | | | |
4. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN CORPORATE SOCIOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course Components |Name of Courses | | |Credits |Exam Hrs |Max.Marks |
| | |Semester |Inst.Hours | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA |External |
|CORE |Human Resource Development -I |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |Customer Relationship Management |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |Marketing and Consumer Analysis |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |Industrial Relations and Personnel |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Management | | | | | | |
|Elective II |Change Management |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra Disciplinary |Business Ethics and Corporate |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective II |Governance | | | | | | |
| |Soft Skill-III |III |3HRS |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course Components | | | |Credits |Exam Hrs|Max.Marks |
| |Name of Courses |Semester |Inst.Hours | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA |External|
|CORE |Human Resource Development –II |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |Organizational Behaviour |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |Project cum Viva |IV |- |8 |- |25 |75 |
|Elective- III |Total Quality Management |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill-IV | | |3HRS |2 |3 |40 |60 |
5. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN ENGLISH
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTE|INST. HOURS |CREDITS |HRS |MAX MARKS |
| | |R | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL |
|CORE |PAPER 9 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Shakespeare Studies | | | | | | |
|CORE |PAPER 10 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |English Language and Linguistics | | | | | | |
|CORE |PAPER 11 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Literary Criticism and Literary Theory | | | | | | |
|Elective within the Department|Literature, Analysis, Approaches and |III |4 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|/ED |Applications | | | | | | |
| |Copy Editing |III |4 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective /ED | | | | | | | |
|Soft Skills | |III |4 HRS |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|Internship | |III | |2 | | | |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |HRS |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL |
|CORE |PAPER 12 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Twentieth Century Poetry | | | | | | |
|CORE |PAPER 13 |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Writings by and on Women | | | | | | |
|CORE |PAPER 14 |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |General Essay | | | | | | |
|Soft Skills | |IV | |4 |3 |40 |60 |
|Elective within the |Film Studies |IV |4 HRS |3 |3 |20 |80 |
|Department /ED | | | | | | | |
|PROJECT |PAPER 15 |IV |----- | |--- |150 Project * |
|PLUS | | | |6 | |50 Viva Voce |
|VIVA VOCE | | | | | |(Viva – fully |
| | | | | | |external) |
* Project: Internal - 50 Marks
External – 100 Marks
60 Credits to secure from Core Papers in all the four semesters. Minimum total credits 90 credits for securing a Post-graduate degree in a given subject.
|S.No. |Questions |Marks classification |Total Mrks |
|1. |Section A – 10 Questions out of 12 |10 x 1 |10 |
|2. |Section B – 5 Questions out of 7 |5 x 5 |25 |
|3. |Section C – 4 Questions out 6 |4 x 10 |40 |
III. Components for CIA :
A
|Papers |Test |Seminar |Assignment |Quiz |Term |
| | | | | |Paper |
|9 b Copy Editing |5 |5 |5 | |5 |
|14 b Technical Writing |5 |5 |5 | |5 |
|17 a In-house Magazine | | |20 | | |
|18 b Film Studies |5 |5 |5 | |5 |
B
For remaining papers, excepting the project, the marks may be awarded as follows:
|4 |4 |4 |4 |4 |
(All items are not compulsory; Each Board to decide on components and marks weightages)
6. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN ECONOMICS
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |EXAM. HRS |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXT. |
|CORE- Macro Economic |PAPER 11 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Theory -I | | | | | | | |
|CORE – Public |PAPER 12 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Economics –I | | | | | | | |
|CORE – International |PAPER 13 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Economics -I | | | | | | | |
|Elective – III |PAPER 14 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra Disciplinary - II |PAPER 15 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill -III |- |III |- |2 |- |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |EXAM. |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXT. |
|CORE- Macro Economic |PAPER 16 |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Theory -II | | | | | | | |
|CORE-Public |PAPER 17 |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Economics –II | | | | | | | |
|CORE- International |PAPER 18 |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Economics -II | | | | | | | |
|PROJECT |PAPER 19 & PAPER 20|IV |----- |8 |--- |* Internal – 40 |
|PLUS | | | | | |Viva – 40 |
|VIVA VOCE | | | | | |Project Report 120 |
| | | | | | |Total (200) |
|In lieu of Project, Two Core |PAPER | | | | | | |
|courses * |19 | | | | | | |
|Financial Economics | |IV |3 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| | | | | | | | |
| |PAPER |IV | | | | | |
|Organizational Behaviour |20 | |3 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill - IV |- |IV |- |2 |- |40 |60 |
Project: Internal - 40 Marks – 2 out of 3 presentations
(Break up for Viva - 40 Marks
200 Marks) Project Reports - 120 Marks
* For IDE Papers 19 & 20 – Economics of Human Resource Development - I & II
A minimum of 70 Credits from Core Papers including soft skills and 20 credits from elective courses including extra disciplinary courses in all the four semesters. A minimum total of 90 credits is necessary for securing a Post-graduate degree in a given subject.
Note: i. Extra Disciplinary courses are considered to be courses which are not offered in the same discipline.
ii. Elective Courses are offered as related complementary courses of the disciplines offered in the same department or related departments.
6 & 7. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN Branch III –Economics and
F-Business Economics
The following are the Core papers (13 x 4 = 52 credits)
1. Micro Economic Theory - I
2. Micro Economic Theory - II
3. Indian Economic Development and Policy -I
4. Indian Economic Development and Policy -II
5. Research Methodology
6. Statistics for Analysis
7. Monetary Economics
8. Macro Economic Theory –I
9. Macro Economic Theory –II
10. Public Economics –I
11. Public Economics –II
12. International Economics –I
13. International Economics –II
13×4=52 Credits
Project. 8 Credits
60 Credits
In lieu of Project work, the following two core papers are prescribed for IDE students.
1. Economics of Human Resource Development- I …4 Credits
2. Economics of Human Resource Development –II…4 Credits
Total = 8 Credits
The following are the semesterwise Elective and Extra disciplinary courses (5×4=20 Credits)
Branch –III- Economics
II – Year III- Semester
Paper 14 (Elective -III) 1. Principles of Management –II
(Any one course) 2. Comparative Economic System –II
3. Mathematics for Economists –II
4. Environmental Economics –II
III- Semester
Paper 15 1. Economics of Development-II
(Extra Disciplinary II) 2. Economics of Human Resource Development –II
(Any one course) 3. Entrepreneurial Development
Core Papers :52 Credits
Elective Papers :20 Credits
Project Report/Papers :08 Credits
Soft Skill and Internship :10 Credits
Total :90 Credits
Core courses including soft skill (60 + 10) …70 Credits
Elective courses including Extra disciplinary courses …20 Credits
Total …90 Credits
Branch –III-F Bussiness Economics
II – Year III- Semester
Paper 14 (Elective -III) 1. Principles of Management –II
(Any one course) 2. Mathematics for Economists –II
3. Environmental Economics –II
4. Management Accounting -II
III- Semester
Paper 15 1. Economics of Development-II
(Extra Disciplinary II) 2. Entrepreneurial Development
(Any one course)
Core Papers :52 Credits
Elective Papers :20 Credits
Project Report/Papers :08 Credits
Soft Skill and Internship :10 Credits
Total :90 Credits
Core courses including soft skill (60 + 10) …70 Credits
Elective courses including Extra disciplinary courses …20 Credits
Total …90 Credits
7. M.A. Branch III F Business Economics
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |EXAM |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | |DURATION | |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL|
|CORE- Macro Economic |PAPER 11 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Theory -I | | | | | | | |
|CORE – Public |PAPER 12 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Economics –I | | | | | | | |
|CORE – International |PAPER 13 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Economics -I | | | | | | | |
|Elective III |PAPER 14 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra disciplinary – II |PAPER 15 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill – III |- |III |- |2 |- |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |EXAM |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | |DURATION| |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL |
|CORE- Macro Economic Theory|PAPER 16 |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|-II | | | | | | | |
|CORE-Public |PAPER 17 |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Economics –II | | | | | | | |
|CORE- International |PAPER 18 |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Economics -II | | | | | | | |
|PROJECT |PAPER 19 & PAPER 20|IV |----- |8 |--- |* Internal- 40 |
|PLUS | | | | | |Viva- 40 |
|VIVA VOCE | | | | | |Project Report -120 |
| | | | | | |Total (200) |
|In lieu of Project, Two | PAPER |IV |3 HRS | 4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Core courses – |19 | | | | | | |
|Financial Economics | | | | | | | |
| |PAPER |IV |3 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Organizational Behaviour |20 | | | | | | |
|Soft Skill IV | | | |2 | |40 |60 |
* Project: Internal - 40 Marks – 2 out of 3 presentations
(Break up for Viva - 40 Marks
200 Marks) Project Report - 120 Marks
8. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HISTORICAL STUDIES
SECOND YEAR THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTE|INST. HOURS |CREDITS |Exam |MAX MARKS |
| | |R | | |Duration | |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL|
|CORE |History of World Civilizations (Excluding |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER IX |India) – Ancient period | | | | | | |
|CORE |History of Europe A.D.1789 to 1919 |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER X | | | | | | | |
|CORE |Historiography and Historical Methods |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XI | | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE III |Development of Science and Technology |III |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |A.D.1947 – 2000 | | | | | | |
|EXTRA DISCIPLINARY- II|Women Studies |III |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|SOFT SKILL | |III | |2 | |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |Exam |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | |Duration| |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL |
|CORE |History of World Civilizations |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XII |(Excluding India) Medieval and | | | | | | |
| |Modern period) | | | | | | |
|CORE |International Relations from A.D. |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XIII |1919 to 2000 | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE-IV |Tourism Principles and Practices |IV |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|ELECTIVE -V |Archives Keeping |IV |6 Hrs |3 |3 | 25 | 75 |
|SOFT SKILL | |IV | |2 | |40 |60 |
|CORE | |IV |----- |8 |--- |20+20+60=100* |
|PROJECT | | | | | | |
|PLUS | | | | | | |
|VIVA VOCE | | | | | | |
9. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS| |SEMESTE|INST. |CREDITS |EXAM. HRS |
| | |R |HOURS | | |
| | | | | | |
| |NAME OF COURSE | | | | |
| | | | | |Ext. marks |Int. marks |Total |
|Core Courses |Human Rights Violations and Remedies |5 |4 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
| |Human Rights and Environment |5 |4 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
| |Human Rights and NGO’s and Media |5 |4 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
| |Human Rights and Duties |5 |4 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
|Elective Subject |Introduction to Intellectual Property |5 |3 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
|– VI |Rights | | | | | | |
|Extra |Basic Computer Education |5 |3 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
|disciplinary | | | | | | | |
|Soft Skill-III | |3 |2 |3 |60 |40 |100 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course components |Subjects |Inst. |Credits|Exam |Max. Marks |
| | |Hrs. | |Hours | |
| | | | | |Ext. marks |Int. marks |Total |
|Core Courses |Human Rights and Contemporary Issues |6 |4 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
| |Human Rights Act 1993 |6 |4 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
| |Human Rights and New World Order |6 |4 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
| |Human Rights and Community Health |6 |4 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
|Elective Subject -|Human Rights, Science And Technology |6 |3 |3 |75 |25 |100 |
|VII |Law | | | | | | |
|Soft Skill-IV | |3 |2 |3 |60 |40 |100 |
11. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN LABOUR MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
| |Duration |No. of | | External |Total |
| |(Hours) |Credits |Internal | | |
|Paper 11 |Human Resource Management |3 |4 |25 |75 |100 |
|Paper 12 |Research Methodology and |3 |4 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Statistical Methods | | | | | |
|Paper 13 |Labour Laws relating to working and service |3 |4 |25 |75 |100 |
| |conditions | | | | | |
|Paper 14 |Elective IV – Entrepreneurial |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Development | | | | | |
|Paper 15 |Elective V - Advanced Human |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Process Lab | | | | | |
|Paper 16 |Field Work and Field Visits |3 |4 |20 |80 |100 |
| |(Extra Disciplinary) | | | | | |
|Soft Skill - III Managerial Skill 3 |
| |
| |
|** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by |
|the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement. |
| |
|FOURTH SEMESTER |
|Paper 17 |Human Resource Development |3 |4 |25 |75 |100 |
|Paper 18 |Total Quality Management |3 |4 |25 |75 |100 |
|Paper 19 |Social Security Legislation |3 |4 |25 |75 |100 |
| |relating to Labour | | | | | |
|Paper 20 |Elective VI - Corporate Social |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Responsibility | | | | | |
|Paper 21 |Elective VII - Human Resource Management in |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Service Industries | | | | | |
|Paper 22 |Project Work (Extra Disciplinary) |3 |4 |20 |80 |100 |
|Soft Skill - IV Computing Skill 3 |
12. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN NATYA
(FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED)
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course | |Semeste|Inst. |Credit |Exam.Hr|Max Marks |Total |
|Component | |r |Hours | |s | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| |Name of the course | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course Component| |Semeste|Inst. |Cred|Exam.Hr|Max Marks |Total |
| | |r |Hours |it |s | | |
| |Name of the course | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |Int. |Ext |
| | | | | | |Int. |Ext |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | |Int. |
| | | | | |Int. |Ext. |Total |
|Core – 14 |Saiva siddanta |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Core – 15 |Philosophy of Kant – II |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Core – 16 |Indian Culture |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Elective – 4 |Industrial Psychology |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Soft skill | | |2 |3 |40 |60 |100 |
14. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN POLITICAL SCIENCE
THIRD SEMESTER
| | |
| |Marks |
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |
| | |
| | |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
| | |
| |Marks |
|COURSE COMPO |NAME OF COURSE |
|NENTS | |
| | |
| | |
15. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
THIRD SEMESTER
| | |
| |Marks |
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |
| | |
| | |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
| | |
| |Marks |
|COURSE COMPO |NAME OF |
|NENTS |COURSE |
| | |
| | |
16. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PUBLIC RELATIONS
|Course Code |Title of the Course |Inst. |Credit |Exam.Hrs |Marks |
| | |Hr | | | |
| | |Week | | | |
|Semester III | | | | |Int |Ext |Total |
|Core 9 |Communication Research Methods |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Core 10 |Media Skills III: PR Writing Style and |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Form | | | | | | |
|Core 11 |Corporate Communication |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Elective 5 |Entertainment & Society |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Elective 6 |Community Relations |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Soft Skill |Soft Skill |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |100 |
|Soft Skill |Internship** | |2 | | | | |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
|Semester IV | | | | | | | |
|Core 12 |Media Planning & Budgeting |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Core 13 |Advanced Public Relations |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Core14 |Research Project Work |6 |6 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Core 15 |Media Skills IV: Event Management/ PR |3 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
| |Campaign | | | | | | |
|Core 16 |Specialization |2 |3 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Elective 7 |Media Management & Economics |2 |2 |3 |25 |75 |100 |
|Soft Skill |Soft Skill |2 |2 |3 |40 |60 |100 |
| |Total Credits |90 | | | | |
17. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN SANSKRIT
25th August 2008
THIRD SEMESTER
| | |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |EXAM. HRS. |MAX |
| | | | | | |MARKS |
| | | | | | | |
| |NAME | | | | | |
|COURSE |OF | | | | | |
|COMPONENTS |COURSE | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |EXTERNAL |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA | |
|CORE |Paper 11 : Grammar– I |III |5 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE |Paper 12 : |III |5 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Introduction to | | | | | | |
| |Darshanas- II | | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper 13 : |III |5 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Campu | | | | | | |
|Elective - I |Spl. I- |III |5 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Paper I : | | | | | | |
|Elective - II |Spl. II – |III |5 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Paper I | | | | | | |
|Extra Disciplinary- I I | |III |3 Hrs |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skills - III | |III |2 Hrs |2 |- |40 |60 |
Note: Two special Subjects each consisting of two Papers from among the following are to be offered as Elective I & II in the third and fourth Semesters.
Subjects are:
1. Vedanta 2. Alamkara 3. Vyakarana 4. Nyaya
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
| | |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |EXAMDURATOO|MAX |
| | | | | |N HRS. |MARKS |
| | | | | | | |
| |NAME | | | | | |
|COURSE |OF | | | | | |
|COMPONENTS |COURSE | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |EXT. |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA | |
|CORE |Paper 14 : Grammar - |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |II | | | | | | |
|CORE |Paper 15: |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Indian Logic | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE – III |Spl. I- |IV |5 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Paper II : | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE – IV |Spl. II – |IV |5 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Paper II | | | | | | |
|Elective -V |Modern Literature in |IV |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Sanskrit | | | | | | |
|Soft Skills -IV | | |2 |2 |- |40 |60 |
Note: Two special Subjects each consisting of two Papers from among the following are to be offered as Elective I & II in the third and fourth Semesters.
Subjects are:
1. Vedanta 2. Alamkara 3. Vyakarana 4. Nyaya
18. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN SOCILOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
|Course Components |Name of Courses | | |Credits |Exam |Max.Marks |
| | |Semester |Inst.Hours | |Hrs | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA |External |
|CORE 9 |Rural Sociology |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE 10 |Sociology of Organization |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE 11 |Indian Social Problems |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE 12 |Sociology of Health |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Elective II |Indian Society |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Extra Disciplinary |Human Resource Management |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|elective II | | | | | | | |
|Soft Skill | |III |3HRS |2 |3 |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Course Components | | | |Credits |Exam Hrs |Max.Marks |
| |Name of Courses |Semester |Inst.Hours | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA |Externa|
| | | | | | | |l |
|CORE 13 |NGOs and Development Practice|IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|CORE 14 |Urban Sociology |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |Project cum Viva |IV |- |8 |- |25 |75 |
|Elective III |Organizational Behaviour |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Soft Skill | |IV |3HRS |2 |3 |40 |60 |
19. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN TOURISM AND TRAVEL
MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTE|INST. HOURS |CREDITS |Exam |MAX MARKS |
| | |R | | |Duration | |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL|
|CORE |FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER IX | | | | | | | |
|CORE |HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER X | | | | | | | |
|CORE |RESEARCH METHODOLOGY |III |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XI | | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE – III |MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM IN |III |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |TOURISM | | | | | | |
|EXTRA DISCIPLI |COMMUNICATIVE SKILL IN FRENCH / GERMAN|III |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|NARY -II |LANGUAGE | | | | | | |
|SOFT SKILL | |III | |2 | |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE COMPONENTS |NAME OF COURSE |SEMESTER |INST. HOURS |CREDITS |Exam |MAX MARKS |
| | | | | |Duration| |
| | | | | |HRS | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNAL |
|CORE |AIR TICKETING AND FARE |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XII |CONSTURCTION | | | | | | |
|CORE |ECO TOURISM |IV |6 HRS |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|PAPER XIII | | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE-IV | |IV |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |GLOBAL | | | | | | |
| |TOURISM – I | | | | | | |
|ELECTIVE-V | |IV |6 HRS |3 |3 |25 |75 |
| |GLOBAL | | | | | | |
| |TOURISM – II | | | | | | |
|SOFT SKILL | |IV | |2 | |40 |60 |
|PROJECT | |IV |----- |8 |--- |20+20+60=100* |
|PLUS | | | | | | |
|VIVA VOCE | | | | | | |
* Project: Internal - 20 Marks 2 out of 3 presentations - 20 marks
Viva - 20 marks
Project Report - 60 marks
20. MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK
THIRD SEMESTER
|COURSE | |SEMESTE|INST.HOURS|CREDIT|EXAM HOURS|Max |
|COMPONENTS | |R | |S | |Marks |
| |NAME | | | | | |
| |OF THE | | | | | |
| |COURSE | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERN|
| | | | | | | |AL |
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |EXTERN|
| | | | | | | |AL |
|CORE |Specialization Paper - I |III |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| | | |Hrs | | | | |
|CORE |Specialization Paper - II |III |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| | | |Hrs | | | | |
|CORE |Field Work Practicum - III |III |12 |6 |- |40 |60 |
| | | |Hrs | | | | |
|Elective |Counselling / Management |III |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| |of Development and | |Hrs | | | | |
| |Voluntary Organizations | | | | | | |
|Extra |Social Policy and Social |III |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|Disciplinary |Legislation / Human Rights | |Hrs | | | | |
| |Soft Skills-3 | |2 Hrs |2 | |40 |60 |
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
FOURTH SEMESTER
|COURSE | |SEMESTE|INST.HOURS|CREDIT|EXAM HOURS|Max |
|COMPONENTS | |R | |S | |Marks |
| |NAME | | | | | |
| |OF THE | | | | | |
| |COURSE | | | | | |
| | | | | | |CIA |EXTERNA|
| | | | | | | |L |
| | | | | | | | |
|CORE |Specialization Paper - III |IV |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| | | |Hrs | | | | |
|CORE |Specialization Paper - IV |IV |4 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
| | | |Hrs | | | | |
|CORE |Field Work |IV |12 |6 |- |40 |60 |
| |Practicum - IV | |Hrs | | | | |
|CORE |Project Report |IV |8 Hrs |4 | |80 Report |
| | | | | | |20 Viva |
| |Soft Skills-4 | |2 Hrs |2 | |40 |60 |
| |Block Placement /Internship | | |2 | | |
Each Paper carries an internal component.
There is a pass minimum for external component
Theory : Internal Assessment : 75: 25
Field Work : 60: 40
Field Work :
External 60 marks( 40 – viva ; 20 marks for Agency Supervisor)
Project Report - Report presentation : 80
Viva : 20
21. ©∠÷♦⊗ ⎯ℑ′∅′ℜ⎠
⎭℘〉…ϒ⌡ ←〉∈
©⎬∪ϒ⌡ ℵ∏⊕⌡
Τηιρδ Σεμεστερ
|ℵ⊇⎮® | ⎯ϒ⎦ | ℵ∏⊕⌡ |⊕⊂⎮® |®⎦∩′÷⎦ |♣⎯⎟⋅⎧÷ϒ⊗↔∩⋅ |ƒℑϒ∫⎯ |
|↓⎦∩…⎧÷⎧ |NAME OF COURSE|SEMESTER |♣↵℘⌡ |CREDITS |EXAM |ℑ⎯′⎮ƒℵ〉÷⎦ |
|⇐∨÷⎦ | | |(ℑ|′) | |DURATION |Μ“Ξ Μ“ΡΚΣ |
|COURSE COMPONENTS | | |INST. HOURS | | | |
| | | | | | |ƒ⎯ϒ…⎟ |®∪ |
| | | | | | |↔÷ |ℑ⎯′⎮ℵ≤∈ |
| | | | | | |ℑ⎯′⎮ℵ≤∈ |ΕΞΤΕΡΝ“Λ |
| | | | | | |ΧΙ“ | |
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ ΧΟΡΕ |9 |ΙΙΙ |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|≡⎨÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡ Ι | | | | | | | |
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ ΧΟΡΕ |10 |ΙΙΙ |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ | | | | | | | |
|±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡ − Ι | | | | | | | |
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ ΧΟΡΕ |11 |ΙΙΙ |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ | | | | | | | |
|ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡ − Ι | | | | | | | |
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ ΧΟΡΕ | | | | | | | |
|⎯ℑ′¬⎧⊂⎧ |12 |ΙΙΙ |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|÷|′⊃′ℜ′⎬ | | | | | | | |
|ga‹ghL | | | | | | | |
|⊕′∏⎮ℵ⎮ℵϒ…⌡ − Ις | | | | | | | |
|ΕΞΤΡ“ | | |2 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|ΔΙΣΧΙπΛΙΝ“ΡΨ− ΙΙ | | | | | | | |
|Ελεχτιϖε Συβϕεχτ | | | | | | | |
|bgÇahÇaš | | | | | | | |
|⊕′∏⎮ℵ⎮ℵϒ…⌡ − ς | |ΙΙΙ | | | | | |
|ΕΛΕΧΤΙςΕ | | |4 |3 | | | |
|ΩΙΤΗΙΝ | | | | | | | |
|ΤΗΕ ΔΕΠ“ΡΤΜΕΝΤ | | | | | | | |
|x ¥ãy¡»a« | | | | | | | |
|Σοφτ Σκιλλ − ΙΙΙ | |ΙΙΙ | |2 | |40 |60 |
|Εσσεντιαλσ οφ | | | | | | | |
|σποκεν ανδ | | | | | | | |
|Πρεσεντατιον σκιλλσ | | | | | | | |
⊕′∏⎮ℵ⎮ℵϒ…⌡:
1. ÷⌡ℵ⎟
2. ♣↵ϒ⎧⊂ 〈⎠÷⎦
3. x¥ãy¡»a«
4. ⎭∩⎨♣÷ϒ⊕⊇÷⎦
5. ↔÷℘ϒ⎯′ℜ′ℜ⎠
6. ↓ℑ∨⎮®⊗⊕⎟
** Internship will be carried out during the summer vacation of the first year and marks should be sent to the University by the College and the same will be included in the Third Semester Marks Statement.
↵ϒ⎬÷ϒ⌡ ℵ∏⊕⌡
Φουρτη Σεμσετερ
|ℵ⊇⎮® | ⎯ϒ⎦ | ℵ∏⊕⌡ |⊕⊂⎮® | |♣⎯⎟⋅⎧÷ϒ⊗↔∩⋅ |ƒℑϒ∫⎯ |
|↓⎦∩…⎧÷⎧ |NAME OF COURSE|SEMESTER |♣↵℘⌡ |®⎦∩′÷⎦ |EXAMDURATION|ℑ⎯′⎮ƒℵ〉÷⎦ |
|⇐∨÷⎦ | | |(ℑ|′) |CREDITS | |Μ“Ξ Μ“ΡΚΣ |
|COURSE COMPONENTS | | |INST. HOURS | | | |
| | | | | | |ƒ⎯ϒ…⎟ ↔÷ |®∪ |
| | | | | | |ℑ⎯′⎮ℵ≤∈ |ℑ⎯′⎮ℵ≤∈ |
| | | | | | |ΧΙ“ | |
| | | | | | | |ΕΞΤΕΡΝ“Λ |
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ ΧΟΡΕ |13 |Ις |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|r§f | | | | | | | |
|ïy¡»a« ΙΙ-II | | | | | | | |
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ ΧΟΡΕ |14 |Ις |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ | | | | | | | |
|±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡ ΙΙ | | | | | | | |
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ ΧΟΡΕ |15 |Ις |6 |4 |3 |25 |75 |
|ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ | | | | | | | |
|ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡ ΙΙ | | | | | | | |
|⊕′∏⎮ℵ⎮ℵϒ…⌡ ςΙ | | | | | | | |
|ΕΛΕΧΤΙςΕ ΣΥΒϑΕΧΤ ςΙ ωιτηιν| |Ις |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|τηε | | | | | | | |
|Δεπαρτμεντ | | | | | | | |
|bkhÊ bga®¥ãaš | | | | | | | |
|⊕′∏⎮ℵ⎮ℵϒ…⌡ ςΙΙ | | | | | | | |
|ΕΛΕΧΤΙςΕ ςΙΙ | |Ις |6 |3 |3 |25 |75 |
|ωιτηιν τηε | | | | | | | |
|Δεπαρτμεντ | | | | | | | |
|ClfÉaš | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
|Σοφτ Σκιλλ Ις | | | | | | | |
|Χομπυτινγ | | | |2 |3 |40 |60 |
|σκιλλσ Βασιχ | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | |
⊕′∏⎮ℵ⎮ℵϒ…⌡:
1. eilÆaš
2. 2. bkhÊbga®¥ãaš
3 . 3. ClfÉaš
4. ↔÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈÷⎦
5. r§f fhy«
A.C.F.2009
APPENDIX – 16 (S)
UNIVERSITY OF MADRAS
M.A. DEGREE COURSES
CHOICE BASED CREDIT SYSTEM
(w.e.f. 2008-2009)
second year
(i.e.III & IV SEMESTERS)
SYLLABUS
1. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN APPLIED HISTORY
III SEMESTER
Paper IX - INDIA AND HER NEIGHBOURS SINCE 1947
UNIT I: India and Pakistan - Areas of Conflict - Kashmir and Border issues - Afghan Crisis - Its impact on Indo - Pak Relations.
UNIT II: India and China - Strains and the process of Normalization - Tibetan issues - India and Nepal - Economic Cooperation.
UNIT III: India and Bangladesh - Areas of Cooperation and Crisis - India and Bhutan - Insurgency in the North Eastern States - India and Burma - Historical Ties.
UNIT IV: Indo - Sri Lanka Relations - Ethnic problem in Sri Lanka - Peace Process - India and Maldives - Political and Cultural ties.
UNIT V: Regional Organizations - India's role in the NAM - SAARC and its Activities - Its Future - Nuclearization of South Asia - Its impact.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Bipan Chandra and Others, India After Independence.
2. Nanda, B.R (ed)., Indian Foreign Policy: The Nehru Years.
3. Sisir Gupta, K., Kashmir: A Study in India - Pakistan Relations.
4. Ramesh Thakur, The Politics and Economics of India's Foreign policy.
5. Dutt, V.P., India's Foreign Policy in Changing World.
6. Farmer, B.H. , An Introduction to South Asia.
7. Deb Arinda, Bhutan and India: A Study in Frontier Political Relations.
8. Shelter V. Kodikara (ed)., Dilemmas of Indo - Sri Lanka Relations.
9. Phadis Urrnila and Others, Maldives: Winds of Change in the Atoll State.
Paper X - HISTORY OF WORLD CIVILIZATION
(EXCLUDING INDIA) -MEDIEVAL AND MODERN PERIOD
UNIT I: Middle Ages: Rise and spread of Christianity -The Papacy -Byzantine Civilization -Rise and Spread of Islam -Saracenic Civilization.
UNIT II: Feudalism -Origin -Merits and Demerits -Crusades -Causes and Results - Monastic Orders of Medieval Europe -Growth of Medieval Cities -Progress of Education and Rise of Universities.
UNIT Ill: Transition to Modem Age -Renaissance -Causes -Renaissance in Italy- Results of Renaissance -Geographical Discoveries of 15th and 16th centuries -Causes, Course and Results -Reformation in Germany, France and Switzerland -Counter Reformation.
UNIT IV: French Revolution and its Impact -Romanticism -Industrial and Agrarian Revolutions -Causes, Course and Results.
UNIT V: Nationalism vs Internationalism -League of Nations -United Nations Organization -Science, Philosophy, Art & Literature during the Contempo- rary World
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1 Will Durant, The Story of Civilization (10 Volumes).
2. Edward Mac Nall Burns, Western Civilization -their History and their Culture.
3. Judd, G.P., History of Civilization.
4. Swain, J.E., A History of World Civilization.
5. Wallbank, T. W. and Bailay, N.M., Civilization - Past and Present.
6. Burns, and Ralph, Western Civilizations.
7. Phul, R.K., World Civilization.
8. Gokale, B.K., Introduction to Western Civilization.
Paper XI - HISTORY OF EUROPE FROM A.D. 1789 -A.D. 1919
UNIT I: Fall of Ancient Regime -French Revolution -Era of Napoleon.
UNIT II: Congress of Vienna -Concert of Europe - Matternich - Revolutions of 1830
and 1848.
UNIT III: Eastern Question -Unification of Italy and Germany.
UNIT IV: Napoleon Ill -Bismarck and Austro-Hungarian Empire -Balkan Problem-
Alexander Ill and Freedom of the Serfs -Balkan Crises.
UNIT V : First World War.:-- Treaty of Versailles -Russian Revolution.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Ketelby, C.D.M., A History of Modem Times.
2 Fisher, H.A.L., History of Europe.
3. Grant, A.J & Temperly, Europe in 19th and 20th Centuries.
4. Hazen, C.D., Modern Europe.
5. David Thomson, Europe since Napoleon.
6. Fyffe, History of Modern Europe.
7. Marriot, Remaking of Europe.
8. Lipson, Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries.
9. Grant, A.J., Europe, The Story of the Last Five Centuries.
10. Huges, H.S., Contemporary Europe.
11. Philis W. Alison, Modern Europe.
Elective – III HISTORIOGRAPHY AND HISTORICAL METHODS
UNIT I: Definition and Meaning - Nature and Scope - Value of History.
UNIT II: Branches of History -(Political, Economic, Social and Cultural) History and other Social Sciences -Role of Allied Subjects in the study of History.
UNIT III: Structure and Form of History - History as Science and Art -Philosophy of History.
UNIT IV: Trends in Historiography -Ancient, Medieval and Modern -Recent Trends: Subaltern Studies and Annales School.
UNIT V: Research Methodology - Selection of Topics - Hypothesis - Collection of
Data - Classification of Sources - Historical Criticism - Objectivity in writing History -Synthesis and Interpretation - Exposition - Foot Note - Bibliography
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Reiner, G. T., History, Its Purpose and Method.
2. Rowse, A.L., The Use of History.
3. Collingwood, R.G., The Ideas of History.
4. Philips, C.H. (Ed), Historians of India, Pakistan and Ceylon.
5. Khan, S. A., History and Historians of British India.
6. Rajayyan, K., History in Theory and Method.
7. Subramanian, N., 1978, Historiography, Koodal Publishers, Madurai.
8. Carr, E.H., 1983, What is History? Middlesex, England.
9. Sen, S.P. (Ed), 1973, Historians and Historiography in Modern India. Calcutta.
10. Sheik Ali, B., 1978, History: Its Theory and Method. Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi.
11. Barzun, J & Graff, Henry, The Modern Researcher.
12. Fisher, D., Historical Fallacies.
13. Kent, S., Writing History
14. Hockit, Homer, C., The Critical Method in Historical Research and Writing.
15. Majumdar, R.C., and Srivastava, A. N., Historiography.
16. Manickam, S., Theory of History and Methods of Research, Padumam Publishers
Madurai, 2005..
EDC – II ARCHIVES KEEPING
(Extra Disciplinary)
UNIT I: History of Archives -Archives keeping in Europe -Archives keeping in India -Importance of Archives
UNIT II: Creation of Archives -Materials used for the creation of Archives -Packing Materials and Seals -Establishment of Registry -Filing system of Records.
UNIT III: Preservation of Archive Materials in India and European Countries - Methods of Preservation -Laminations -Reprography -Automation- Retrieval Tools.
UNIT IV: Functions -Uses of Archives -Rules and Regulations.
UNIT V: Archival Organisations - National Archives of India -Tamilnadu Archives- Private Archives ~ International Council of Archives -Indian Historical Records Commission (IHRC) -The Historical Manuscripts Commission.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Harinaryana, Science of Archives Keeping.
2. Baliga, B., Guide to the records preserved in the Madras Record Office
3. Sarvesvaran, P., Archives Keeping.
4. Sundara Raj, M., 1999, A Manual of Archives System and the World of Archives, Silver
Publications, Chennai.
5. Sailen Ghose, Archives in India.
6. Jenbinson Hilary, A Manual of Archives Administration.
7. Thyagarajan, T. T., Archives Keeping.
8. Sehellenberg, T.R., Management of Archives.
FOURTH SEMESTER
PAPER XII HISTORY OF PEASANT AND LABOUR MOVEMENTS IN INDIA FROM AD 1900 TO 1947
UNIT I: Introduction - Agricultural Condition and Agrarian Structure during the
British Period - Peasant Struggles in Kerala and Land reforms since 1900 - Peasant Unions - The Indian National Congress and the Peasants – Gandhi and Peasant Struggles -Champran, Bardoli and Oudh.
UNIT II: Formation of Kisan Sabhas -Left Parties -Peasant Struggles on the eve of Independence, Tebhaga Movement in Bengal (1946 -47) –Telengana Peasant Outbreak (1946 -51) and the Varlis revolt in Western India -Peasant Organisations in Tamilnadu -Tamilaga Vivasayigal Sangam -Peasant Movement in Vedasendur -Welfare Measures for Peasants
UNIT III: Introduction - British Labour Movements and their impact on Indian Labour - Russian Revolution and its impact on Indian Labour - Trade Union
Movement from 1875 - 1920 - Establishment of All India Trade Union Movement in 1920.
UNIT IV: Growth of Trade Union Movement from 1920 -1947 -The Role of the Indian National
Congress and Trade Union Movement Expansion –Labour Involvement in Freedom Struggle.
UNIT V: Federations of Labour Unions - AITUC - INTUC - HMS - UTUC – Labour
Laws - I.L.O. – Labour Welfare Measures in Independent India - Trade
nionism and its Effect on the Indian Economy.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Shanin, T.S., Peasants and Peasant Societies.
2. Natarajan, Peasant Revolts in India, 1850- 1900
3. Pandey, S.M., Emergence of Peasant Movement in India.
4. Desai, A.R., Peasant Movement in India.
5. Karnik, V.B., Trade Unions in India.
6. Herald Crouch, History of Trade Unionism in India
7. Mathur, I.S., and Mathur , A.S., Trade Union Movement in India.
8. Dhanagare, D.N., Peasant Movements in India (1920 -1950).
9. Sumit Sarkar , Modern India.
10. Grover, B.L., and Grover, S., A New Look at Modern Indian History.
Paper XIII - DEVELOPMENT OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN INDIA
SINCE AD 1947-2000
UNIT I: Introduction - A Survey of the Development of Science and Technology under the British Rule - Government of India's Science and Technology Policy since 1950 - Department of Science and Technology - Research and Development Programme - Science and Technology programmes for Socio-Economic Development.
UNIT II: Development of Agricultural Science - Research and Education - Agricultural Engineering and Technology - Indian Council of Agricultural Research - Crop Science and Horticulture - Animal Science and Veterinary colleges - Biotechnology Development - Crop and Animal Bio-technology.
UNIT III: Development of Space Science - Development of Satellite Systems-
INST AT System - Electronic Developments and Production - Information Technology - I. T. Act 2000 - Telecommunication - Software Technology Parks -I. T for the Masses.
UNIT IV: Higher Technology Development - Atomic Science - Atom for Peace - Atomic Energy and Nuclear Power Programme - Atom for War and Pokhran I & II.
UNIT V: Oceanography - Ocean Development - Marine Living Resources and Non - living Resources - Aquaculture and Marine Biotechnology - Polar Science and Antartic Expeditions - Institute Connected with Ocean Research.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Gupta, S.P., Modern India and Progress in Science and Technology.
2. Gupta, S.P., Technology and Society in the Modern Age.
3. Venkataraman, R., History of Science and Technology.
4. Vadilal Dagli, Science and Technology in India.
5. Varghese Jeyaraj, S., History of Science and Technology.
6. Kalpana Rajaram, Science and Technology in India.
7. Kuppuram and Kumudhamani, History of Science and Technology. (10 Volumes).
8. Jaggi, O.P., Science and Technology.
9. India, 2000, India 2001, (Publications Division, Government of India).
10. Krishnamurthy, K.V., History of Science, Bharathidasan University, Tiruchirapalli, 2005 (Both English & Tamil)
Elective - IV INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS SINCE A.D. 1919 - 2000
UNIT I: Nature of International Relations, National Power and Instruments for the Promotion of National Interests - Diplomacy.
UNIT II: Inter - War Years - Reparation - Inter Allied Debts - World Economic Crisis - Collective Security - Rise of Dictatorship - Totalitarianism.
UNIT III: Second World War - Peace Settlements - Military Alliances - Emergence of Power Blocs - Cold War - UNO.
UNIT IV: Disarmament and Arms Control - Disintegration of U.S.S.R - Emerging New World Order.
UNIT V: Present Trends in International Associations (Role of International Associations such as Common Wealth, NAM, SAARC, OAU, ASEAN, G -7, G -15, G -77).
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Schleicher, P., Charles, International Relations Co-Operation.
2. Palmer and Perkins, International Relations.
3. Morgentheau, Hans, J., Politics among Nations.
4. Schuman, International Politics.
5. Wright, Rhiney, The study of International Relations.
6. Moon, P.T., Imperialism and World Politics since 1945.
7. Calvecoressi, P., World Politics since 1945.
8. Hughes, H.S., Contemporary Europe.
9. Carr, E.H., International Relations since 1919.
10. Gadhorne Hardy, A Short History of International Affairs 1920-38.
11. Sen, A.K., International Relations since 1919.
12. Prakash Chander and Prem Arora, International Relations.
Elective V – STUDIES IN HUMAN RIGHTS
UNIT – I: THEORIES ON HUMAN RIGHTS
Development of the Concept of Human rights in History – Historical Documents dealing with Human Rights – The Need for Human Rights – Concepts such as Justice, Equality and Liberty – Three Generation Rights and Classification of Rights - Universality and Indivisibility of Human Rights
UNIT – II: INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS
The International Declaration of Human Rights 1948 – Two Covenants – Two Optional Protocols – International Conventions on Refugees, Women, Children and Migrants – Conventions against Torture and Racism.
UNIT – III: NATIONAL STANDARDS
Indian Constitution – Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles – National Human Rights Commission – Sate Human Rights Commissions – Other National and State Level Commissions.
UNIT – IV: CONTEMPORARY ISSUES AND HUMAN RIGHTS
Capital Punishment – Torture – Custodial Death – Disappearance – Encounter Deaths – Extra-Judicial killings – Human Rights in the context of Terrorism.
UNIT – V: ORGANIZATIONS TO DOCUMENT HUMAN RIGHTS VIOLATIONS
Human Rights Commission – Amnesty International – Human Rights Watch – Peoples Union For Civil Liberties – NGO’s dealing with Human Rights Issues – Fact Finding Reports – Documenting Human Rights Violations.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Jack Donnelly, 1989, Universal Human Rights in Theory and Practice, Cornell University Press, USA.
2. Bajwa, G.S., 1995, Human Rights in India, Anmol Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Chandra Satish, 1990, Interantional Documents of Human Rights, Mittal Publications, New Delhi.
4. Scott Davidson, 1993, Human Rights, Open University Press, Buckingham and Philadelphia.
5. Tony Evans (Ed.), 1998, Human Rights Fifty Years, A Reappraisal, Manchester University Press, Manchester.
6. Srivastava and Narayan, 2002, United Nations on Human Rights, Indian Publishing Distributors, New Delhi.
7. Symonides (Janusz), 2003, New Dimensions and Challenges for Human Rights, Rawat Publications, Jaipur.
8. Baxi Upendera, 2003, Future of Human Rights, Oxford University Press, London.
9. Sachhar Rajindar, 2004, Human Rights: Perspectives and Challenges, Gyan Publishing House, New Delhi.
Web Sources:
1. Human Rights Centre,
2. Commonwealth HR initiative,
3. Human Rights in India,
4. South Asian Forum for Human Rights,
5. Women’s Rights in India,
Paper XIX – Project Plus Viva Voce
2. M.A. APPLIED SANSKRIT
SYLLABUS
Semester III
Paper XI Introduction to Indian Architecture – I 4
Architecture is the harmonious combination of form, function and construction that leads to a pleasant living environment (sattvika). It is defined as the science of design and construction of buildings. Thus the core of architecture is the theory of beauty and truth. This concept is dealt with in the case of India’s architecture, the Vasastu Sastra in a holistic manner.
Unit I - Introduction to Indian Architecture
Unit II - Components of Vastusastra
Unit III - Aesthetic quality of Vastuvidya
Reference:
1. Prasanna kumar Acharya – A dictionary of Hindu Architecture –
Manasara Series – Vol. I. to Vol. 7 – Munshiram Manoharlal Pvt. Ltd. 1995.
2. Kapila Vatsayan – Kalatattvakosa – Indira Gandhi National
Centre for Arts, New Delhi – 1996.
3. Coomaraswamy Anand – The Aims of Indian Art.
Paper XII AGAMAS – I 4
Unit I Introduction to Agamas – Definition.
Unit II Principles of Agamas Classification of Agamas
Unit III Vaisnava Agamas – Their Doctrines.
Paper XIII INTRODUCTION TO AYURVEDA –II 4
Select portions from Astangahrdaya
Paper XIV Elective
PRINCIPLES OF INDIAN ASTRONOMY AND MATHEMATICS II 3
Paper XV 4
Systems of Indian Philosophy
Text : Gouda pada Karika Prakarana One and two
Unit I : Introduction
Unit II : first Adyaya first half
Unit III First Adhyaya second half
Unit IV: Second Adhyaya First half
Unit V : Second Adhyaya Second Half
Extra Disciplinary 3
Soft Skill III 2
S E M E S T E R- IV
Paper XVI AGAMAS II 4
Saiva Agamas – Important Texts – Doctrines
Paper XVII Elective - I
INDIAN FINE ARTS- I 3
Unit I Introduction to Classical Sanskrit Literature
Unit II Dramuturgy – Natyasastra
Unit III Sanskrit Dramas
Paper XVIII Elective – II
INDIAN FINE ARTS – II 3
Music. Bhakti Songs – Compositions of great Musicians – an.
Unit I
Bhakti Songs in Sanskrit, Bhajana Tradition – Todaya Mangalam, Songs of Bodhendra, Sadguru Swami, Sadasiva Brahmendra. Songs expressing nava-vidhi bhakti, navararna and navagraha themes.
Unit II
Style of Samskita in Kriti compositions, Songs of Muttuswami Dikshitar, Svati. Tirunal and the Composers. 20th century composers of songs in Samskrta. Kulaka and Chedyaka forms in songs. Usage of various vibhakti’s and samasas. Aspects of phonetics – usage of aspirated and conduct consonants in musical compositons.
Unit III
Metre and other prosodical element in musical compositions. Study of the work Muhana-prasa-antyaprasa vyavastha" of Svati Tirunal.
Unit IV
Musical Drama in Samskrta. General study of Gita – Govinda and Sri Krishna lila-tarangini of Narayana Tirtha.
Unit V
Biographical works of composers in Samskrta. Srityagaraja caritram, Srityagaraja-vijaya-kavya, Srimuttuswamidikshita-caritam-mahakavyam.
Paper XIX INTRODUCTION TO INDIAN ARCHITECTURE II 4
Different kinds of Architecture with Reference to important texts Introduction to Devalayavastu, Manusyalayavastu, Citravastu, Nagaravastu, Durgavastu.
The texts are
1. Devalayavastu – Brhatssamhita
2. Manusyalayavastu – Manusyalayachandrika
3. Citravastu-Silparatna Ch. 36.
4. Nagaravastu 5. Janapathanivesa – Arthasastra 22 – 1- 19, 24 – 3-21, 25-4-22.
Paper XX PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT 4
Unit I Introduction
Unit II Important Texts
Unit III Study of Some Select Portions.
Text : Kautilya’s Arthashastra.
SOFT SKILL IV 2
3. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN COMMUNICATION
SYLLABUS
SEMESTER III
Core 9 - Communication Research Methods 1
Unit 1: Fundamentals of Social Research
Unit 2: Varieties of Research Designs
Unit 3: Social Measurement
Unit 4: Basic Statistical Techniques
Unit 5: Data Analysis & Interpretation
Core 10 - Film Studies
Unit 1: Film theories, film aesthetics and film genres
Unit 2: Major film movements (German expressionism, French new wave, Italian
neorealism, Indian new wave and Soviet montage)
Unit 3: History of early cinema with special reference to India
Unit 4: The history of political cinema and the dynamics of the cinema-society interface
in Tamil Nadu
Unit 5: Film analysis techniques
Core 11 - Broadcasting Production Techniques-II
Unit 1: Principles of AV Production
Unit 2: Pre-production Process and Scriptwriting
Unit 3: Production Process
Unit 4: Post-production Process
Unit 5: Budgeting and Production management
Elective-5
Technical Communication
Unit1 Areas of technical communication
Unit2 Tools of the trade and the requirements of the profession.
Unit3 Principles of technical report and manual writing
Unit4 Visual design strategies for technical communication
Unit5 Organizing ideas and developing persuasive skills for technical communication
Elective-6
Public Relations and Corporate Communication
Unit 1: Introduction to PR
Unit 2: PR Process and Practice
Unit 3: Stake holder Communication
Unit 4: Advanced PR
Unit 5: Ethics and Research
Semester IV
Core 12- Communication Research Methods II
Unit 1: Dissertation Writing-Research Project Management
Unit 2: Research Design-Mixed Methodologies
Unit 3: Qualitative Research Approaches- Interpretive Paradigms
Unit 4: Quantitative and Qualitative Data Analysis & Interpretation
Unit 5: Quantitative & Qualitative Content Analysis
Core 13 - Cross Cultural Communication
Unit 1: The contexts of cross-cultural communication
Unit 2: Principles of cross-cultural communication
Unit 3: Theories of cross-cultural communication
Unit 4: The role of ‘cultural distance,’ ‘cultural identity’-cultural other’ in cross- cultural
communication
Unit 5: Cross cultural communication in the age of globalization
Core 14 - Research Project Work
Core 15 – Practice Journal
Core 16 – Media Practice (Internship-2)
Elective-7
Media Analysis Techniques
Unit 1: Approaches to Media Analysis
Unit 2: Visual Persuasion Techniques
Unit 3: Media Aesthetics
Unit 4: Analyzing Media Analysis
Unit 5: Cases Studies and Exercises in media analysis
4. M.A. CORPORATE SOCIOLOGY
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
CORE- HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT-I
Unit 1: Introduction
• Nature and scope of HRM
• Context of HRM
• Ethical issues in HRM
Unit 2: Resourcing the organization
• Human Resource Planning
• Job design and Analysis
• Recruitment and Selection
Unit 3: Motivating Human resource
• Motivation at work
• Participative management
• Empowerment
Unit 4: Developing HR
• Socializing, orienting and Developing
• Learning and Development
• Performance Appraisal
Unit 5: Employee Benefits
• Employee welfare
• Safety and health
• Quality of work life
References:
1. K.Aswathapa “Human resource and Personnel management-Text and Cases” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, NewDelhi, 2002
2. Biswajeet Pattyanak “Human resource Management” Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2005, Newdelhi.
3. Wendell L. French “Human resource Management” Houghton Mifflin Company, USA, (All India Publishers and Distributors, Chennai) 1997
4. Robert L Mathis & John II.Jackson “Human resource Managemen-tenth edition” Thomson south western, Singapore, 2003
5. Ian Beardwell & Len Holden “Human resource Management A contemporary Approach “ Financial Times- Pretince Hall, 2001
6. David A. Decenzo & Stephen P. Robbins “Fundamentals of “Human resource Management” John Willey & Sons (Asia) Pvt, Ltd, 2005
7. Gary Desseier, “Human resource Management” Pretince - Hall, India, 2005
8. Cynthia D. Fisher et al “Human resource Management”Biztantra, NewDelhi 2004
9. John Bratton and Jeffrey gold “Human resource Management Theory and Practice” Palgrave, Newyork, 1999
10. Michael Armstrong “ A Hand book of HRM Practice” Kogan Page, London, 2003
11. C B Mamoria et al “Personnel Management” Himalaya Publishing House, Delhi, 2005
CORE- CUSTOMER RELATIONSHIP MANAGEMENT
Unit- I: Introduction
• Definition, Conceptual Framework and Elements of CRM
• Key Concepts: Closed Loop Marketing (360 Degree Marketing) and touch point analysis – Customer Life Time Values- Sales for Automation – Automated Customer Service Centres- Cross Selling / Selling.
• Models of Customer Behaviour: Customer Differences – Customer Satisfaction- Customer loyalty- Customer Retention- Customer Defection- Customer Satisfaction Services
• CRM as Integral Business Strategy: Relationship Marketing Strategies- Winback and Acquisition Strategies.
Unit-II: Analysing CRM
• Customer Identification and Expanding the size of customer base
• Customer Profiling
• Source of Customer Data
• Data Warehousing – Data mining – Data Analysis and Modelling
Unit-III: Relationship Marketing B2B commerce
• Building Customer Loyalty in B2B Commerce
• Buyer and Seller Relationship
• Cross Border B2B Relationship with Intermediaries
• Managing Relationship in supply chain of the 21st Century
• Measuring Effectiveness of Relationship Marketing
Unit-IV: CRM in Service Sector
• CRM in Financial Services (Banking, Insurance, Customer focused IT Organization)
• CRM in Health Care Industry
• CRM in Hospitality Industry
• CRM in Telecom Industry
Unit-V: CRM Systems
• Call Centres
• Internet and Website
• Data Warehouse and Data Mart
• Campaign Management
• Content Management
References:
✓ Ferrell O.C and Hartline D. Michael, Marketing Strategy, Thomson South- Western, USA, 2005.
✓ Gosney W. John and Boehm P. Thomas., Customer Relationship Management, Essentials, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt, New Delhi, 2001.
✓ Hair. JR, F. Joseph, et.al., Marketing Research, Tata Mcgraw Hil Publication, New Delhi, 2003.
✓ Hughes, Arthur Middleton., The Customer Loyalty Soluton, Tata Mcgraw Hill Publication, New Delhi, New Delhi, 2003.
✓ Kapoor K. Satish and Kansal Purva., Marketing Logistics, Pearson Educational, Singapore, 2003.
✓ Kotler Philip and Armstrong Gary, Principles of Marketing, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt, New Delhi,2005.
✓ Lamb W. Charles, et.al., Marketing, South Western College publication, USA, 1996.
✓ Schiffman G. Leon and Kanuk Leslie Lazar., Consumer Behaviour, Prentice Hall of India, Pvt, New Delhi, 2004.
✓ Seth Rakesh and Seth Kirti, Creating Customer Delight, Response Books, Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2005.
✓ Zikmund G. William, et al., Customer Relationship Management, Wiley and Sons, Singapore, 2003.
CORE- MARKETING AND CONSUMER ANALYSIS
Unit I Understanding Marketing Management
• Defining Marketing and Marketing process
• Marketing for the 21st century
• New Marketing Landscape
• Marketing Strategies and Plan
• Managing Marketing effort
Unit II Marketing Information System
• Marketing Research and forecast
• Developing and Analysising Marketing Information
• Marketing Environment
• Responding to marketing environment
Unit III Marketing Strategy and Marketing mix
• Segmentation
• Target marketing
• Positioning for competitive advantage
• Building strong brands
Unit IV Market & Consumer Behaviour
• Consumer Buyer Behaviour
• Business Buyer Behaviour
• Institutional and Government markets
Unit V
• Consumer motivation and perception
• Consumer attitude formation and change
• Communication and consumer behaviour
References:
1. Philip Kotler& Kevin Lane Keller-Marketing Management-Prentice-Hall India
2. Philip Kotler & G.Armstrong-Principles of Marketing-Prentice-Hall,India
3. O C Ferrell&Michael D Hartline-Marketing Strategy- Thomson, south western
4. M J Xavier- Strategic Marketing –Response Books-NewDelhi
5. P N Bloom&G T Gundlach-Handbook of Marketing and Society- Sage publications
6. L G Schiffman & L L Kanuk- Consumer Behaviour-Prentice Hall India
7. Lamb, Hair & McDaniel – Marketing-South western college publishers
CORE- INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS AND PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT
Unit I: Introduction
• Definition and changing concept of industrial relations
• Labour relations :concept-tripartite conventions, limitations of management prerogatives
• Trade union: History-Theories-structure-role-problems
Unit II Industrial disputes & Grievance Redressal
• Types of industrial disputes and causes
• Methods of prevention and settling industrial disputes
• Causes of grievances and Grievance Redressal machinery
Unit III Legislation concerning settling of disputes
• Legislation Preceding Industrial Disputes Act,1947
• Industrial Disputes Act ,1947
• Authorities and Reference of Disputes
• State Laws
Unit V Labour Welfare
• Workmen’s compensation Act,1923
• Trade Union act,1926
• Payment of wages Act,1936
• Industrial employment Act,1946
• Minimum wage Act,1948
• Employees’ State Insurance Act,1948,
• The Employees’ Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provision Act,1952
• Payment of Bonus Act,1965
• The Payment of Gratuity Act,1972
• Child labour (Prohibition and regulation ) Act,1986
• Equal Remuneration Act,1976
• Factory legislation
Unit-V Personnel Management
• Human Resource Planning
• Recruitment & Selection
• Performance Appraisal
• Compensation and Rewards
References:
1.Edwin B.Flippo –Personnel Management –McGraw-Hill international Editions
2.R S Davar Personnel Management and Industrial Relations- Vikas Publishing House
Pvt Ltd
3.C B Mamoria & S V Gankar- Personnel Management-Himalya Publishing House
4.Arun Monappa-Industrial Relations-Tata McGraw Hill Edition
5.P R N Sinha etal, 2006 –Industrial relations, Trade Unions, and Labour legislation-
Pearson Education, NewDelhi
6.Mamoria CB and Sathish Mamoria, Dyanamics of industrial Relations, Himalya
Publishing House, NewDelhi, 1998
7. Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas, 2000
ELECTIVE-II
CHANGE MANAGEMENT
Unit I : Introducing Change Management
• Understanding change
• Diversity of change
• Types of change
• Models of change
Unit II : Perspective and Paradise
Perspective:
• Consistency
• Resource Dependency
• Population ecology
• Institution Paradise
• Critical
• Social constructionism / constructive
• Post modernist
Unit III : Emerging the change management from HR Perspective
• Organization structure
• Organization culture and management change
• Recruitment selection and management change
• HRD Management change
• Reward management and management change
• Employee relation and management of change
• Downsizing and management change
Unit IV : Issues in strategy and change
• Issues of rationalist approach to change
• Culture and change management
• Mind set and paradigms related to mindset
Unit V : Change and modern business
• Modern development in business strategy
• Human impact of organization change
• Change in the global market
References:
✓ Change Equation: Capitalizing on Diversity for Effective Organizational Change by J. Renae Norton and Ronald E. Fox (Hardcover - Mar 1997)
✓ Harvard Business Review on Change (Harvard Business Review Paperback Series) by John P. Kotter, James Collins, Richard Pascale, and Jeanie Daniel Duck (Paperback - Sep 1998)
✓ Deep Change: Discovering the Leader Within (Jossey-Bass Business & Management Series) by Robert E. Quinn (Hardcover - Aug 14, 1996)
✓ Innovation Management: Strategies, Implementation, and Profits by Allan Afuah (Hardcover - Jun 15, 2002)
✓ The Manager as Change Agent: A Practical Guide to Developing High-Performance People and Organizations by Jerry Gilley, Scott Quatro, Erik Hoekstra, and Doug Whittle (Paperback - Jul 2, 2001)
✓ Communicating for Change (Jossey Bass Business and Management Series) by Roger D'Aprix (Paperback - Feb 16, 1996)
EXTRA DISCIPLINARY ELECTIVE- II
BUSINESS ETHICS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Unit I. UNDERSTANDING BUSINESS ETHICS
* Concept, Nature, Importance & S Scope of Business Ethics
* Ethical Values & Theories, Ground Rules of Business Ethics,
Office Ethics & Business Ethics
* Developing Morality Stage by Stage
* Developing Ethical Culture
Unit II. ETHICAL ISSUES IN WORK PLACE
* Civil Liberties, Personal Policies, Unions
* Challenges in Work Place - Information, Working Condition,
* Moral Choices - Obligation to the firm, Abuse of official parties,
Principles of Kick Backs, Gift & event
* Job discrimination - Discrimination, Sexual Harassment
Unit III. BUSINESS AND SOCIETY
* Consumers
* Business Responsibility - Product, Prizing, Labeling, Advertising
* Environmental Issues - Environmental & Environmental Ethics
Unit IV. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
* Issues & Principles
* Corporate Boards & Governance
* New Paradigms
* Compliance Report
* Made for Good Governance
Unit V. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE IN ENERGY MARKETING & LEADERSHIP
* Corporate Governance & Global Economy
* Experience of Argentina, Brazil, Czechoslovakia, Egypt
* Hungary, Korea & Singapore
* Corporate Governance & Leadership
REFERENCE BOOK:
* Bhatia.S.K., BUSINESS ETHICS & CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, Deep & Deep
Publication PVT LTD., New Delhi. 2004
* William H. Shaw, BUSINESS ETHICS, 4th Edition, Shompson wads worth US 2003
* CORPORATE GOVERNANCE: Principles & Paradigms, ICFAI
* CORPORATE GOVERNANCE IN EMERGING MARKET, Volume I & II, ICFAI.
FOURTH SEMESTER
CORE-HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT-II
Unit-I: Strategic HRM:
• Concept and aim of SHRM
• Approaches
• Formulation and implementation of HR Strategies
• SHRM Models
Unit-II: Competency based HRM:
• Concept and Uses
• Developing a behavioral competency frame work
• Developing a technical / functional competency frame work
• Application of competency frame work
Unit-III: Knowledge Management and Talent Management
• Basic concepts
• Approaches and issues of knowledge management
• Knowledge management system
• Talent management process
• Attraction and retention strategy
• Talent audits
Unit-IV: Rewarding People
• Reward management
• Market rate analysis
• Grade and play structures
• Rewarding special groups
Unit-V: International HRM
• The context of IHRM
• Challenges of IHRM
• Characteristics of IHRM
• International HR Policies
References:
✓ K.Aswathapa “Human resource and Personnel management-Text and Cases” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd, NewDelhi, 2002
✓ Biswajeet Pattyanak “Human resource Management” Prentice-Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2005, Newdelhi.
✓ Wendell L. French “Human resource Management” Houghton Mifflin Company, USA, (All India Publishers and Distributors, Chennai) 1997
✓ Robert L Mathis & John II.Jackson “Human resource Managemen-tenth edition” Thomson south western, Singapore, 2003
✓ Ian Beardwell & Len Holden “Human resource Management A contemporary Approach “ Financial Times- Pretince Hall, 2001
✓ David A. Decenzo & Stephen P. Robbins “Fundamentals of “Human resource Management” John Willey & Sons (Asia) Pvt, Ltd, 2005
✓ Gary Desseier, “Human resource Management” Pretince - Hall, India, 2005.
✓ Cynthia D. Fisher et al., Human Resource Management, Biztantra, New Delhi, 2004.
✓ John Bratton and Jeffrey gold, Human Resource Management Theory and Practice, Palgrave, New York, 1999.
✓ Michel Armstrong, A Hand Book of HRM Practice, Kogan Page, London, 2003.
CORE- ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR
Unit-I: Introduction
• Definition and types of organizations
• Theoretical approaches to the study of organization
• Classical organization theory – Bureaucracy – Scientific management
• Human relations approach (Hawthorne experient)
• Modern organizational theory- open systems approach and contingency approach
Unit-II: Organizational Behaviour
• Elements of Organizational behaviour systems
• Models of organizational behaviour: Autocratic- Custodial- Supportive- Collegial model
Unit-III: Group Dynamics
• Formal and informal groups
• Nature of groups
• Group cohesiveness, group performance and Group norms
Unit-IV: Leadership
• Leadership style
• Types of leadership
• Leadership skills
Unit- V: Organizational Communication
• Inter personal communication
• Downward Communication
• Upward communication
• Interactive Communication
Text Books
Fred, Luthans (1989) Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill, International Editions,New York.
Hugh, Arnold and Danial, Heldman (1989) Organizational Bahaviour
Keith, Davis and John Newstorm (1989), Human Behaviour at work: Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill Book and Co., New York.
Elective -III
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Unit I : Total Quality Concept and Objectives
The concept of TQM- principles of TQM - Modern quality management- the quality gurus of Deming , Jurans and Crosby-quality and business performance- quality in leadership – communication – culture- management system
Unit II : Total quality management-
Quality – a traditional misconception of quality management – the total quality management approach – commitment and attitude to quality – the three hard components of TQM – Implementing TQM - Essential for quality.
Unit III: Quality in various levels – inspection - -definition of inspection – reasons for inspection – functional testing - the role of testing – fitness for purpose – measurement – testing –National and international standards – aims and principles of standardization – international standardization – European standardization and the European community – National standardization – certification-
Unit IV : Organizing for design quality – implementation of product design – aligning responsibility with authority - automation of testing – test procedures – measuring service quality - inspection tools and equipment.- vendor assurance – informal organization for conformity quality – establishing a quality programme
UNIT –V: Bench marking – the essence of Benchmarking and the Bottom Line – the benefits of Bench marking – the bench marking process BS ISO 9000 Certification around the world – the standards who can register – the certification process – benefits of ISO 9000 and problems - the third party audit - ISO 9000 Vs the Baldrige award – ISO 14000 – Components of ISO 14000 - Registration – Benefits
References:
✓ Xu , Q. (1994) The making of TQM: History and margins of the hi(gh) story
✓ ^ Bergman B. & Klefsjö B. (2007) Kvalitet från behov till använding
✓ ^ Bergman B. & Klefsjö B. (2007) Kvalitet från behov till använding
✓ Business Process Benchmarking (The Asqc Total Quality Management) by Robert C. Camp (Hardcover - Jan 1995)
✓ Advancing Quality: Total Quality Management in the National Health Service (Health Services Management) by Richard Joss and Maurice Kogan (Hardcover - Oct 1995)
✓ Introducing Total Quality Management: A Credit Union Reader by Cuna (Paperback - Sep 1993)
5. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN ENGLISH
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
Course Structure: Paper IX
|Title of the Course / Paper | |
| |Shakespeare Studies |
|Category of the Course C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
| |2nd Year &Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course |The objective of this paper is to make students understand and enjoy Shakespeare’s plays, Criticism of Theatre. It |
| |also attempts to provide the students with the context of Elizabethan England from the evolving contemporary |
| |perspectives down the ages. |
|Course Outline |UNIT I |
| | |
| |Shakespeare Theatre; Theatre Conventions; Sources; Problems of categorization; Trends in Shakespeare Studies upto the|
| |19th Century; Sonnet and court politics; famous actors; theatre criticism; Shakespeare into film & play production. |
| |UNIT 2 |
| | |
| |Sonnets Sonnets – 12, 65, 86,130 |
| | |
| |Comedies Much Ado About Nothing |
| |Winter’s Tale |
| |UNIT 3 |
| | |
| |Tragedy Othello |
| | |
| |UNIT 4 |
| | |
| |History Henry IV Part I |
| |UNIT 5 |
| | |
| |Shakespeare Criticism |
| |Modern approaches - mythical, archetypal, feminist, post-colonial, New historicist; |
| |A.C. Bradley (extract) Chapter V & VI and the New |
| |Introduction by John Russell |
| |Brown in Shakespearean |
| |Tragedy by A.C.Bradley, |
| |London , Macmillan, Third |
| |Edition , 1992 |
| | |
| |Wilson Knight Macbeth and the Metaphysic of |
| |Evil (1976, V.S. Seturaman & |
| |S. Ramaswamy English |
| |Critical Tradition Vol. I. |
| |Chennai, Macmillan). |
| | |
| |Stephen Greenblatt Invisible Bullets: Rennaissance |
| |Authority and its Subversion, |
| |Henry IV & Henry V, in |
| |Shakespearean Negotiations. |
| |New York: |
| |Oxford University Press, 1988 |
| |Also in Political Shakespeare: |
| |New Essays in Cultural |
| |Materialism. Eds.Jonathan |
| |Dollimore and Alan Sinfield |
| |Manchester University Press, |
| |1994 |
| | |
| |Ania Loomba Sexuality and Racial Difference |
| |in Gender, Race, And |
| |Renaissance Drama, Manchester UP, 1989. |
| | |
| | |
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
Recommended Texts:
1. Stephen Greenblatt, ed., 1997, The Norton Shakespeare, ( Romances & Poems, Tragedies, Comedies), W.W. Norton & Co., London.
2. Standard editions of texts.
Reference Books:
1. Bradley, A.C., 1904, Shakespearean Tragedy, Macmillan, London.
2. Spurgeon, 1935, C.F.E. Shakespeare’s, Imagery and what It Tells us, Cambridge UP, Cambridge.
3. E.M.W. Tilliyard, 1943, Elizabethan World Picture, Chatto and Windus, London.
4. Knight G.W., 1947, The Crown of Life: Essays in Interpretation of Shakespeare’s Final Plays, Oxford.
5. Harrison, 1951, G.B. Shakespeare’s Tragedies, Routledge, London.
6. Henn, T.R., 1956, The Harvest of Tragedy, London.
7. Knight G.W., 1957, The Wheel of Fire: Essays in Interpretation of Shakespeare’s Sombre Tragedies, New York.
8. Muir K., 1961, William Shakespeare: The Great Tragedies, London.
9. Hunter G.K. William Shakespeare, 1962, The Late Comedies, London & New Year.
10. Knights, L.C., 1962, William Shakespeare: The Histories, London.
11. Eastman A.M. & G.B. Garrison eds., 1964, Shakespeare’s Critics from Jonson to Auden : A Medley of Judgments, Michigan.
12. Oscar James Campbell, ed., 1966, A Shakespeare Encyclopedia, London, Methuen & Co.
13. Jonathan Dollimore, ed., 1984, The Radical Tragedy, The Harvester Press, Cambridge.
14. Shakespeare Surveys, (Relevant Volumes).
15. John f. Andrews, ed., 1985, William Shakespeare: His World, His Work, His Influence, Charles Scribner’s Sons.
16. Stephen Greenblatt, 1988, Shakespearean Negotiations, Oxford University Press .
17. Ania Loomba, 1989, Gender, Race, Renaissance Drama, Manchester, MUP.
18. Jonathan Dollimore and Alan Sinfield, eds., 1994, Political Shakespeare, Manchester University Press.
Website, e-learning resources
Course Structure: Paper X
|Title of the Course / Paper | |
| |English Language and Linguistics |
|Category of the Course C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
| |2nd year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course |Objectives of the course is to enable the students to have a conceptual understanding of the English Language in a |
| |historical perspective; to recognize, identify and use sounds and structures; to identify and explain process of |
| |second language acquisition; to adopt and practise English Language Teaching approaches. |
|Course Outline |UNIT I |
| |The History of English Language |
| |The Descent of the English Language |
| |The Old and Middle English periods, the Renaissance and after |
| |The growth of vocabulary |
| |Change of meaning |
| |The evaluation of Standard English |
| |UNIT 2 |
| | |
| |Phonology |
| | |
| |Cardinal vowels, The English vowels, Diphthongs and consonants |
| |Transcription |
| |The syllable, Received pronunciation and the need for a model |
| |UNIT 3 |
| | |
| |Linguistics |
| | |
| |Morphology, Phrases and sentences |
| |Syntax, Semantics |
| |Pragmatics and discourse analysis |
| |UNIT 4 |
| | |
| |English Language Teaching |
| | |
| |First and Second Language Acquisition |
| |Role of Teacher, Learner, Classroom |
| |Language Teaching Approaches |
| |UNIT 5 |
| | |
| |Approaches to Grammar |
| | |
| |Structuralist Grammar |
| |Transformative Generative Grammar |
| |c) Communicative Grammar |
| | |
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
Recommended Texts:
1. F.T. Wood, 1969, “An Outline History of the English Language, Macmillan, London. Reprint.
2. Palmer, Frank, 1973, Grammar, Penguin.
3. Gimson A.C., 1975, An Introduction to the Pronunciation of English, ELBS and Edward Arnold Ltd., London.
4. S. Pitt Corder, 1987, Applied Linguistics, Penguin.
5. George Yule, 1996, The Study of Language, Second Edition Cambridge UP.
6. Crystal David, 1997, Linguistics, Penguin.
7. A.C. Baugh, A History of the English Language,
8. Crystal, David, 2002, Internet and Language.
Reference Books:
1. H.H.Sterne, 1984, Fundamental Concepts in Language Teaching , OUP.
2. Diane Larsven –Freeman, 2004, Techniques and Principles in Language Teaching, OUP, Indian Edition.
3. Balasubramanian T., A Textbook of English Phonetics, Macmillan.
Website, e-learning resources
exchanges.education/engteaching/onlineca.htm_35K
Course Structure: Paper XI
|Title of the Course / Paper | |
| |Literary Criticism and Literary Theory |
|Category of the Course C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
| |2nd Year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course | This paper intends to give an overview of the critical trends starting from Aristotle’s classical criticism to the |
| |post-structural and post-colonial theories. Classical, New-classical, Romantic critics are represented to |
| |familiarise the students with aesthetic concepts. Matthew Arnold and T.S.Eliot lead the way to the humanistic |
| |approach while texts from Brooks, Frye, Said lead the student to structuralist and post-structuralist approaches. |
|Course Outline |UNIT I |
| | |
| |Imitation - Pleasure and Instruction - Myths and Archetypes -Poetic Structure -Diction; Text –Author-Reader - The |
| |‘Other’ – Formalism – Structuralism – Deconstruction – Post-Colonialism. |
| |UNIT 2 |
| | |
| |Classical, Neo - Classical and Romantic Criticism |
| | |
| |Aristotle Poetics: Aristotle’s view of |
| |Imitation & Definition of |
| |Tragedy |
| |Chapters 1-3,6-12 and 14. |
| | |
| |Sir Philip Sidney Apologie for Poetry |
| |William Wordsworth Preface to Lyrical Ballads |
| |S.T. Coleridge Biographia Literaria Ch 14 |
| |UNIT 3 |
| | |
| |Humanistic Criticism |
| | |
| |Matthew Arnold Study of Poetry |
| |T.S. Eliot Tradition and the Individual Talent |
| |UNIT 4 |
| | |
| |Formalism and Structuralism |
| | |
| |Cleanth Brooks Language of Paradox |
| |Northrop Frye The Archetypes of Literature |
| |Gerard Genette Structuralism and Literary |
| |Criticism |
| | |
| |UNIT 5 |
| | |
| |Post Structuralism |
| | |
| |Roland Barthes Death of the Author |
| |Edward Said (From “Orientalism” Extract in |
| |A Post Colonial Studies |
| |Reader) |
| | |
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
Recommended Texts:
1. T.S. Dorsch. Tr., 1965, Classical Literary Criticism Penguin Books.
Chapters 1 to 3, 6 to 12 and 14.
2. David Lodge, ed., 1972, Twentieth Century Literary Criticism, Longman, London.
3. S. Ramaswamy and V.S. Seturaman, 1976,1979 (Two Vols.), English Critical Tradition, Macmillan, Chennai.
4. David Lodge, ed., 1989, Modern Literary Theory, Longman, London.
5. V.S. Seturaman, ed., 1989 Contemporary Criticism, Macmillan, Chennai.
6. Ashcroft, Griffith & Tiffin, eds., 1995, Post-Colonial Studies Reader, Routledge, London.
Reference Books :
1. M.H. Abrams, , 1953, The Mirror and the Lamp, OUP, Oxford.
2. Wimsatt and Brooks, ed., 1957, Literary Criticism – A Short History, Prentice-Hall, Delhi.
3. David Daiches, 1984, Critical approaches to Literature, Revised Edition, Orient Longman, Hyderabad.
Course Structure: ELECTIVE
|Title of the Course / Paper |Literature, Analysis, Approaches and Applications |
|Category of the Course (Elective |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|Within the Dept)/ED |2nd year & Third Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course |To enable the student to experience the practical aspects of literature studies to utilise the resulting skills in |
| |day-to-day life |
|Course Outline |UNIT I |
| | |
| |Practical Criticism – Critique and Book Review. |
| |UNIT 2 |
| | |
| |Journalism and Mass Communication – Advertising |
| |UNIT 3 |
| | |
| |Report Writing |
| |UNIT 4 |
| | |
| |Proof reading and editing |
| |UNIT 5 |
| | |
| |Technical Writing – Specs, Manuals, Business Correspondence |
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
Reference Books:
1. Practical Criticism : D.H. Rawlinson, The Practice of Criticism V.S. Seturaman et.al., Practical Criticism C.B. Cox: The Practice of Criticism.
2. Resource books for teachers (eds) Krishnaswamy & Sivaraman. Interface between Literature and Language (ed) Durant & Fabb. Reading Literature, Gower & Pearson.
3. Kamath, M.V. The Journalist ‘s Handbook, Vani Eductional Books,
New Delhi, 1986.
4. Kamath, M.V. Professional Journalism.
5. Teal, L. and Taylor R. Into the Newsroom: An Introduction to Journalism.
6. Warren, Thomas, L. , 1985, Technical Writing. Purpose, Process and Form, Wadsworth Publishing Company.
7. Itule, Bruce. D., 1994, News Writing and Reporting for Today’s Media. McGraw Hill.
8. Gerson, Sharon, J. and Steven, M. Gerson., 2000, Technical Writing: Process and Product, Prentice Hall.
Course Structure: Elective
|Title of the Course / Paper |Copy Editing |
|Category of the Course ED |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|(Elective within the department) |Second Year & Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course |To introduce students to the sphere of Publishing, its various aspects and train them in the skills of copy editing. |
|Course Outline |UNIT I |
| | |
| |Publishing Industry: Concept; Organisation; Function; Depts |
| |UNIT 2 |
| | |
| |Process – Manuscript to Pre-Press Production – An Overview |
| |UNIT 3 |
| | |
| |Copy Editing: - Basics; Function; Role; Process; |
| | |
| |Copy Editor; Role and Responsibility |
| | |
| |UNIT 4 |
| | |
| |The Book: Book as a Product; Ethics and Politics in Publishing |
| |UNIT 5 |
| | |
| |E-Publishing; Prospects of Copy Editing |
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
Recommended Texts:
1. 1982, The Chicago Manual of Style, Prentice – Hall of India Pvt Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Rob Kitchin & Duncan Fuller, 2005, The Academic’s Guide to Publishing, Vistaar Publications, New Delhi.
Reference Books:
1. John F.J. Cabibi, 1973, Copy Preparation for Printing, Mc-Graw-Hill Book Company, U.S.A.
2. Charles W. Ryan, 1974, Writing: A Practical Guide for Business and Industry, John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York.
3. The Bodley Head, 1976, Type for Books: A Designer’s Manual, Great Britain.
4. Sir Stanley Unwin L.L.D, 1976, The Truth About Publishing, George Allen & Unwin Ltd., London.
Website:
FOURTH SEMESTER
Course Structure: Paper XII
|Title of the Course / Paper | |
| |Twentieth Century Poetry |
|Category of the Course C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
| |2nd Year &Third Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course | The aim of this paper is to sensitise the students to various aspects of British 20th century poetry. It embraces |
| |important ideas, movements and systems of thought that contributed to the rich diversity of 20th century life in |
| |England and in Europe. |
|Course Outline |UNIT I |
| | |
| |Edwardian and Georgian Poetry - Modernism – Modernity – Religion – Imagism – Symbolism – Influence of |
| |representational arts in poetry - European influences – Influence of Marx on World Wars – Welfare State – Free Verse |
| |– Montage, Postmodern Poetry and Politics. |
| |UNIT 2 |
| | |
| |Classical Modernists |
| | |
| |W.B. Yeats Sailing to Byzantium |
| |T.S. Eliot The Wasteland |
| |UNIT 3 |
| | |
| |War and Modernist Poetry |
| | |
| |Wilfred Owen Strange Meeting |
| |W.H. Auden In Memory of W.B. Yeats |
| |UNIT 4 |
| | |
| |Anti–Modernism |
| | |
| |Movement Poets |
| | |
| |Philip Larkin Whitsun Weddings |
| |Ted Hughes Crow’s Theology |
| |Thom Gunn On the Move |
| | |
| |Welsh Poets |
| | |
| |Dylan Thomas Do Not Go Gentle Into That Good |
| |Night |
| |R. S. Thomas Here |
| |UNIT 5 |
| | |
| |Post-Modern Poetry |
| | |
| |Seamus Heaney Digging |
| | |
| |Craig Raine A Martian Sends a Post Card Home |
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
Recommended Texts:
1. Michael Schmidt, ed., 1980, Eleven British Poets: An anthology, Methuen & Co. Ltd., Cambridge.
2. Richard Ellmann & Robert O’Clair, 1988, The Norton Anthology of Modern Poetry, Norton & Company, New York.
References Books:
1. Cleanth Brooks, 1939, Modern Poetry and the Tradition, University of North Carolina , Press.
2. T.H. Jones, 1963, Dylan Thomas, Oliver & Boyd Ltd.
3. Norman Jeffares, 1971, Yeats: Profiles in Literature, Routledge & Kegan Paul London.
4. Harlod Bloom, 1972, Yeats, Oxford University Press, London.
5. 1974, Eight Contemporary Poets, Oxford University Press. London,
6. 1976, Poetry of the First World War, J.M. Gregson Studies in English Literature Series Edward Arnold, London.
7. John Unterecker, 1977, A Reader’s Guide to William Butler Yeats, Thames and Hudson Southampton.
8. 1978, The Pelican Guide to English Literature: The Modern Age, Penguin Books.
9. P.R. King, 1979, Nine Contemporary Poets: Critique of poetry, Metheun, London.
10. Rajnath, 1980, T.S. Eliot’s The Theory and Poetry, Arnold Hienemann: New Delhi.
Website, e-learning resources
Course Structure: Paper XIII
|Title of the Course / Paper |Writings by and on Women |
|Category of the Course C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
| |2nd year & Fourth Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course |The primary aim of this paper is to give space to writings by women. Even in the syllabus a |
| |woman writer is marginalized. However, in the process of giving adequate space to women |
| |writers the paper aims at sensitizing students to the problems faced by women and how women |
| |have responded in their attempt to expose them, in their writings. |
|Course Outline |UNIT 1: Varieties of Feminism – concept of gender – |
| |androgyny- Language of women – |
| |environment and women- double |
| |marginalisation. |
| |UNIT 2: Poetry: |
| |Anne Bradstreet Prologue |
| |Marianne Moore Poetry |
| |Sylvia Plath Lady Lazarus. |
| |Maya Angelou Still I Rise |
| |Margaret Atwood Marsh |
| |Languages |
| |Charmaine D’Souza When God |
| |made me a |
| |Whore(Rajani P, V. |
| |Rajagopalan, Nirmal |
| |Selvamony, eds., |
| |Living & Feeling, |
| |Dept. of English., |
| |M.C.C.) |
| |UNIT 3: Prose: |
| |John Stuart Mill On subjection of women (V.S. |
| |Seturaman & C.T. Indra ed., |
| |1994, Victorian Prose,Macmillan |
| |India, Chennai. pp-318) |
| |Virginia Woolf A Room of One’s Own |
| |(chapters 3 & 4) (Jennifer Smith |
| |ed., 1998, A Room of One’s Own by Virginia Woolf, |
| |Cambridge UP, New Delhi.) |
| | |
| |Vandana Shiva “Introduction to |
| |Ecofeminism”( Vandana Shiva & |
| |Maria Mies, 1993, Ecofeminism, |
| |Kali for Women, New Delhi. |
| | |
| |Alice Walker In Search of Our Mother’s |
| |Garden |
| |UNIT 4: Fiction |
| |Arundathi Roy The God of Small Things |
| |Jean Rhys Wide Sargosa Sea |
| |Kate Chopin The Awakening |
| | |
| |UNIT 5: Drama |
| |Lorraine Hansberry Raisin in the Sun |
| |Jane Harrison Stolen |
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
Recommended Texts:
1. Sandra M. Gilbert and Susan Gubar, ed., 1985, The Norton Anthology of Literature by Women, New York.
2. Rajani P. , V. Rajagopalan, and Nirmal Selvamony, Who says my hand a needle better fits: An Anthology of American Women Writing, Dept. of English, Madras Christian College, Tambaram.
3. Standard editions of texts.
Reference Books :
1. Lisa Tuttle, 1986, Encyclopedia of Feminism, Facts on File Publications, New York.
2. Catherine Belsey & Jane Moore, eds., 1977, The Feminist Reader, II ed., Macmillan, London.
3. Kathy J. Wilson, 2004, Encyclopedia of Feminist Literature, Greenwood Press, Westport.
Course Structure: Paper XIV
|Title of the Course / Paper |General Essay |
|Category of the Course C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
| |Second Year & Fourth Semester |4 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course |The course aims at training the students to write long essays on a given topic in the literary/critical history. This|
| |course will help the students to write the UGC – JRF examination and other national level competitive examinations. |
|Course outline |Drama |
| |The Novel |
| |Poetry |
| |Indian and Commonwealth Drama |
| |The Twentieth-Century American Novel |
| |The Indian and Commonwealth Novel |
| |The Satirical Essay |
| |The Neo-Classical Age |
| |The Pre-Raphaelites |
| |The Art for Arts Sake Movement |
| |The Symbolist Movement |
| |The Modernists |
| |Literary Criticism from Sidney to Johnson |
| |Nineteenth-Century Criticism |
| |Twentieth-Century American Literature |
| |The Shakespeare Canon |
| |The Age of Shakespeare |
| |Shakespearean Tragedy |
| |Shakespearean Comedy |
| |Shakespeare’s Problem Plays |
| |Shakespeare’s Histories |
| |Fools and Clowns in Shakespeare |
| |Villians in Shakespeare’s Plays |
| |Women in Shakespeare’s Plays |
| |The Influence of Foreign Languages on English |
| |English as a World Language |
| |Characteristics of Indian English |
| |The Teaching of Indian English at the Teritary level |
Course Structure: Elective
|Title of the Course / Paper |Film Studies |
|Category of the Course E (Elective|Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
|within the department) /ED |Second Year & Fourth Semester |3 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course |To combine the popular interest in films with technical and socio-cultural dimensions of film appreciation. |
|Course Outline |UNIT I |
| | |
| |History of Cinema in India; Major landmarks in India Cinema |
| |UNIT 2 |
| | |
| |Kinds of Films |
| | |
| |Historical |
| |Patriotic |
| |Documentary |
| |Thrillers etc. |
| |UNIT 3 |
| | |
| |Art of Film Making: Some Important Techniques |
| | |
| |Acting/ Photography/Direction/Scriptwriting etc |
| |UNIT 4 |
| | |
| |Films and Entertainment |
| |Films and Social Responsibility |
| |UNIT 5 |
| | |
| |Review of Films |
C – Core; E – Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
1.Recommended Texts:
1. Ed. Bill Nichols, 1993 , Movies and Methods Vol. I, Edition Seagull Books, Calcutta.
2. Ed. Bill Nichols, 1993, Movies and Methods Vol. II, Edition Seagull Books, Calcutta.
3. Susan Hayward, 2004, Key Concepts in Cinema Studies, Routledge, London.
Reference Books :
1. Louis Giannetti, 1972, Understanding Movies, Prentice Hall, New Jersey.
2. Ed. S. Vasudevan, 2000, Making Meaning in Indian Cinema, OUP, New
Delhi.
Website: academic film.html.
Course Structure: Paper XV
|Title of the Course / Paper | |
| |Project Plus Viva Voce |
|Category of the Course C |Year & Semester |Credits |Subject Code |
| |Second Year & Fourth Semester |6 | |
|Pre-requisites |Minimum Entry requirements for the course / Eligibility |
|Objectives of the Course |The project aims at equipping the students with the efficient way of presenting their research work and findings in a|
| |methodological fashion. |
6. & 7. M.A. BRANCH III ECONOMICS AND BRANCH III
F- BUSINESS ECONOMICS
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
Common Core Courses for both Branch III Economics and Branch III F Business Economics
Core-Course/Paper-11. MACRO ECONOMIC THEORY - I
UNIT I
National Income Components – circular flow of income in two-three and four sector economy- concepts of social accounting, Input-Output accounting, flow of funds accounting and Balance of payments accounting
UNIT II
Basic assumptions of the classists, Says Law of Market, Classical theory of Employment saving and Investment theory wage and price flexibility criticisms of classical theory.
UNIT III
Keynesian theory of employment and income , The concept of under employment – Aggregate demand, The Consumption function and its determinants – Hypotheses of Absolute, Relative and Permanent Incomes and Life Cycle. The Investment function and its determinants, The Saving function and Marginal Efficiency of Capital.
UNIT IV
Theory of Interest – Classical – Loanable Fund – Liquidity Preference Theory – Hicks – Hansen IS-LM Model.
UNIT V
Theory of Money : Quantity theory money Fischers and Cambridge equation, Keynesian theory of money – Modern Quantity theory of money – Milton Firedman – Patinkin's Real Balance Effect – Tobin's Portfolio analysis, Crisis in Keynesian economics and the revival of monetarism.
Core-Course/Paper-12. PUBLIC ECONOMICS -I
UNIT I
Government in Mixed Economy – Public and Private Sectors – Cooperation or Competition – Role of Public Enterprises in India – Pricing Policies of Public Enterprises – Administered prices – Peak load pricing – Marginal cost pricing.
UNIT II
Welfare foundation of public economics – Pareto optimality – Arrow's social welfare function – Majority Rule – Intensity of Preference – Transaction cost and non-market decision making.
UNIT III
Theory of Social goods – Market failures – Imperfection – Decreasing cost condition – Collective Consumption – Externalities – Correction of externalities – Partial and General Equilibrium. Approaches – Theory of Second best .
UNIT IV
Rationale of Public Policy - Allocation of resources- provision of public goods; Voluntary exchange model; Impossibility of decentralized provisions of public goods (contributions of Samuelson and Musgrave); Stabilization policy- Keynesian case for stabilization policy.
UNIT V
Public Expenditure – Wagner's Law – Wiseman – Peacock Hypothesis – Structure and Growth of Public Expenditure – Evaluation of Public expenditure – Cost Benefit Analysis – Shadow Prices – Discount Rate – Reforms in Public Expenditure –Performance Budgeting – Programme Budgeting - Zero Base Budgeting – Appraisal of Public Expenditure Policy in India.
Core-Course/Paper-13. INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS – I
UNIT I
Nature and scope of International Economics: Causes of emergence of Foreign Trade – Theories of International Trade: Classical theories – Adam smith, Absolute cost Advantage theory, David Ricardo Comparative cost Advantage theory and J.S.Mill’s Comparative cost advantage and reciprocal theory. Neo Classical theory of Haberler, Opportunity cost Advantage theory. Basic concepts – Community indifference curves and Offer curves.
UNIT II
Modern theory of International Trade-Heckscher-Ohlin contribution – factor price equalization theorem-factor prices and factor reversals – obstacles to factor price equalization.
UNIT III
Terms of Trade – different concepts of Terms of trade – Determinants of Terms of trade – static and dynamic gains from trade – Samuelson on gains from trade – Immiserising growth – Technical progress and trade – Hicksian graphical analysis – neutral, capital saving and labour saving technologies and its impact on terms of trade.
UNIT IV
Role of foreign capital in economic development – issues in foreign capital in economic development – theory of direct investment – issues in foreign direct investment – Multinational Corporations – Transfers and Capital movements – interest rate and capital movements – foreign aid.
UNIT V
Alternative theories of Trade – Economies of Scale, Imperfect competition and International trade. Monopolistic competition – Technology imitation gaps and Product cycles
PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE - III
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT -II
UNIT I
Basic division of functional activities – method of grouping activities - typical patterns used - of organizational charts and manual
UNIT II
Authority relationship- line function and staff – basics of delegation of responsibility and authority. Centralization and decentralization of authority and the pros and cons of each.
UNIT III
Span of control – Pros and cons of narrow and wide spans of control – optimum spans
UNIT IV
Motivation – determination of behaviour – Employee as a “Total Person” – Primary incentives.
UNIT V
Management by objectives – Management by exception – Decision making theory in management.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. Harold Koontz, Cyril O&Donnell(1968) :Principles of Management,
McGraw Hill Publishing
Co., Ltd.,
2. Prasad I.M. : Principles and Practice of
Management, Sultanchand &
Co
Books for Reference
1. Allen, LA. : Management and organization,
McGraw Hill Publishing Co., Ltd.,
2. Chandra Bose, D (2002) : Principles of Management and
Administration, PHI.
3. Hellrigel & Jackson, Solum : Management – A Contempora
based approach, Thomson, South Western.
4. Hennagan : Management concepts and practices,
Macmillan India, Ltd.,
5. Peter Drucker : The Practice of Management –
Hillied Publications.
6. Sathyaraju (2002) : Management : Text & Cases, PHI.
7. Stoner (2002) : Management, 6th Edition, PHI.
8. Robbins : Management, 7th Edition, PHI.
9. Certo (2002) : Modern Management, 9th Edition,
PHI.
PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE – III
COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEM –II
(FOR BRANCH III ECONOMICS)
UNIT I
Economic Reforms in Soviet Russia: Perestrokia – Need – Features – Progress – Massage for the world.
UNIT II
Economic Development of China since 1949: Economic conditions prior to revolution – Agricultural and Industrial strategies during Mao period – Great leap forward – the people’s commune, cultural revolution – Post Mao Economic reforms.
UNIT III
Mixed economic system – features of mixed economic system – role of private and public sector – experience of India’s a mixed economy.
UNIT IV
Convergence of Capitalism and Socialism: The convergence thesis – Capitalism and Socialism in highly industrialized Societies – Common Features and Dissimilarities.
UNIT V
Debate between the proponents of capitalist democracies and advocates of Socialism and its relevance today.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. Sen, K.K. : Comparative Economic System, Sultan & Chand
Company.
2. David W. Conklin : Comparative Economic System, Cambridge
University Press.
3. Grossman : Comparative Economic System.
4. James Angresano : Comparative Economic System, Pearson
Education
Books for Reference:
1. Karl Marx : Das Capital, Vol I,II and III
2. Marx and Engels : Communist Manifesto
3. Maurice Dobb : Economic Theory and Socialism. Routlege and
Kegan Paul, London.
4. Maurice Dobb : Soviet Economic Development since 1979.
5. Dobb, M. (1969) : Welfare Economics and Economics of Socialism,
Cambridge University Press Cambridge.
6. Heyek, F.A. (1935),: Collectivist Economic Planning, Routeldge and
Kegan paul, London.
7. Lange, O. and
F. Taylor : On the Economic Theory of Socialism(1938).
University of Minnesotta press, Minnestta.
8. Lenin, V.I.: On Marx and
Engels, (1975) : Foreign languages Press, peking.
9. Lening, V.I.: “Let Wing” :Communism, An infinite Disorder (1975).
Foreign Languages Press, Peking.
10. Joan Robinson : An Essay on Marxian Economics. Macmillan,
London.
11. Wilczynski, J. : Economics of Socialism, 4 e. (1981), George
Allen and Unwin, London.
12. Mikhail Gorbechev : Perestroike – New Thinking for our country and
the World, Collins, London.
13. Sartaj Aziz : Learning from China (1978): Macmillan
Company, London.
14.Xu Dixin : China’s search for Economic Growth – The
Chinese Economy since 1949.
15. Yu Guangyuan (ed.) : China’s Socialist Moodernisation (1984). Foreign
Languages press, Beijing.
16.Anchishkin, A : The Theory of Growth of a Socialist Economy
(1977).Progress Publishers, Moscow.
17. Kozlov, G.A. (ed.) : Political Economy – Socialism (1977).
Progressice Publishers, Moscow.
18. Wiles, P.J.D. : Economic Institutions Compared (1977). Basill
Blackwell, Oxford.
19. Tangri, S.S. (ed.) : Command yersus Demand; Systems for
Economic Growth (1967). Health and Company, Boston.
20. Hecey, Lewis, H. : History of Economic Thought, (1949). The
Macmillan Company, New York.
21. Byres, Terence : The Indian Economy (OIP).
PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE - III
MATHEMATICS FOR ECONOMISTS - II
UNIT I
Constrained Maxima and Minima – Use of Lagrange Multiplier Method – Application to Utility Maximisation, Profit Maximisation and Cost Minimisation.
UNIT II
Matrices – Matrix operations – Commutative Associative and Distributive Laws – Determinants – Rank of a matrix – Matrix Inverse – Cramer’s Rule.
UNIT III
Input - Output Analysis – Leontieff Model.
UNIT IV
Linear Programming – Graphical Method – Simplex Method – Primal and Dual.
UNIT V
Elementary Integration Techniques – Indefinite Intergrals – Definite Intergrals – Economic Applications of Integrals – Consumer’s Surplus – Producer’s Surplus.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. Edward. T. Dowling :Mathematics for Economists, Mcgraw – Hill
Book Company.
2. Mehta V.L.
& Madnani : Mathematics for Economists, Sultan Chand and
Sons.
Books for References:
1. Allen R.G.D. :Mathematical Analysis for Economists,
Macmillan andCompany Limited, London.
2. Chiang A.C. :Fundamental Methods of Mathematical
Economics, Mcgraw – Hill Book Company.
3. Stafford.L.W.T. :Mathematis for Economist, The English Language
Book Society and Macdonald and Evans Limited,
London.
4. Mabett. A.J. :Mathematics for Economists, Macmillan Master
Series.
5. Weber : Mathematics for Economists.
PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE - III
ENVIRONMENTAL ECONOMICS –II
I Environmental problems
UNIT I
Habitat: Urban and rural settlements – rapid growth of Population – lack of basic services.
UNIT II
Energy : Classification – Household energy needs – role of non – conventional energy sources – fuel wood crisis in rural and urban areas.
UNIT III
Wild life: Diversity of Fauna and Flora in India - endangered species – causes, effects and control of reduction in bio-diversity.
II Environmental Policies
UNIT IV
Basic approaches to environmental policy – National Campaign on environment by voluntary agencies.
UNIT V
Role of Official Agencies: Tiwari committee Report – Departmental of Environment – Environmental appraisal of development Projects – Role of the State Pollution Control Boards – Important Central and State Enactments to Control Environmental Pollution.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. Sankar. U, (2001) : Environmental Economics, Oxford
University Press, New Delhi.
2. Karpagam. M, (1991) : Environmental Economics, Sterling
Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Sankaran. S, (1994) : Environmental Economics, Margam
Publications, Chennai.
Books for Reference:
1. State of India’s Environment (1999) : The Citizens of fifth Report
Center for Science and
Environment. New Delhi.
2. Nick Hanley, J.F. Shogren
and Ben White (1971) : Environmental Economics,
Macmillan, London.
3. D.W. Pearce and J.J. Warford, (1993) : Economics, Environment
and Sustainabl Development,
Oxford University Press.
4. Tan Hodge, (1995) : Environmental
Economics,Macmillan Press
5. Trivedi R.N. (1988) : Environmental Pollution
and its impact on
Organism, Bhargavi
Bhavan, Patna.
7. Rajasekar. C.V. (1992) : Critical Issues in
Environmental
Management, Discovery
Publishing House,
New Delhi.
7. Seneca Joseph & M.K. Tausing : Environmental Economics,
Prentice Hall.
PAPER 14 – ELECTIVE - III
MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING – II
(FOR BRANCE III –F-BUSINESS ECONOMICS)
UNIT I
Cost Accounting – Meaning – Purpose and Scope – Cost Accounting distinguished from Financial and Management Accounting – Essentials of a Good Costing System – Elements of Cost – Cost of Goods Manufactured – Preparation of Cost Sheet and Tenders
UNIT II
Standard Costing – Meaning of Standard Cost – Standard Costing distinguished from Budgetary Control - Variance Analysis – Meaning – Advantages – Different Variances – Material Variance – Labour Variance – Sales Variance (excluding overhead variances).
UNIT III
Marginal Costing – Absorption Costing – Meaning of Marginal Cost - Profit Volume Ratio – Break-Even Point – Break-Even Charts – Margin of Safety – Profit Planning – Decision Involving Alternative Choices.
UNIT IV
Capital Budgeting – Meaning – Importance – Methods – Payback Method – Net Present Value Methods and Internal Rate of Return (IRR) methods – Simple Tools for Risk Analysis – CPM – PERT – Use of Probability (Simple Problems only).
UNIT V
Working Capital – Meaning – Importance – Factors affecting Working Capital – Working Capital Forecasting - Leverages – Meaning - Financial Leverage – Operating Leverage – Combined Leverage
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. Maheswari. S.N. : Management Accounting.
2. Palanivel. S. : Management Accounting.
Books for Reference
1. Batty. J : Management Accountancy, Macdonald and
Evos.
2. Horngren, C.T. : Cost Accounting – A Management
Emphasis, Prentice Hall.
3. Man Mohan & Goyal S.N. : Principle of Management Accounting ,
Sahityabhavan, Agra.
4. Robert N, Anthony D.C.S. :Management Accounting Principles, D.B. Taraporevala Sons and Co., Private Ltd.
PAPER – 15 EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - II
ECONOMICS OF DEVELOPMENT – II
UNIT I
Poverty, inequality, and Development – measuring inequality and poverty – poverty, inequality, and social welfare – Kuznets’inverted-U Hypothesis – Growth and inequality – Rural poverty – women and poverty – Ahluwalia – Chenery Welfare Index.
UNIT II
Population Growth and Economic Development: Causes, consequences – and controversies – population growth and the quality of life – the causes of high fertility in developing countries – the consequences of High fertility – goals and objectives.
UNIT III
Roles of Education and Health – Investing in education and health: the human capital approach – child labour – the gender gap: women and education – educational systems and de3velopment – health systems and development.
UNIT IV
Agricultural Transformation and rural development – agricultural progress and rural development – the structure of agrian system in the developing world – the economics of agricultural development: transition – subsistence farming: Risk Aversion – improving small scale agriculture – conditions of rural development – macroeconomic instability, IMF stabilization policies and their critics.
UNIT V
The nature of development planning and the role of the state – planning in mixed developing economics – the rationale for development planning – fiscal policy for development – macrostability and resource mobilization – state owned enterprises. Military expenditures and economic development.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. Adelman, I (1961) : Theories of Economic Growth and
Development, Stanford University Press,
Stanford.
2. Michael P. Todaro and
Stephen C. Smith (2003) : Economic Development, Pearson
Education Pte. Ltd., Singapore.
Books for Reference:
1. Chakravarthy, S. (1982) : Alternative Approaches to a theory of
Economic Growth, Oxford University
Press.
2. Chakravarthy, S. (1989) : Development Planning: The Indian
Experience, Clarendon Press.
3. Chatak, S. (1986) : An Introduction to Development
Economics, Allen and Unwin.
4. Kindleberger, C.P. (1977) : Economic Development 3ed McGraw Hill.
5. Meler, G.M. (ed.) (1984) : Leading Issues in Economic Development
4ed. Oxford University Press.
6. Mair, G.M., and
D. Seers (Eds.) (1987) : Pioneers in Development, Oxford
University Press.
7. Thirillwall, A.P. (1978) : Growth and Development, 2ed. Macmillan
ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT - I
UNIT I
Introduction : Concept of human resources, quantitative and qualitative aspects, human capital in retrospect (Adam Smith and Alfred Marshall)
UNIT II
Human capital and development: Growth accounting and residual factor - alternative methods of estimating the contribution of human capital to development (Methods of Dennison and Schultz) Human resource policies.
UNIT III
Human Resource Policies: Need, type and scope – Advantage for a written policy- Human Resources policies and work Culture.
UNIT IV
Developing of Human Resources – Executive development Employees Employment. On the job training education and – age – earnings profiles – earning differentials.
UNIT V
Social investment and cost – benefit analysis, problem of cost – benefit analysis of human capital.
PAPER – 15 EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - II
ECONOMICS OF HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT – II
(FOR BRANCH III ECONOMICS ONLY)
UNIT I
Human capital and income contribution – Demand and supply of human capital - role of ability and family background in investment.
UNIT II
Migration of human capital –internal migration- external migration rates of return – Economic Liberalization and Human Resource Management – Human Resource Management in IT Industry – Changing Nature of Work – Workforce Diversity – Downsizing – Voluntary Retirement Scheme (VRS) – Changing Role of Human Resource Management.
UNIT III
Non-Market return to human capital; Education and fertility differences: Education and agricultural productivity.
UNIT IV
Functions of Human Resources Management from Procurement to Separation: Placement, Induction, Transfers, Promotions, Disciplinary action. Termination of services: Resignation, Dismissal, Retrenchment and Voluntary Retirement Schemes, Exit interviews.
UNIT V
Methods of man-power planning: Perms (MRP) methods; cost – benefit analysis method. Criticism of the methods.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text:
1. Gary, S. Becker : Human Capital 2nd Edn.
2. G.Psacharapoubs : Returns to Education
Books for Reference
1. Mark Blaug : An introduction to Economics of Education,
Penguin.
2. T.W. Schultz : Economic Value of Education.
3. J. Mincer : Schooling Experience and Earnings.
4. Jamison and Lau : Farmer Education and Farm Efficiency
5. T.W. Schultz (ed.) : Economics of Family
6. H.S.Parnes (Ed.) : Planning Education for Economic and Social
Change.
7. NCAER : South India: Human Development Report.
8. Svedberg, Peter : Poverty & Under nutrition (OIP)
PAPER – 15 EXTRA DISCIPLINARY - II
ENTREPRENEURIAL DEVELOPMENT
UNIT I
The Entrepreneur – Definition – Classification of Entrepreneurs – Factors influencing Entrepreneurship - Functions of Entrepreneurs. Economic development and entrepreneurial growth.
UNIT II
Entrepreneurial Development - Entrepreneurial Development Programmes (EDP) – Role, relevance.– Role of Government – Role of Financial Institutions ICICI – IRDBI.
UNIT III
Entrepreneurial scene in India – Development and Training of Entrepreneur – Entrepreneur and Business Executive personnel administration and Management Development – Development of Women Enterpreneurs.
UNIT IV
Organization structure and plant location. Planning for production and inventory project counseling and technical feasibility. Capital structure and working capital. Financial appraisal of new project, Role of Banks – Credit appraisal by banks. Institutional arrangement and entrepreneurship.
UNIT V
Marketing Feasibility – New product ideas and evaluation. Marketing methods – pricing policy and distribution channels. Exports problems of Small Scale Unit.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. Srinivasan N.P.: Enterprenurial Development.
Books for Reference
1.Vasant Desai : Problems of Prospects of Small Scale Industries
in India. (Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay)
2. Khan : Management of Small Scale Industries.
(Sultan Chand Publications.)
3. Clifford and
Joseph P. Mancuso : Entrepreneurship and Venture
Management, (Paraporawala & Co)
4. J.M. Parkin : How to Finance Small Business Enterprise.
5. K.K. Menon : Handbook of Small Industries Management.
6. B.C.Tandon : Environment and Entrepreneur.
7. B.C.Tandon : Environment and Entrepreneur.
8. O.A. Dailey : Entrepreneurial Management.
9. H.N. Pathak : The Entrepreneur, Technician and Manager in
Small Scale Unit.
10. K.L.Sharama : Entrepreneurial Performance in Role
perspectives.
FOURTH SEMESTER
Core-Course/Paper-16. MACRO ECONOMIC THEORY – II
UNIT I
Investment Function – Marginal Efficiency of Investment, Multiplier Analysis, Accelerator and Investment behavior concepts of super multiplier.
UNIT II
Supply of Money - A Behavioural Model of Money Supply Determination, RBI Approach to money supply, High powered money and money multiplier, Money Supply in open economy, Control of money supply.
UNIY III
Theory of Inflation: Concept – Types – Categories, Excess demand Inflation Keynesian Income Expenditure approach, Inflationary gap – Cost push Inflation – Wage Push and profit push inflation, Phillips curve Controversy, Tobins modified Phillips Curve, Policies to control inflation.
UNIT IV
Business Cycle: Theories of Schumpeter, Kaldor, Samuelson, Hicks and Goodwin model, Control of Business Cycles, relative Efficiency of Monetary and Fiscal Policies
UNIT V
Macro Economics is an open Economy, Mundell Flemming Model – New Classical Macro Economics –Policy Implications of New Classical Approach. Macro Economic Policy Goals, Full Employment – Price Stability – Economic Growth – Monetary and Fiscal Mechanism in the Indian Context.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text:
1. Branson, W.A. (1989): Macroeconomic Theory and Policy, (3rd
Edition), Harper and Row, New York.
2. Shapiro, E. (1996): Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications,
New Delhi.
Books for Reference
1. Ackley, G. (1978) : Macroeconomics: Theory and Policy,
Macmillan, New York
2. Blackhouse, R.
and A. Salansi (2000) : Macroeconomics and the Real World
(2 Vols.) Oxford University Press,
London.
3. Dornbusch, R. and
F. Stanley (1997) : Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill,
Inc., New York.
4. Gupta S. B(1993) : Monetary Economics, S Chand
Publications, New Delhi.
5. Hall, R.E. and
J.B. Taylor (1986) : Macroeconomics, W.W. Norton,
New York.
6. Heijdra, B.J. and
V.P. Fredericck (2001) : Foundations of Modern
Macroeconomics, Oxford
University Press, New Delhi.
7. Jha, R. (1991) : Contemporary Macroeconomic Theory and
Policy,Wiley EasterLtd., New Delhi.
8. Romer, D.L. (1996) : Advanced Macroeconomics, McGraw Hill
Company Ltd.,New York.
9. Scarfe, B.L. (1977) : Cycles, Growth and Inflation,
McGraw Hill, New York.
10. Shapiro, E. (1996) : Macroeconomic Analysis, Galgotia Publications,
New Delhi.
11. Surrey, M.J.C. (Ed.) (1976) : Macroeconomic Themes, Oxford
University Press, Oxford.
Core-Course/Paper-17. PUBLIC ECONOMICS -II
UNIT I
Taxation –Theories of Taxation – Benefit and Ability to pay Principles – Concept of Excess Burden of Taxes – Classical and Modern views – Tax Structure in India – Particular Taxes – Personal income Tax – Corporation Income Tax – Capital Gains Tax –Union Excise Duties - MANVAT, MODVAT –VAT - Tax Evasion – Tax Reforms – State Taxes – Agricultural Taxation – Appraisal of Tax Policies of India.
UNIT II
Public Debt – Theories of Public Debt – Classical and modern theories – Concept of Burden of Public debt – Growth and composition of public debt in India - Debt Management.
UNIT III
Fiscal Policy – Fiscal and monetary policies – Budgetary, Fiscal deficit and its measurement – Fiscal Reforms – Fiscal policy for stabilization – Fiscal Policy and liberalization. Fiscal Crisis and Fiscal Sector reforms in India.
UNIT IV
Fiscal Federalism – Principles of Federal Finance – Fiscal federalism in India – Assignment of functions and sources of Revenue – Logic of the constitutional scheme.
UNIT V
Finance Commission and Planning Commission – Reports of Finance Commissions in India - Resource Transfer mechanism in India – Backwardness and other criteria – Union State Financial Relations – Problem of State Indebtedness. Local Finance – Finance for Local Bodies – Panchayat Raj Institutions – Reforms – 73 and 74 Amendments – State Finance Commission Report and its recommendations.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text:
1. Bhargava (2004) : Public finance, Its Theory and working in
India, Chaitanya Publishing House.
2. Musgrave, R.A. (1959) : The Theory of Public Finance, McGraw
Hill, Kogakhusa, Tokyo
3. Musgrave, R.A. and
P.B. Musgrave (1976) : Public Finance in Theory and Practice,
McGraw Hill, Kogakusha, Tokyo.
Books for Reference
1. Atkinson, A.B. and
J.E. Siglitz (1980) : Lectures on Public Economics,
Tata McGraw Hill, New York.
2. Auerbach, A.J. and
M. Feldstern (Eds.) (1985) : Handbook of Public Economics, Vol. I,
North Holland, Amsterdam.
3. Buchanan, J.M. (1970) : The Public Finances, Richard D. Irwin,
Homewood.
4. Goode, R. (1986) : Government Finance in Developing
Coutnries, Tata McGraw Hill,
New Delhi.
5. Houghton, J.M. (1970) : The Public Finance : Selected Readings,
Penguin, Harmondsworth.
6. Jha, R. (1998) : Modern Public Economics, Routledge,
London.
7. Menutt, P. (1996) : The Economics of Public Choice, Edward
Elgar, U.K.
8. Shoup, C.S. (1970) : Public Finance, Aldine, Chicago.
9. Shome, P. (Ed.) (1995) : Tax Policy : Handbook, Tax Division,
Fiscal Affairs Department, International
Monetary Fund,Washington D.C.
Websites:
1. The ICFAI Journal of Public Finance: ijpf.asp-62k.
2. The ICFAI Journal Public Administration: ijpa.asp- 62k
Core-Course/Paper-18. INTERNATIONAL ECONOMICS – II
UNIT I
Trade Policy: Case for free trade versus protection - Tariffs and Quota – theory of customs union – trade problems of developing countries: UNCTAD – GATT and Tokyo declaration- WTO – import substitution and export promotion – North South dialogue – New International Economic Order.
UNIT II
Balance of Payment and National Income – foreign trade multiplier and National Income – Repercussions of Balance of payment disequilibrium and stability problem – BOP and exchange rate determination – Purchasing Power Parity Theory – fixed versus flexible exchange rate system – developments in international monetary system.
UNIT III
Balance of Payment and disequilibrium - Balance of Payment disequilibrium and corrective measures – Automatic mechanisms under fixed and flexible exchange rates – Recent developments in exchange rate management.
UNIT IV
Devaluation: elasticity approach, income absorption approach – monetary approach – exchange controls – means of achieving internal and external equilibrium – Fiscal and monetary mix.
UNIT V
International Monetary System: Problems in International Monetary System – International debt - International Liquidity – I.M.F. and Special Drawing Rights – Euro-dollar market. – recent developments and issues in regional common currencies.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. M.C.Vaish & Sudama Singh : International Economics, Oxford &
IBH.
2. K.C.Rana and K.N.Verma(2004-05) :International Economics, Vishal
Publishing Co. Jalandhar,.
3. Francis Cherunilam(1998) : International Economics,
3rd Edition, TataMcGraw Hill
Publishing company.
Books for Reference
1. Bo Sodersten.(1980) : International Economics.
2. Kindleberger, C.P. : International Economics, 5th Edition.
3. Paul R. Krugman and
Maurice Obstfed (2005) : International Economics
Theory and Policy, 6th Edition, Pearson
Education.
4. Bhagawati. J, : International Economics.
5. Dominick Salvatore, 2004 : International Economics, 8th edition,
Wiley Student edition,.
6.Mundell, Robert, A. : International Economics.
Websites:
1.
2. .com.
3. foreigntrade.in..
4.
5.
In lieu of Project work, two core Courses/papers for
Branch III – Economics and Branch III - F - Business Economics as follows:
Core-Course/Paper-19. FINANCIAL ECONOMICS
UNIT I
Money market – Banks - regulation of working capital finance.
UNIT II
Capital market – structure – characteristics – primary , secondary markets – market intermediaries, stock brokers, under writers – depositories credit rating agencies.
UNIT III
Stock market system – trading, listing, regulation of stack market operations – market efficiency – NSE- OTC. Online trading system – SEBI Guidelines for capital issues – pricing – insider trading – investor protection.
UNIT IV
Derivative markets – options and futures – trading system – pricing derivatives – risk hedging through derivatives – derivative market in India – its regulations.
UNIT V
An over view of financial markets – legal and regulatory frame work – financial sector reforms – SEBI –SCRA- various segments of financial markets - Venture Capital Financing, Mutual Funds – finance information system(FIS).
Bibliography:
Recommended Text
1. Bhole : Financial Institutions and Markets, TMH.
2. M.Y. Khan, (2001) : Financial Services, TMH.
Books for Reference
1. Fabozzi, (2002) : Foundations of Financial Markets and Institutions,
Pearson Education, New Delhi.
2. James C. Van Horne, (2002) : Financial Management and Policy,
Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
3. Kuchhal S.C. : Financial management : An Analytical and
Conceptual Approach – Chaitanya
publishing House, Allahabad.
4.P.V. KulKarni : Financial management, Himalaya
Publishing House.
5. Panday, I.M. : Financial Management, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt. Ltd.,
6.Prasanna Chandra, : Financial Management: Theory and
Practice – Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
7. Van Horne (2002) : Foundations of Financial Management,
PHI.
Core-Course/Paper- ANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR
UNIT I
Introduction to Organizational Behaviour - Foundations of Individual Behaviour – Personality – Perception – Learning - Values and Attitudes.
UNIT II
Motivation – Early Theories – Contemporary Theories – Motivation at work – Designing, Motivating Jobs-Case Study.
UNIT III
Group Dynamics – Group Behaviour – Communication and Group Decision Making – Inter-group Relations-Case Study.
UNIT IV
Leadership – Traits – Behavioral and Contingency theories – Power and Politics – Transactional Analysis – Work Stress-Case Study.
UNIT V
Organisational structure and Design – Organisational Change and Development – Organisational Culture and Climate – Organizational Conflict – Causes – Types of Conflict – Management Conflict-Case Study.
Bibliography:
Recommended Text:
1. Fred Luthens : Organisational Behaviour.
2. Stephen Robbins : Organisational Behaviour.
3. Khanka : Organisational Behaviour
Books for Reference:
1. Stephen Robbins : Organisational Behaviour.
2. Jit. S. Chandran : Organisational Behaviour.
3. Terence R. Mitchell : People in Organisations and
Understanding their Behaviour.
4. Udai Pareek, T.V. Rao &
D.M. Postonjee :Behavioural Process in Organisation.
5. Townsent .H (1980) : Price Theory,
6. Cases in Management & Organizational Behaviour / Tompkins, Teri C.
Prentice Hall, 2 edition, 2002. Paper, ISBN 0130894648
7. Organizational Behavior / Robbins, Stephen P.
Pearson Higher Education, 2001. Paperback, ISBN 013018635X
8. Introduction to Organisational Behaviour / Ellis, Steve/Dick, Penny
McGraw-Hill Education - Europe, 2000. Paperback, ISBN 0077095359
Websites:
1.
2. iese.edu
3. en.
4.
8. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HISTORICAL STUDIES
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
Paper IX – HISTORY OF WORLD CIVILIZATIONS (EXCLUDING INDIA) – ANCIENT PERIOD
UNIT I: Introduction -Definition of Civilization -Comparison between Culture and Civilization -Origin and Growth of Civilizations -Pre-historic Culture - Paleolithic and Neolithic Culture.
,
UNIT II: River Valley Civilizations -Egyptian Civilization -Mesopotomian Civilization -Sumerican, Babylonian, Assyrian and Chaldean Cultures.
UNIT III: Persian Civilization -Hebrew Civilization.
UNIT IV: Chinese Civilization -Japanese Civilization -Maya, Aztec and Inca Civilizations.
UNIT V: Classical Civilizations -Ancient Greece -Legacy of Greece -Hellenistic Civilization - Ancient Rome -Roman Contribution.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Will Durant, The Story of Civilization (10 Volumes).
2. Edward MacNallBurns, Western Civlization -their History and their Culture.
3. Judd, G.P., History of Civilization.
4. Swain, J.E., A History of World Civilization.
5. Wallbank, T. W., and Bailay, N.M., Civilization -Past and Present.
6. Burns, and Ralph, Western Civilizations.
7. Phul, R.K., World Civilization.
8. Gokale, B.K., Introduction to Western Civilization.
Web Sources:
1. Ancient Civilizations:
2. Exploring ancient world cultures:
3. Ancient Civilizations- Resources:
4. Ancient Egypt, Greek and Roman:
Paper X - HISTORY OF EUROPE FROM A.D. 1789 -A.D. 1919
UNIT I: Fall of Ancient Regime -French Revolution -Era of Napoleon.
UNIT II: Congress of Vienna -Concert of Europe - Metternich - Revolutions of 1830
and 1848.
UNIT III: Eastern Question -Unification of Italy and Germany.
UNIT IV: Napoleon -Bismarck and Austro-Hungarian Empire -Balkan Problem-
Alexander and Freedom of the Serfs -Balkan Crises.
UNIT V : First World War. - Treaty of Versailles -Russian Revolution.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Ketelby, C.D.M., A History of Modem Times.
2 Fisher, H.A.L., History of Europe.
3. Grant, A.J & Temperly, Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries.
4. Hazen, C.D., Modern Europe.
5. David Thomson, Europe since Napoleon.
6. Fyffe, History of Modern Europe.
7. Marriot, Remaking of Europe.
8. Lipson, Europe in the 19th and 20th Centuries.
9. Grant, A.J., Europe, The Story of the Last Five Centuries.
10. Huges, H.S., Contemporary Europe.
11. Philis W. Alison, Modern Europe.
Web Sources:
1. History of Europe: Catalogue of Internet Sources -
2. Online Resources:
3. Collection of Political Maps:
4. European History for Students:
Paper XI -HISTORIOGRAPHY AND HISTORICAL METHODS
UNIT I: Definition and Meaning - Nature and Scope - Value of History.
UNIT II: Branches of History - (Political, Economic, Social and Cultural) History and other Social Sciences -Role of Allied Subjects in the study of History.
UNIT III: Structure and Form of History - History as Science or Art -Philosophy of History.
UNIT IV: Trends in Historiography -Ancient, Medieval and Modern -Recent Trends - Subaltern Studies and Annales School.
UNIT V: Research Methodology - Selection of Topic - Hypothesis - Collection of
Data - Classification of Sources - Historical Criticism - Objectivity in Writing History -Synthesis and Interpretation - Exposition - Foot Note – Bibliography
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Reiner, G. T., History, Its Purpose and Method.
2. Rowse, A.L., The Use of History.
3. Collingwood, R.G., The Idea of History.
4. Philips, C.H. (Ed), Historians of India, Pakistan and Ceylon.
5. Khan, S. A., History and Historians of British India.
6. Rajayyan, K., History in Theory and Method.
7. Subramanian, N., 1978, Historiography, Koodal Publishers, Madurai.
8. Carr, E.H., 1983, What is History? Middlesex, England.
9. Sen, S.P. (Ed), 1973, Historians and Historiography in Modern India. Calcutta.
10. Sheik Ali, B., 1978, History: Its Theory and Method. Macmillan India Ltd., New Delhi.
11. Barzun, J & Graff, Henry, The Modern Researcher.
12. Fisher, D., Historical Fallacies.
13. Kent, S., Writing History
14. Hockit, Homer, C., The Critical Method in Historical Research and Writing.
15. Majumdar, R.C., and Srivastava, A. N., Historiography.
16. Manickam, S., Theory of History and Methods of Research, Padumam Publishers
Madurai, 2005.
Web Sources:
1. History and Historiography:
2. Historical Methods:
3. History and Theory:
4. Philosophy of History:
5. Annotated Bibliography:
Elective III - DEVELOPMENT OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN
INDIA FROM A.D. 1947 – 2000
UNIT I: Introduction - A Survey of the Development of Science and Technology under the British Rule - Government of India's Science and Technology Policy since 1950 - Department of Science and Technology - Research and Development Programme - Science and Technology programmes for Socio-Economic Development.
UNIT II: Development of Agricultural Science - Research and Education - Agricultural Engineering and Technology - Indian Council of Agricultural Research - Crop Science and Horticulture - Animal Science and Veterinary Colleges - Biotechnology Development - Crop and Animal Bio-technology.
UNIT III: Development of Space Science - Development of Satellite Systems-
INSAT System - Electronic Developments and Production - Information Technology - I.T. Act 2000 - Telecommunication - Software Technology Parks -I. T for the Masses.
UNIT IV: Higher Technology Development - Atomic Science - Atom for Peace - Atomic Energy and Nuclear Power Programme - Atom for War and Pokhran I & II.
UNIT V: Oceanography - Ocean Development - Marine Living Resources and Non - living Resources - Aquaculture and Marine Biotechnology - Polar Science and Antartic Expeditions - Institute Connected with Ocean Research.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Gupta, S.P., Modern India and Progress in Science and Technology.
2. Gupta, S.P., Technology and Society in the Modern Age.
3. Venkataraman, R., History of Science and Technology.
4. Vadilal Dagli, Science and Technology in India.
5. Varghese Jeyaraj, S., History of Science and Technology.
6. Kalpana Rajaram, Science and Technology in India.
7. Kuppuram and Kumudhamani, History of Science and Technology. (10 Volumes).
8. Jaggi, O.P., Science and Technology.
9. India, 2000, India 2001, (Publications Division, Government of India).
10. Krishnamurthy, K.V., History of Science, Bharathidasan University, Tiruchirapalli, 2005
(Both English & Tamil)
Web Sources:
1. Science in India:
2. Science and Technology in India:
3. India- Science and Technology:
Modern Science in India:
EDC II - WOMEN'S STUDIES
(Extra Disciplinary)
UNIT I: Definition of Women's Studies - Its Objectives - Scope - Theories of Feminism - Women's Movements in the West.
UNIT II: Women through the Ages - Indian Context - Women in Freedom Struggle – Pre -Gandhian Era and Gandhian Era.
UNIT III: Rise of Feminist Movement and Women's Organisations – Growth - Governmental and Non-Governmental Organisations - National, State Councils for Women -Achievements.
UNIT IV: Role of Women in Politics - Administration - Business - Industry - Women Entrepreneurs - Need for Reservation.
UNIT V: Women and Law - Legal and Constitutional Rights - Marriage – Divorce - Property Rights - Labour Laws - Women in Modern Society.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Tara A. Baig, 1976, India's Women Power, S. Chand & Co., New Delhi.
2. Rama Mehta, 1987, Socio-Legal Status of Women in India, Mittal Publications, Delhi.
3. Srinivas, M.N., 1978, The Changing Position of Indian Women, Oxford University Press,
London.
4. Nanda, B.R., 1990, Indian Women from Purdah to Modernity, Radiant Publishers,
New Delhi.
5. Altenbar, A.S., 1962, The Position of Women in Hindu Civilisation, Motilal Banarsi Das,
Delhi.
6. Neena Desai and Patel, V., 1985, Indian Women: Chance and Challenge in the
International Decade, 11975-1985, Popular Prakashan, Bombay.
7. Bovehur David, The Feminist Challenge, The Movement for Women's Liberation in Britain and U.S.
8. Banbs Olive, Faces of Feminism - A Study of Feminism as a Social Movement.
9. Gandhi, M.K., Women and Social Justice.
10. Radha Kumar, The Women's Movement in India.
11. M. Razia Parvin, Empowerment of Women – Strategies and Systems for Gender
Justice, Dominant Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2005.
Web Sources:
1. Science in India:
2. Science and Technology in India:
3. India- Science and Technology:
4. Modern Science in India:
FOURTH SEMESTER
Paper XII - HISTORY OF WORLD CIVILIZATIONS
(EXCLUDING INDIA) -MEDIEVAL AND MODERN PERIOD
UNIT I: Middle Ages: Rise and spread of Christianity -The Papay -Byzantine Civilization -Rise and Spread of Islam -Saracenic Civilization.
UNIT II: Feudalism -Origin -Merits and Demerits -Crusades -Causes and Results - Monastic Orders of Medieval Europe -Growth of Medieval Cities -Progress of Education and Rise of Universities.
UNIT Ill: Transition to Modem Age -Renaissance -Causes -Renaissance in Italy- Results of Renaissance -Geographical Discoveries of 15th and 16th centuries -Causes, Course and Results -Reformation in Germany, France and Switzerland -Counter Reformation.
UNIT IV: French Revolution and its Impact -Romanticism -Industrial and Agrarian Revolutions -Causes, Course and Results.
UNIT V: Nationalism Vs Internationalism -League of Nations -United Nations Organization -Science, Philosophy, Art & Literature during the Contemporary World
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1 Will Durant, The Story of Civilization (10 Volumes).
2. Edward Mac Nail Burns, Western Civilization -their History and their Culture.
3. Judd, G.P., History of Civilization.
4. Swain, J.E., A History of World Civilization.
5. Wallbank, T. W. and Bailay, N.M., Civilization - Past and Present.
6. Burns, Ralph, Western Civilizations.
7. Phul, R.K., World Civilization.
8. Gokale, B.K., Introduction to Western Civilization.
Web Sources:
1. World Civilization: Students Resource centre,
2. World Civilization: Faculty Resource Centre,
3. Heritage of World Civilization:
4. World Civilization Links:
Paper XIII - INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS FROM A.D. 1919 - 2000
UNIT I: Nature of international Relations - National Power and Instruments for the Promotion of National Interests - Diplomacy.
UNIT II: Inter - War Years - Reparation - Inter Allied Debts - World Economic Crisis - Collective Security - Rise of Dictatorship - Totalitarianism.
UNIT III: Second World War - Peace Settlements - Military Alliances - Emergence of Power Blocs - Cold War - UNO.
UNIT IV: Disarmament and Arms Control - Disintegration of U.S.S.R - Emerging New World Order.
UNIT V: Present Trends in International Associations (Role of International Associations such as Commonwealth, NAM, SAARC, OAU, ASEAN, G -7, G -15, G -77).
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Schleicher, P., Charles, International Relations Co-Operation.
2. Palmer and Perkins, International Relations.
3. Morgentheau, Hans, J., Politics among Nations.
4. Schuman, International Politics.
5. Wright, Rhiney, The Study of International Relations.
6. Moon, P.T., Imperialism and World Politics since 1945.
7. Calvecoressi, P., World Politics since 1945.
8. Hughes, H.S., Contemporary Europe.
9. Carr, E.H., International Relations since 1919.
10. Gadhorne Hardy, A Short History of International Affairs 1920-38.
11. Sen, A.K., International Relations since 1919.
12. Prakash Chander and Prem Arora, International Relations.
Web Sources:
1. International Relations and Security Network
2. International Relations Resource Center
3. Foreign Affairs,
4. Institute of Peace and Conflict Studies, New Delhi,
Elective IV - TOURISM PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES
UNIT I : Tourism – Definition, Need and Scope – Origin and Growth –
Kinds of Tourism – Cultural, Pilgrimage, etc.,
UNIT II : Tourism and Culture – People’s instinct for travel – Tourism
as an economic activity – Tourism as a Merchandise – Domestic and International Tourism – Employment Potential – Tourism Centres in India.
UNIT III : Tourism Infrastructure – Accommodation – Hotels and
Motels – Transport – Role of Travel Agencies – Ticketing.
UNIT IV : Tourism Administration and Organisation – Government
Departments and Non Government Agencies – Indian Tourism Development Corporation.
UNIT V : Tourism Industry in Tamilnadu – Tourist Centres in
Tamilnadu – Tamilnadu Tourism Development Corporation – Objectives and Functions.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE
1. Bhatia, A.K., 2003 (Reprint),Tourism Development, Principles and Practices, Sterling
Publishers, New Delhi.
2. Ratandeep Singh, 1998, Dynamics of Modern Tourism, Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi.
3. Sinha, R.K., 1999, Growth and Development of Modern Tourism, Dominant Publishes,
Delhi.
4. Lajpathi Raj, Development of Tourism in India.
5. Douglas Foster, Travel and Tourism Management
6. Durbant.A.J., and Medik.S., Tourism, Past, Present and Future
7. Lauvkush Mishra, 2000, Religious Tourism in India. Mohit Publications, New Delhi.
8. Pushpinder S. Gill, 1999, Tourism, Economic and Social Development, Anmol Publication, Delhi.
Web Sources:
1. Tourism Principles:
2. Principles of Tourism:
3. UNEP, Principles of Tourism,
4. Sustainable Tourism,
Elective V - ARCHIVES KEEPING
UNIT I: History of Archives -Archives keeping in Europe -Archives keeping in India -Importance of Archives
UNIT II: Creation of Archives -Materials used for the creation of Archives -Packing Materials and Seals -Establishment of Registry -Filing system of Records.
UNIT III: Preservation of Archive Materials in India and European Countries - Methods of Preservation -Laminations -Reprography -Automation- Retrieval Tools.
UNIT IV: Functions -Uses of Archives -Rules and Regulations.
UNIT V: Archival Organisations - National Archives of India -Tamilnadu Archives- Private Archives ~ International Council of Archives -Indian Historical Records Commission (IHRC) -The Historical Manuscripts Commission.
BOOKS FOR REFERENCE:
1. Harinaryana, Science of Archives Keeping.
2. Baliga, B., Guide to the records preserved in the Madras Record Office
3. Sarvesvaran, P., Archives Keeping.
4. Sundara Raj, M., 1999, A Manual of Archives System and the World of Archives, Silver Publications, Chennai.
5. Sailen Ghose, Archives in India.
6. Jenbinson Hilary, A Manual of Archives Administration.
7. Thyagarajan, T. T., Archives Keeping.
8. Sehellenberg, T.R., Management of Archives.
Paper XX – Project Plus Viva Voce
9. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HUMAN RESOURCE
MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
Paper -13. HUMAN RESOURCES DEVELOPMENT (HRD)
UNIT I
HRD: Definition, Evolution of HRD from Personnel management, Developmental Perspective of HRD, HRD at macro and micro levels: Outcomes of HRD in the national and organizational contexts. Qualities and Competencies required in a HRD professional. Importance of HRD in the present context. Development of HRD Movement in India.
Theory and Practice of HRD: HRD concepts, Subsystems of HRD: Human Resource Planning, Potential, Potential Appraisal, Assessment Center, Performance appraisal including 360 degree.
Organizational Culture and Climate: Meaning and type of Organizational culture and climate; Role of HRD in promoting a development oriented Culture and climate in the Organizations.
UNIT II
Development Human Capacity: Aptitude, Knowledge, Values, Skills of Human Relations, Responsiveness, Loyalty and Commitment, Transparency, Leadership development.
Training and Development: Meaning and Scope of training, education and development; Training need analysis, Types of training Internal and external, Outbound Training, Attitudinal training, Training effectiveness.
Learning Organization: Organizational Learning, Importance of Experiential Learning, Learning Organization, Knowledge Management, Achieving Organizational Effectiveness and Excellence.
UNIT III
Evaluating HRD: Human Resource Accounting, HR Audit and Bench marking, Impact-assessment of HRD initiatives on the bottom-line of an organization.
UNIT IV
Organizational Development (OD): Meaning of OD, OD Interventions, OD Programs and Techniques: Behaviour Modeling, gaming, Encounter Groups, Quality of Work life (QWL) and Quality of Life Programs, Grid training, Benefits of OD; OD consultants.
Organizational Development Process: Phases in OD – Initial Diagnosis – Survey and Feedback, Action Planning, Problem Solving, Team Building, Developing Creativity and Innovation, Managing organizational Change.
UNIT V
Recent Trends in HRD and OD: Training for trainers and HRD professionals, Promoting Research in HRD and OD. Impacts of developments in the other fields such as Psychology, Business Management, Communication and Information Technologypraisal, Training and Development, Career Planning & Succession Planning.
References
1. D.L. KIRKPATRICK (Ed), How to Manage Change Effectively – San Francisco: Josseybass, 1985.
2. T.V. RAO and UDAI PAREEK (1989). Developing and Managing Human Resource System.
3. D.M. SILVERA (1988), Human Resource Development: The Indian Experience, New Delhi: New India Publications.
4. LEONARD NADIER, (1984) the Handbook of HRD, USA: John Wiley.
5. RAO TV and DF PEREIRA (1986), Recent Experiences in Human Resources Development, New Delhi: Oxford and IBH.
6. ROBINSON, KENNETH R., A Handbook of Training Management – (2nd Ed) Kogan Page, Great Britain, (1982).
7. FRENCH W.L. & BELL, Jr, C.H. (1982), Organization Development: Behavioural Science Interventions for Organization Development, New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India – 6th Edition 2002.
8. SIKULA A.F.P., Administration and HRD – John Wiley, New York.
9. ARGYRIS, CHRIS (1978): Organizational Learning: A Theory of Action Perspective. Readings, Mass – Addison – Wesley.
10. SANGE DATER M (1990) The Fifth Discipline: The art and Practice of the Learning.
14. INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS
UNIT I
Industrial Relations: The changing concepts of Industrial relations, Factors affecting employee stability. Application on Psychology to industrial relations.
UNIT II
Industrial Harmony and Conflict: Harmonious relations in industry, importance and means; cause of industrial disputes, Machinery for settling of disputes, Negotiation, Conciliation, Mediation, Arbitration and Adjudication, Strikes, Lock-outs, Layout and Retrenchment codes of discipline, Grievance procedure, Labour management co-operation; Worker’s participation in management.
UNIT III
Industrial relations in government level, Role of state in regulating I.R, government labour policy. Bipartite approaches to industrial relations, workers, participation in Management, meaning, work committees, joint management councils, industrial democracy, Indian labour conference, industrial committees. Industrial disputes, concepts, causes, dynamics, forms, prevention, settlement, prevention and settlement machinery in India, Industrial disputes Act.
UNIT IV
Trade Unions: Trade Unions and their growth, economic, social and political conditions leading to the development of trade unionism, Theories of trade unionism, Aim and objectives of trade unions, Structure and governing of trade unions.
Problems and Role of Indian Trade Unions: Recognition and leadership, Finances and Membership, Compulsory versus free membership, Political activities, Welfare, Legislation, Majority and Minority unions, Social responsibilities, positive role in economic and social development.
UNIT V
Collective Bargaining: Meaning, Scope, Subject matter and parties, Methods and tactics, Administrations of collective bargaining agreements; Fair and unfair labour practice.
Tripartite Machinery: At the center and in the states; I.L.O. – Its functions and role in labour movement – Industrial health and safety; Industrial legislations.
References:
1. Mamoria C.B and Sathish Mamoria,Dynamics of Industrial Relations,Himalaya Publishing House,New Delhi,1998
2. Dwivedi.R.S Human Relations 7 Organisational Behaviour, Macmillan India Ltd.,New Delhi,1997.
3. Pylee.M.V and Simon George ,Industrial Relations and Personnel Management ,Vikas Publishing House (P) Ltd.,New Delhi,1995
4. N.G.Nair, Lata Nair, Personnel Management and Industrial Relations, S.Chand, 2001
5. Srivastava, Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas, 4TH edition, 2000
6. C.S.Venkata Ratnam, Globalisation and Labour Mangement Relations, Response Books,2001
15. MANPOWER DEVELOPMENT FOR TECHNOLOGICAL CHANGE
UNIT – I
Manpower management in the 21st century, environmental context of human resource management.
UNIT – II
The emerging profile of human resources/special features of new technology concept and" process of technological innovation, organizational implications of technological change, human resource implications of technological change.
UNIT – III
Performance/potential evaluation in change, human resource implications of technological change, performance/potential evaluation in the context of new technology.
UNIT – IV
Technology transfer with human face, new issues in manpower training.
UNIT – V
Career development, Career planning – steps involved.
References:
1.Clark Jon - Managing Innovation and Change, University of Southampton, 1995.
2.Clark Jon - Human Resource management and Technological Change, London, Sage, 1993
3.Campbell A and Warner M - new technology, Skills and Management, London, Routledge, 1992.
4. Rastogi P.N, - Management of Technology and Innovation, New Delhi, Sage, 1995.
5. Warner M. - new Technology and Manufacturing Management, London, Wiley, 1990.
6. Womack J.P. etc - The Machine that Changed the World, New York, Maxwell
Macmillan, 1990.
7. Whittaker D.H - managing Innovation Cambridge, Cambridge University
Press, 1990.
16. LABOUR WELFARE
UNIT - I
Labour Welfare: Concept, scope, objectives, functions, responsibilities for providing labour welfare, labour welfare measures, labour welfare officer, appointment, functions, role and powers.
Labour Welfare in India: historical development, welfare legislations, welfare provisions under the factories act 1948, mines act 1952, motor transport workers act 1961, plantation labours act 1951.
UNIT - II
Social Security: Concept, scope, objectives, social insurance versus social assistance, social security measures, origins and growth of social security in India. Agencies of social security, a brief study of social security legislation in India.
Social Problems affecting Industrial Labour: Role's and duties of a professional social worker in the industry in dealing with victims of alcoholism, absenteeism, indebtedness, sexual harassment and other maladaptive behaviour of employees.
UNIT – III
Corporate Social Responsibilities: Community work by the industry, purposes, concept of community, community development, NGO corporate partnership in development activism, advocacy and social change.
UNIT – IV
Problems facing Labour Welfare Activities in Indian Industries: Deep rooted cultural values, beliefs and superstitions, social stratification, the concepts of karma and Dharma, poverty, migration, population explosion, child labour etc. the status of a social worker.
UNIT – V
Counseling: Need for counseling, techniques and skills of counseling, preventive counseling, the knowledge base of counseling and social work, human service delivery systems. Skills of a labour welfare officer, simulator, supporter, guide, interpreter, ameliorator.
References:
1. Moorthy MV - Principles of Labour Welfare, Visakapatnam, Gupta Brothers
2. Developing the Practice of Counseling - Windy Dryden and Colin Feltham, 1994, Sage
Publication, New Delhi.
3. RC Saxena - labour Problems and Social Welfare, K.Nath and Co, Meerut, 1995.
4. AM Sterna - Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, Himalayan Book House,
Bombay, 1990.
5. Hopkins RR - A handbook of Industrial Welfare, Oxford and IBH, New Delhi,1955.
6. Punekar Deodar and Shankaran - Labour Welfare Trade Unionism and industrial Relations, Bombay, Himalayan Publications.
7. Vaid K.N - Labour Welfare in India, New Delhi, Shri Ram Centre for Industrial
Relations
8. Kamik V.B - Indian Labour, Calcutta, Minerva Associates.
ELECTIVE- EXTRA DISCIPLINARY
17. COMPUTER LANGUAGES FOR MANAGEMENT
UNIT – I
Introduction to Programming Language – Generations of Computers and Computer Languages – Program development life cycle – Flow Charting – Disk Operating System and Window.
UNIT – II
PC – SOFTWARE package – Text Processing Software – Text Manipulations – Usages of spell check – Text Formating – Picture Insertion and alignment – Creation of documents using templates – Mail Merge Concepts.
UNIT – III
MS-EXCEL – Worksheet Preparation – Constructing Excel Formulas - Using Excel’s Built-in Functions – Creating and Modifying charts.
UNIT – IV
Introduction to C – Data types, constants, variables and arrays, Declarations – Expression’s operators and statements. Data input and output, preliminaries – the getchar ( ) – putchar ( ) – scanf ( ) – printf ( ) – gets ( ) – puts ( ) functions, control statements, functions and arrays.
UNIT – V
Pointers: Fundamentals – pointer declarations – Passing pointers to Functions – Structures and union – data files – Opening and Closing a Data file – Creating a Data file – Processing a Data file – Unformatted Data files.
Theory 75%, Practical 25%
References
1. Forouzan, A structure Programming Apporach Using C, Thomson, 2001.
2. SANJAY SAXENA: A first course in computers 2000 edition – Vikas Publishing House Pt. Ltd. – first edition, 2000.
3. R.K. TAXALI: “PC SOFTWARE” Tata McGraw Hill Publications.
4. USING MICROSOFT EXCEL 2000 QUE’S APPLICATION TOOLS Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
5. BYRON GOTTFRIED – “Programming with C” Edn.2, 1998.
6. V. RAJARAMAN “COMPUTER PROGRAMMING’C’ Prentice Hall of India New Delhi.
7. Programming in C Schaum’s Outline Series.
18. SOFT SKILLS III
Refer to PG Soft Skills Syllabus and Regulations.
19. INTERNSHIP
Refer to PG Soft Skills Syllabus and Regulations.
FOURTH SEMESTER
20. TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Unit I
Introduction to Quality Control – Quality and Cost Considerations – Statistics and its applications in Quality Control – Sampling Inspection in Engineering Manufacture
Unit II
Statistical and Quality Control by the use of Control Charts – Methods of Inspection and Quality Appraisal – Reliability Engineering – Value Engineering and Value Analysis.
Unit III
Theory of Sampling Inspection – Standard Tolerancing ABC Analysis – Defect Diagnosis and Prevention
Unit IV
Recent Technique for Quality Improvement – Zero Defect – A Quality Motivation Techniques – Quality Management system and Total Quality Control.
Unit V
Selection of ISO and Model and Implementation of ISO 900 Human Resources Development and Quality Circles – Environmental Management System and Total Quality Control.
Reference Books:
1. Evans, the Management & control Qualities, Thomson, 2004.
2. Dahigaard Jens J., Kristensen K., Kanji Gopal K, “Fundamental of Total Quality
Management” Bross Chapman & Hall, London, 1998.
3. George, Stephen and Weimerskirch, Arnold, “Total Quality Management –
Strategies and Techniques Proven”, Mohit Publications, 2001
4. Juran, Joseph M., “Total Quality Management: Mc Graw-Hill Pub
5. Hakes, Chris (editor) Total Quality Management : The Key to Business
Success”, NyChapman and Hall Pub, 1991.
6. Fox, Roy, “Making Quality Happen. Six steps to Total Quality Management” McGraw-Hill, 1991
7. Jain, “Quality Control And Total Quality Management”, Tata McGRaw Hill, 2002
8. H.Lal “Total Quality Management: A Practical Approach”, New Age International Private Ltd., 2002
9. Besterfield, “Total Quality Management”, Pearson Education, 1999, Rao, Ashok, “Total Quality Management: A Cross Functional Perspective”, Wiley & Sons.
ELECTIVE
21. ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND MANAGEMENT IN SMALL BUSINESS
UNIT I
The Entrepreneur – Definition – Characteristics of Successful entrepreneur. Entrepreneurial scene in India: Analysis of entrepreneurial growth in different communities – Case histories of successful entrepreneurs. Identification of potential entrepreneurs.
UNIT II
Development and Training of Entrepreneur – Cultural and Social environment in promoting entrepreneurship – Entrepreneurial environment. Checklist for organizing and operating small business – Entrepreneur and Business Executive personnel administration and Management Development.
UNIT III
Small Scale Industries – Definition – Classification of Small Industries – Organisation structure and plant location of small scale industries. Planning for production and inventory project counselling and technical feasibility.The significance in the Indian Economy – Problems and possibilities of ancillary industries – Sickness in small scale industries – Causes and Remedies.
UNIT IV
Capital structure and working capital: Financiall appraisal of new project, Role of Banks – Credit appraisal by banks. Institutional Finance to Small Industries – Incentives – Institutional arrangement and encouragement of entrepreneurship.
Unit V
Marketing Feasibility – New Product ideas and evaluation – Marketing Methods – Pricing policy and distribution channels – Exports – Problems of Small Scale Units.
Reference Books:
1. VASANT DESAI, Problems and Prospects of Small Scale Industries in India – Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay.
2. KHAN, Management of Small Scale Industries – Sultan Chand Publication.
3. CLIFFORD and JOSEPH P. MANCUSO, Enterpreneurship and Venture Management – Paraporawala & Co.
4. J.M. PARKIN, How to Finance Small Business Enterprise.
5. K.K. MENON, handbook of Small Industries Management
6. B.C. TANDON, Environment and Enterpreneur.
7. SIPCOT, A Guide to Entrepreneur – Chennai.
8. O.A. DAILEY, Enterpreneurial Management.
9. H.N. PATHAK, the Entrepreneur, Technician and Manager in Small Scale Unit.
10. K.L. SHARMA, Entrepreneurial Performance in Role Perspectives.
11. Schumacher, E.F. Small is Beautiful, New Delhi, Rupa, 1990.
ELECTIVE
22. BUSINESS POLICY AND STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT
UNIT – I
Business as a social System/Economic System: Objective of Business; Business Environment – Socio economic sector. Technology Sector, Government Sector. The industry Environment – Customer Sector/Supplier Sector/Competitor Sector.
The International Environment – Opportunities for International activities / Threats from International activities.
UNIT – II
Society and Business: Business ethics, Social responsibility of Business / Indian Businessmen, Social Audit.
Business Policy in Various Economic Systems: Capitalist Economy: Economic System of Socialism and mixed Economic system.
UNIT – III
Business Policy and Corporate Strategy: How to make policy corporate strategy: Policies: Strategies and Tactices: Policies and procedures.
Policy Formulation and Implementation: Policy Formulation: Objectives, Direction: Consideration of change: Business Policy concepts. Business Policy – Characteristics importance. Different Types of policies: Classification, Strategies, programmes, procedures and rules M.B.O./ M.B.E. Major and Minor policies: Supporting composite and contingency policies: Parameter of policy: Development of Business Policy: Swot Analysis: Elements of Business Policy: Implementation of Policy.
UNIT – IV
Major Business Policies: Man Power planning, Product Policies, Marketing Policies, Production and Purchase Policies, Financial Policies, Capital Procurement and distribution.
Administration and Control of Policy: Communication System: Policy Implementation, Rules and procedures: GPI policy: Appended implied and imposed policy: Oral and written Policies: control and review.
UNIT – V
Corporate Strategy: Functions and importance, strategy alternatives, considering strategy variations, Strategic choice, implementation.
References
1. Hitt, Strategic Management, Thomson, 2001.
2. Lawrance, Jauch and William Blucck Business Policy and Strategic Mgt., - McGraw Hill Intl 1998.
3. Mamoria and Mamoria – Business planning and Policy, Himalaya Publishing house – 1998.
4. Budhiraja SB and Athreya MB, Cases in Strategic Management, Tata McGraw Hill 1996.
5. Christensen CR, Business Policy: Text and cases, Illinois, Richdar Irwin 1987.
6. Hitt, Strategic Management, competitiveness and Globalization, Thomson, 2001.
7. David Fred, Strategic Management, Prentice Hall of India, 1997.
R. Srinivasan, Strategic Management the Indian context, Prentice Hall of India, 2002.
23. PROJECT REPORT
Each student shall be required to prepare on the basis of investigations carried out by him in a business or industrial organization, a project report on possible solutions for a typical problem of current interest in the area of Human Resource Management. The report should demonstrate the capability of the student for some creative potential and original approach to solve the practical problems in today’s business or industry. The report should include field studies, surveys, interpretation, planning and design of improved integrated Human Resource Management Systems and Practices.
24. SOFT SKILLS IV
Refer to PG Soft Skills Syllabus and Regulations.
10. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN HUMAN RIGHTS AND DUTIES THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
Core Subjects
1. Human Rights Violations and Remedies
a) Police atrocities
b) Judicial Remedies- Writs
c) Right to Compensation
Prescribed Books
N.R. Madhava Menon (Ed) A Training manual for Police on Human Rights.
P.N. Bagawati, Human Rights in the Criminal Justice System, 11 Bar review
Law of Writs, Ramachandran.
G. Sharma, Human Rights and Legal Remedies (Deep and Deep Publication).
2. Human Rights and Environment
a) Concept of Sustainable Development
b) Rio and Kyoto Protocol
c) Awareness and Education of Environmental Protection
Prescribed Books
P. Leela Krishnan, Environmental Law in India (Butterworths New Delhi, 1999)
A.S. Bedi, R.S. Bedi, Encyclopedia of Environment and Pollution Law (Vol I and II)
Shyam Dhiwan and Armin Rozen Cranz, Environmental Law and Policy in India: Cases, Materials and Statues, Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
3. Human Rights and NGO’s and Media
a) Role of Print and Electronic Media
b) Amnesty International -Human Rights and Watch
c) Social Movements and Human Rights
Prescribed Books
Facets of Media Law- Madhavi Diwan Garodia.
Law of Press, D.D. Basu.
Right to privacy, A comparative Case Law study in Laws from Allhorizons. Dr. A. David Ambrose (Comparative :aw Society, Pondicherry 1998).
Brandies. et.al, The Right to privacy 4 Harward Law Review 193 (1890).
4. Human Rights and Duties
a) Duty to fellow citizens
b) Duty to State
Prescribed Books
Constitution of India, V. N. Shukla
Elective Subject:VI
5. Introduction to Intellectual Property Rights
a) Patents
b) Copyrights
c) Trademark
Prescribed Books
Intellectual Property Law, Narayanan.
Intellectual Property- Copy Right, Patent and Trade Mark and Allied Rights, William Cornish and David LLewelyn (6th Ed, 2007).
Extra Disciplinary
6. Basic Computer Education
a) Internet application
b) Computer Documentation
Semester IV
Core Subjects
1. Human Rights and Contemporary Issues
a) Women’s Right-CEDAW
b) Cyber Crimes
2. Human Rights Act 1993
a) National Human Rights Commission
b) Human Rights Courts
Prescribed Books
Reports of NHRC
3. Human Rights and New World Order
a) Food Security –World conference on Food Summit.
b) Globalisation consumerism and Human Rights
Prescribed Books
Promod Mishra, Human Rights Global Issues
4. Human Rights and Community Health
a) Health issues in the contemporary Society.
b) Health Policy in India.
c) Right to health as a Basic Human Rights, Waste Management.
d) Role of Corporate World in Preserving in Community health
e) Special Rapporteur on health .
Elective Subject: VII Human Rights, Science And Technology Law
a) IPR and Human Rights.
b) Medical science and Human Rights including Bio-Patent and Foeticide
c) Technology and Human Rights –Right to privacy and genetic Engineering.
Prescribed Books
Bio Technology and Pattern Law, C. B. Raju and Dr. N.S. Srinivasalu
R.P. Anand and S.P. Bhat (Ed) Law, Science and Environment (New Delhi 1987)
Bio Technologies and International Human Rights, Francisco Francioni.
The Emergence and Growth of Bio Technology in Industrial and Developing Countries, Rohini Acharya.(Edward Elger 1999)
Genetic Privacy “Resolving the conflict between Donor and Child, Sainonton Basu. Current Science Vol :86 No: 10 May, 2004.
Reproductive Technology and Procreation Rights of the Unmarried Harward Law Review Vol: 98 (3) Jan, 1985.
Soft Skill-IV.
11. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN LABOUR MANAGEMENT
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
PAPER 11 - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
UNIT I
Evolution, Role and status of Human Resource Management in India - Structure and functions of Human Resource Management - Approaches to HRM. HR Manager - HR Manager as a changing agent - challenges to HRM.
UNIT II
HR Planning - Concept, Organisation and Practice, HR Planning Techniques - Short term and Long term planning, Information, HR information systems, Role of computer in HRP.
UNIT III
Recruitment and Selection - Job Analysis - Description, Job Specification - Selection Process - Tests and Interviews - Placement and Induction, Promotion and transfer - Retirement and separation. Performance Appraisal - Purpose - Factors affecting performance appraisal - Methods and systems of performance appraisal.
UNIT IV
Training and Development - Need and Importance - Assessment of Training Needs - Training and Development of various categories of Personnel, Training Programmes in the management of stress and conflict management. Career planning and development - Career Counselling.
UNIT V
Wages and Salary Administration - Developing sound compensation structure - Regulatory Provisions - Incentives - Motivation and Job satisfaction. Grievance handling and Discipline - Developing Grievance handling systems - Collective Bargaining - Managing Conflicts. Personnel Records, Reports, audit, personnel research.
Reference Books:
1. Arun Monappa & S. Saiyuddain: Personnel Management, Tata Mc
Graw Hill
2. Pramod Verma : Personnel Management in Indian
Organisations, Oxford & IBH.
3. Edwin B. Flippo34 : Personnel Management, Mc Graw Hill
4. BP Singh and others PM and IR. Human Resource Management
Gary Dessler : dessler
5. Michael Armstrong : A hand book of Human Resource Management
Practice
Publisher: Kogan Page
6. S.K. Batia : Human Resource Management - A competitive Advantage: Concepts, strategies and challenges
Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd
F-159, Rajouri Garden, New Delhi 110 027
7. R.S.Dwivedi : Managing Human Resource and Personnel
Management
E-mail: galgotia@ndf..in
Website:
8. John Bratton & Jeffrey Gold : Human Resource Management – Theory and
Practice
Website: http.
9. Cynthia D. Fisher : Human Resource Management
Lyle F. Schoenfeldt All India Publishers & Distributors Regd
Jame B. Shaw
PAPER 12 - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY AND STATISTICAL METHODS
Unit - I
Nature and significance of research - types of research - Planning a research project - problem identification - formulation - research design - problems in social research.
Unit - II
Sample - types - selection of sample - hypothesis - data collection - techniques and tools for collecting data - Interview - questionnaire, observation, case study, as methods of data collection.
Unit III
Analysis and interpretation - statistical methods - rates, ratios, percentage, measures of central tendency, mean median, mode, measures of dispersion, standard deviation and co-efficient of variation - correlation
Unit IV : Advance Statistical Methods
Test of hypothesis - testing of means, samples with population, proportions, large sample - chi-square and analysis of variance. Time series analysis - regression - index numbers - decision theory - cluster analysis - probability theory.
Unit V
Scrutiny of the assembled data, preparation of outline, preparation of the research report, use of computer in report writing.
Suggested readings
1. C.R. Kothari : Research Methodology and Techniques, Wiley
Eastern
2. Ferser : Research Methods in Economics and Business Verdoo Macmillan
3. R.K. Dwiredi : Research Methods in Behavioural Services,
Macmillan
4. Richard I Levin
Rubin : Statistics for Management, Prentice Hall of India
5. S.P. Gupta : Statistical Methods - Sultanchand
6. B.S. Tanden : Research Methodology in Social Services
Chitanya Publishing House, Allahabad
7. Wilkinson and : Methodology and Techniques of Social Research,
Bhandarkas Himalaya Publishing House, Bombay.
8. Saha S. : Quantitative Methods
Mukerji S. Central Education Enterprises, 54B, Patuatola Lane,
Kolkata – 700 009.
Website: http//
PAPER 13 - LABOUR LAWS RELATING TO WORKING AND
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Unit - I
The Factories Act, 1948.
The Child Labour (Prohibition & Regulation) Act, 1986
Unit - II
The Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970.
The Plantation Labour Act, 1951 with Rules and upto-date Notification
Unit - III
The Motor Transport Workers Act, 1961.
The Tamil Nadu Shop and Establishment Act, 1947
Unit - IV
The Beedi and Cigar Workers (Conditions of Employment) Act, 1966.
The Tamilnadu Catering and Establishment Act, 1958
Unit - V
The Mines Act, 1952. The Working Journalists and other Newspaper Employees (Conditions of Service and Miscellaneous Provisions) Act, 1955.
The Regulations and case laws in respect of each of the above Acts.
References:
1.D.P. Malhotra and : The law of Industrial Disputes Vol. I & II
K.R. Malhotra Universal Publication
2. G. Saran : Commentaries on Contract Labour (Regulation and
Abolition) Act, 1970, Third Edition, Easter Book Co,
Lucknow.
3. S. Vaidyanathan : Factory Laws applicable in Tamilnadu Vol. I, II & IV,
Madras Book Agency, Chennai
4. S.C. Srivatsava : Industrial Relations & Labour Law
E.mail: chawlap@giasd107..in
http: //
PAPER 14 - ELECTIVE - IV
ENTREPRENEURIAL DEVELOPMENT
Unit I - Conceptual framework:
Meaning and definitions - Scope - Difference between Intrapreneur and Entrepreneur - Entrepreneur and Manager, Entrepreneur and Inventor, Entrepreneur and Promoter Types of Entrepreneur, Characteristics of Entrepreneur.
Unit II: Functions of Entrepreneur
Idea generation, Planning, Organising, Motivation - Types of motivation, Project Identification - Project classification - Project evaluation - Problems and constraints - Role of Government, Financial Institutions, IFCI, IDBI, ICICI, SIDBI, SISI, IFCI, SBI.
Unit III: Entrepreneur Development Programme (EDP)
Concept - Objectives - Important features - factors influencing entrepreneurship. Internal, external and socio economic factors. Programmes - Education, Training, consultancy, skill development, information, marketing, Role of Government and Non Government agencies.
Unit IV: Management of Projects
Capital required - working and fixed - sources of funds - cost and benefit analysis BEP Sickness of small scale industries - Measures to prevent. Government protection - Role of IRCI, BIFR, IDBI, SIPCOT, etc.
Unit V: Report writing and case study analysis
Industrial visits - organising seminar and case study discussion on important issues - panel discussion - Meeting with experts. Preparation of the project reports.
Suggested Reading:
1. Dr. V. Balu : Entrepreneurial Development - Venkateswaran Publication,
Chennai - 4.
2. P. Saravanavel : Entrepreneurial Development - Kay Ess Pee Kay
Principles, Policies and publishing house
Programmes
3. Dr.G.B.Gupta : Entrepreneurship Development - Sultan Chand and
in India Sons
4. Peter F. Drucker : Innovation and Entrepreneurship - Affiliated East West
Practice and Principles Press Ltd Publication
of SISI Govt of India
PAPER 15 - ELECTIVE - V
ADVANCED HUMAN PROCESS LAB
1. Sensitivity Training - Understanding oneself - understanding others -
understanding How Groups Work - Balancing people's needs Vs Goals of the
Organization - Learning to listen to your employees.
2. Encounter Groups - Concept - Self-disclosure, self-awareness, responsibility, responding to feelings, psychotherapy for growth - basic procedures
3. NLP - Causing Change - Eliciting response, Anchoring, Time Distortion, reframing
4. NLP for effective communication - Matching representation States, Meta Modelling, Mirroring
5. Skill-Training - History & Development, basic concepts - Goal setting - measurement and evaluation. Basic procedures - Assertiveness training, behaviour rehearsal, Relaxation training, cognitive restructuring
Experiential exercises for all the 5 units
References: 1) Kjell Erik Rudestain - Experiential Groups in theory and practice
Brooks / cole publishing company, California.
2) Bradferd L.P., Gibbs. J.R and K.D. Benne (Eds) - T-group theory and the Laborating method, New York, Wiley
3) Carl Rogers - Carl Rogers on encounter group, New York:
Harper & Row
4) Author: Richard Bandler
i) Frogs into Princes -
ii) Using your brain for a change
iii) Persuasion Engineering
iv) Structure of Magic I
v) Structure of Magic II
Published by Andres Publication
PAPER 16 – FIELD WORK & FIELD VISITS
A distinctive feature of the curriculum is field visits and field work. It enable a student to integrate and reinforce the knowledge acquired in the class rooms with actual practice under the supervision of both the faculty and field agency. Observation visits are arranged as a part of field work. The students shall visit industries / establishments which include:
1. Engineering Industry
2. Hotel Industry
3. Petroleum and Oil Industry
4. I.T. Industry
5. ESI Corporation
6. EPF Office
7. Labour Department
8. Labour Court
9. High Court
10. Industrial Tribunal
11. Productivity Council, etc.
After completion of Observation Visits, students will be attached with establishments / industries. They are expected to learn the practical aspects of PMIR for a period of 30 days or 240 hours.
Each student shall organize a seminar on the observation made and information collected. They are expected to be well versed on power point presentation.
At the end of field work training, students will have to prepare a report not exceeding 75 typed pages.
SOFT SKILL - III - MANAGERIAL SKILLS
Objectives
• To help students to understand the mechanism of stress particularly negative emotions such as anxiety, anger and depression for effective management.
• To introduce the basic concepts of body language for conflict management.
• To give inputs on some of the important interpersonal skills such as group decision-making, negotiation and leadership skills.
• To make students learn and practice the steps involved in time management.
• To impart training for empowerment thereby encouraging the students to become successful entrepreneurs.
Unit I- Stress management
• Definitions and Manifestations of stress.
• Stress coping ability and stress inoculation training.
• Management of various forms of fear (examination fear, stage fear or public speaking anxiety), depression and anger.
Unit II- Conflict Management skills
• Types of conflict (intrapersonal, Intra group and inter group conflicts).
• Basic concepts, cues, signals, symbols and secrets of body language.
• Significance of body language in communication and assertiveness training.
• Conflict stimulation and conflict resolution techniques for effective management.
Unit III- Interpersonal Skills
• Group decision making (strengths and weaknesses).
• Developing characteristics of charismatic and transformational leadership.
• Emotional intelligence and leadership effectiveness- self awareness, self management, self motivation, empathy and social skills.
• Negotiation skills- preparation and planning, definition of ground rules, clarification and justification, bargaining and problem solving, closure and implementation.
Unit IV- Time Management
• Time wasters- Procrastination.
• Time management personality profile.
• Time management tips and strategies.
• Advantages of time management.
Unit V- Towards Empowerment
• Stimulating innovation and change- coping with “temporariness”.
• Network culture.
• Power tactics and power in groups (coalitions).
• Managerial empowerment and entrepreneurship.
• Prevention of moral dwarfism especially terrorism.
• Altruism (prosocial behaviour/helping behaviour).
Spirituality (clarifications with regard to spirituality)- strong sense of purpose- trust and respect- humanistic practices- toleration of fellow human beings expressions.
PRACTICAL TRAINING
Relaxation exercises- Western (Autogenic Relaxation) and Indian techniques (Shavasana).
Role-play. Transactional Analysis.
REFERENCES
1. Swaminathan. V.D & Kaliappan. K.V. (2001). Psychology for Effective Living. Chennai. The Madras Psychology Society.
2. Robbins, S.B. (2005). Organizational Behaviour. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.
3. Smith, B. (2004). Body Language. Delhi: Rohan Book Company.
4. Hurlock, E.B. (2006). Personality Development, 28th Reprint. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
SEMESTER IV
PAPER 17 - HUMAN RESOURCE DEVELOPMENT
Unit I
HRD at the macro level: Concept of HRD at the Macro Level - Concept of human capital - need for investment in human beings - HRD as a source of National Development. Role of education and training in facilitating HRD.
Unit II
HRD at the macro level: Concept, objectives and scope of HRD - HRD vs. traditional personnel functions - Role of HR and line managers in developing human resources.
Unit III
Mechanisms or techniques of HRD: Training and development - career planning and development - potential and performance appraisal - feed back and counselling - Organisational Development - Human Resource Information System (HRIS).
Unit IV
International Human Resource Management: HRD practices in Multi National Corporations. Recent experiences of USA and Japan with HRD.
Trends and Issues in HRD: Business Process Reengineering, Organisational Learning, knowledge management, Business process outsourcing.
Unit V
Selected Indian Experiences with HRD at the Micro Level.
Suggested Readings:
Dr.K.N. Mathur : Managing Human Resource Development
PublishersL Gyan Publishing House
5, Ansari Road, Darya Ganj, New Delhi 110 002.
Edition 2001
Website:
T.V. Rao, K.K. Verma, Alternative approaches and strategies of Human Resource
Anil K. Development
Khandewal and
E. Abraham.
Jon M. Werner and Randy Human Resource Development -
L. De Simone Thomson
T.V. Rao & Udhai PareeK Human Resource Development - Recent Experiences in Indian Industries
PAPER 18 – TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT
Unit I – INTRODUCTION
Definition of Quality, Dimensions of Quality, Quality Planning, Quality Costs – Analysis Techniques of Quality Costs, Basic concepts of Total Quality Management, Historical Review, Principles of TQM, Leadership – Concepts, Role of Senior Management, Quality Council, Quality Statements, Strategic Planning, Deming Philosophy, Barriers to TQM Implementation.
Unit II – ORGANISATION
Organisation culture – Organisation Development, HRD, OD interface, change management, strategic management, performance management, HR Information System.
Unit III – STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL (SPC)
The seven tools of quality, Statistical Fundamentals – Measures of Central Tendency and Dispersion, Population and Sample, Normal Curve, Control Charts for Variables and Attributes, Concept of six sigma, New Seven Management Tools.
Unit IV – TQM TOOLS
Benchmarking – Reasons to Benchmark, Bench Marking Process, Quality Function Deployment (QFD) – House of Quality, QFD Process, Benefits, Taguchi Quality Los function.
Unit V – QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEMS
Need for ISO 9000 and Other Quality Systems, ISO 9000:2000 Quality System Elements, Implementation of Quality System, Documentation, Quality Auditing, 9000, ISO 14000 – Concept, Requirements and Benefits – TS 16949 – Balrich Award
Reference Books:
1. Total Quality Management By R.S.Nagarajan, A.A. Arivalagar, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi.
2. Total Quality Management. An integrated approach by Samuel KHO, Crest Publishing House, New Delhi – 2.
3. Managing for Total Quality from Deming to Taguchi and SPC by N. Logothetis, Prentice Hall of India 2000
4. Total Quality Management by Suganthi, Anand S. Anand, 2004, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
5. Haushal Kumar, “Quality Management”: ABD Publishers, Jaipur
E.mail: oxford@id.
PAPER 19 - SOCIAL SECURITY LEGISLATION RELATING TO LABOUR
Unit - I
The Workmen's Compensation Act, 1923.
Unit - II
The Employees Provident Funds and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952, with the Employees Provident Fund Scheme, 1952, Employees Deposit Linked Insurance Scheme 1976, Employees Pension Scheme 1995
Unit - III
The Employees State Insurance Act, 1948.
The Maternity Benefit Act, 1961.
Unit - IV
The Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972.
The Tamilnadu Labour Welfare Fund Act, 1972
Unit - V
The Equal Remuneration Act, 1976. The Payment of Wages Act, 1936. The Minimum Wages Act, 1948. With rules and upto date notifications, amendments, regulations and case laws in respect of each of the above acts.
Selected References:
Factory Laws applicable in Tamilnadu Volume - I to III by Madras Book Agency.
D.S.Chopta : The Minimum Wages Act, 1948 - Second Edition -
Eastern Law House, Calcutta.
D.S.Chopta : 'The Payment of Wages Act 1948' - Third Edition
- Eastern Law House, Calcutta.
D.S. Chopta : 'Payment of Bonus' Law & Practice - Texman
Publications (Private) Limited, Kucha Chelan,
Khari Baoli, Delhi - 110 006, 1871.
Law Journals like labour law journal, Labour &
Industrial Cases, Factories Journal Reports.
K.D.Srivastava : 'Workmen's Compensation Act' Third Edition
Eastern Book Company, 34, Lalbagh, Lucknow - 226 001
K.D. Srivastava : 'Employees State Insurance Act' Second Edition
Eastern Book Comlpany, 34, Lalbagh, Lucknow - 226 001.
K.D. Srivastava : 'Commentaries on' Employees Provident Fund &
Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952' - 4th Edition
Eastern Book Company Law Publishers & Book
Sellers, 34, Lalbagh, Lucknow - 226 001.
K.D. Srivastava : 'Commentaries on 'Payment of Gratuity Act 1972'
Second Edition - Eastern Book Company
34, Lalbagh Lucknow - 226 001.
Law Journals like Labour Law Journal Labour &
Industrial cases, Factories Journal Reports.
PAPER 20 - ELECTIVE - VI
CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY
Unit I
CSR - Definition, concepts, overview of corporate social responsibility, concentration areas. Corporate social responsibility in Indian context and International. Need to be social responsible.
Unit II
Business ethics and corporate social responsibility in Global scenario: CSR-business ethics, corporate governance across the nations, ethical decision-making in different culture, consumer protection, environment protection, gender issues in multiculturalism, corruption and safety.
Unit III
Corporate community participation & Role and skills of social worker in CSR: Corporate, NGO, Government, Citizen, need for partnership, need assessment, corporate perspective on building successful partnership, tools and techniques. Role and skills - Advocacy, administration, marketing, mediating, budgeting, organizing, documenting, presenting, public speaking, teaching, supervising, writing.
Unit IV
Corporate social responsibility - Policies and activities: ISO - Standard on CSR, International standards and norms. National and International CSR activities.
Unit V
Case studies of successful CSR initiative: CPCL, EID Parry / CUMI, Ashok Leyland, AMM Foundation, Bajaj Auto, Coca-cola India, HMT, Hindustan Unilever, Infosys, Tata, The Taj Mahal Hotel, Titan, TVS, MRF, Saint Gobain, Orchid, WIPRO, Birla Group of companies, ICICI, TCS, Times of India and others.
Methodology of teaching:
Lectures, Reading materials, Discussions, assignment, field visits, news clippings.
Suggested Reading:
1. The business of social responsibility - Harsh shrivastava, Books for change, Bangalore, yr 2000
2. Corporate social responsibility - concepts and cases, CV. Baxi, yr. 2005
3. Global strategic management, Dr. M. Mahmoudi, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt Ltd, Delhi, yr. 2005
4. International Human Resource Management - Global perspective, SK. Bhatia, Deep & Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd., Delhi, year 2005
Journals:
1. Harvard business review - corporate social responsibility getting the logic right, vol. 84, issue 12, yr. 2006
2. Indian journal of social work - CSR in the globalised business environment, Vol. 66, issue 2, yr. 2005.
3. Indian journal of Industrial Relations - CSR: Present practice and future possibilities, Vol. 40, issue 4, yr 2005
PAPER 21 - ELECTIVE - VII
HR MANAGEMENT IN SERVICE INDUSTRIES
(I.T. Hotel and Hospital)
Unit I:
Human Resource Planning: Job analysis – Job description . Job specification. Employee recruitment and selection – Sources
Unit II:
Performance Appraisal, potential appraisal & career planning, Training and development – Need Analysis, Task analysis – Records and forms. Compensation
Unit III:
Employee promotion, demotion and transfer – welfare – health and safety – stress – causes of stress – consequence.
Unit IV:
HRM in I.T. – Personnel office – functions of the office – correspondence / O 7 M in personnel Department, Maintenance of Personnel records. Government policy on I.T. Industries.
Unit V:
Time Management – Time factor, Time waster, prioritizing work, scheduling, functions of time office – Electronic, Magnetic flexgile – Read Work arrangement – Maintenance of Human Resource days.
Bibliography:-
R.C Goyal : Hospital Administration and HRM
Publishers: Prentice – Hall of India (Pvt.) Ltd.
New Delhi – 01.
A.V. Srinivasan : Managing a Modern Hospital
Publishers: Response Book A Division of Sage
Publications, New Delhi – 1.
R. Llewellyn Daview : Hospital Planning and Administration Publishers:
H.M.C. Macaulay Jaypee Brothers, New Delhi.
Sudhir Andreues : Hotel Front Office Training Manual
Publishers: Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd.
S.K.Bhatnagar : Front Office Management
Publishers: Frank Bros Co.
PAPER 22 - PROJECTS
Each student is required to take up a research project and submit a report in the form of a dissertation. The students would begin the project activities in the beginning of the IV Semester and submit the report for evaluation by the Institute/college. The report shall not exceed 75 typed pages excluding tables, figures, bibliography and appendices.
The report shall be valued by the Institute/College by constituting a committee headed by the Professor and Head of Faculty/Department known as VIVAVOCE Exam Committee. The marks shall be distributed as follows:
Internal : 20 marks (by the faculty/department guide)
External
a) Report : 50 marks (by the University Exam)
b) Viva Voce : 30 marks (VIVAVOCE Exam Committee)
Total :100 marks
Theoretical orientation to research by way of a brief course on Research Methodology is given to the students before they start on their work.
Necessary guidance will be given to the students for the Dissertation. Students who involve themselves in the project with interest will be able to develop skills of research in constructing research tools, analyzing problems and interpreting and evaluating results.
Wherever the Committees are formed for external evaluation, an external examiner shall be appointed with the approval of the Head of the Institute/Colleges.
SOFT SKILL - IV - COMPUTING SKILLS
Objective: The major objective in introducing the Computer Skills course is to impart training for students in Microsoft Office which has different components like MS Word, MS Excel, MS Access, Power point etc., at two levels based on their knowledge and exposure. It provides essential skills for the user to get adapted to any work environment, as most of the systems in any6 work place have MS Office installed for their day to day activities. The course is highly practice oriented rather than regular class room teaching.
Pre-requisite: Pass in Level B are an equivalent course.
Unit I: Word Processing – Formatting – Paragraph and character styles, templates and wizards, table and contents and indexes, cross referencing; Tables and Columns – creating manipulating and formatting; Mail Merge, Labels and Envelopes.
Unit II: Spreadsheets – Workbook, Building, Modifying, navigating; worksheet- Autofull, copying and moving cells, inserting and deleting rows, printing; Formulas and functions- Troubleshooting formulas, Functions and its forms like database, financial, logical, reference , mathematical and statistical – Databases – Creating, sorting, filtering and linking.
Unit III: Presentations – Power point – exploring, creating and editing slides, inserting tables and charts- special effects- Clip Art, creating and drawing shapes, inserting multimedia content – presentations – planning, animation, handouts, slideshow..
Unit IV: Databases – Access – Components, creating a database and project, import and exporting, customizing; Tables- creating and setting fields; Queries –Types, creating, wizard- Reports- creating and layout.
Unit V: Information Management – Outlook – Starting, closing, contacts, tool bars, file management; email-reading, composing, responding, attachments, signature, junk mail; tasks- screen, sorting, creating, deleting, assigning, updating; scheduling- calendar.
Note: All units needs an approach through practical exposure.
References:
1. Working in Microsoft Office; Ron Mansfield, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Microsoft Excel 2007; Guy Hart Davis, Tata McGraw Hill.
Examination:
1. Internal assessment could be based on Theory and/or practicals.
2. End semester is based on practicals.
12. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN NATYA
(FIVE YEAR INTEGRATED)
For Part I & II (Language and English) as applicable to the other entire Undergraduate courses.
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
|Title of the Paper |Paper V – Textual Sources on Natya (Tamil) (Theory) |
|Category of theCourse |Core |
|Year & Semester |Second Year Third Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Sangam Age – Introduction to Pathupattu |
|Unit – 2 |Sangam Age – Introduction to Ettuthogai |
|Unit – 3 |Arangettra Kathai from Silapadikkaram with Adiyarkunallar’s commentary |
|Unit – 4 |Pancha Marabu - (Kootha Marabu Chapter -4) |
|Unit – 5 |Dramatic literature : (ancient)(Kaanal Vari) (Silapadikaram) |
|Title of the Paper |Paper VI – Natya III (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Second Year Third Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Dance- |
| |Nrtta Hasthas, Upangas, Charis (Bhumi, Akash), Karavartana, Bahukarma |
|Unit – 2 |Allarippu,Jathiswaram |
|Unit – 3 |Music |
| |Jathiswaram,(1) Folk song (1), Marriage song (1), Chindu song (1), Kummi,(1) Kolattam (1), Patriotic |
| |song (1) |
|Unit – 4 |Theatre |
| |Actors medium – Body, Voice, Space; Relationship to environment- Internal and External , Audio and |
| |Visual Aspect of an actor, |
| |Movements in different spaces. |
|Unit – 5 |Yoga(8 Asanas,1 Pranayama & 1 Surya Namaskar) |
|Title of the Paper |Allied II – Paper II Glimpses of Indian Art History (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Allied |
|Year & Semester |Second Year Third Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Indus Valley Civilization-Great Bath,Great Granary ; Mauryas-Palaces,Stupas,Pillars,Sanctuaries; |
| |Sungas- Stupas,Pillars,Chaitya Halls,Rock cut Viharas and Cult Images, Kushanas-Style & examples from |
| |Gandhara Art. |
|Unit – 2 |Guptas-Special features,Temple of Tigawa,Deogarh Temple,Nachna Kuthara,Bhimara,Bhitargaon Temples, |
| |Sculpture and Painting. |
|Unit – 3 |Chalukyas--Aihole,Badami,Pattadakal; Rasthrakutas—Kailasa Temple,Virupaksha Temple,Khajuraho and |
| |Ellora; Hoysalas—Special features,Chennakesvara Temple,Hoysalesvara Temple,Kesava Temple. |
|Unit – 4 |Vijayanagar—Hampi, Vittalaswamy Temple,Hazara Temple; Architecture under Bahamani & Deccan Sultanate. |
|Unit – 5 |Architecture under the Delhi Sultanate; Mughal Architecture – Special features,style with examples. |
FOURTH SEMESTER
|Title of the Paper |Paper VII - Concepts and Classification (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Second Year Fourth Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Notation for Music and Dance -Jathiswaram |
|Unit – 2 |Introduction to Sapta talas, 35 Talas |
|Unit – 3 |Lakshanas of Musical forms(Geetham, Swarajati, Jathiswaram, Varnam , Padam) |
|Unit – 4 |Types of Drama : Rupaka (10), Patra, Daru |
|Unit – 5 |Types of Theatre constructions |
|Title of the Paper |Paper VIII – Natya And Nrtya IV (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Second Year Fourth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Dance & Music –Pushpanjali,Kauthwam. |
|Unit – 2 |Dance & Music - Padam (Telugu) |
|Unit – 3 |Dance & Music - Padam (Tamil) |
|Unit – 4 |Theatre Actor’s Training – Physical, Vocal and Psychological |
|Unit – 5 |Yoga (8 Asanas,1 Pranayama &1 Surya Namaskar) |
|Title of the Paper |Allied II – Paper II – Glimpses of Indian Philosophy (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Allied |
|Year & Semester |Second Year Fourth Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Vedas, Upanishads, Bhagavath Gita |
|Unit – 2 |Jainism, Buddhism |
|Unit – 3 |Nyaya, Vaisheshika, Sankhya, Yoga, Mimamsa |
|Unit – 4 |Major Schools of Vedanta (Advaita, Dvaita, Vishisthadvaita) |
|Unit – 5 |Saiva Siddhantha |
FIFTH SEMESTER
|Title of the Paper |Paper IX– Textual Sources on Natya (Sanskrit) (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Third Year Fifth Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 | Importance of Bhava and Rasa - Abhinavagupta’s Commentary-Abhinavabharati |
|Unit – 2 |Brief outline of Nrtta Ratnavali, Nartana Adhyaya of Sangita Ratnakara, |
|Unit – 3 |Brief outline of Abhinaya Darpana. |
|Unit – 4 |Dramatic Literature – select scenes from one Sanskrit play (ancient)(Abhijnana Sakuntalam Act VI ) |
|Unit – 5 |Structure & Practice of Bhagavatha Mela Natakam and Therukoothu |
|Title of the Paper |Paper X – Natya V (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Third Year Fifth Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Dance: |
| |Viniyoga of Asamyukta Hastas |
| |Viniyoga of Samyukta Abhinaya Hastas |
| |Hastas for Devatas, Bandavas |
|Unit – 2 |Dance : Uthukaadu Venkatasubbiar’s Raasasabdham (1) |
| |Tillana |
|Unit – 3 | Music : Composition of Sankardas Swamigal(1) and Bhaskardas Swamigal (1) |
|Unit – 4 |Two representative Dramatic styles – movements of Bhagavatha Mela Natakam and Therukoothu(learning from|
| |recorded material ) |
|Unit – 5 |Yoga (8 Asanas ,1 Pranayama,1Surya Namaskar) |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XI - Nattuvangam I (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Third Year Fifth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Recitation of 5 simple korvais |
|Unit – 2 |Handling Tattu – Kazhi - Manai for Adavu in Trikala |
| |Handling Tattu – Kazhi - Manai for Allarippu |
|Unit – 3 |Singing and handling Tattu – Kazhi-Manai for Jathiswaram |
|Unit – 4 |Recitation of Dialogues – Sanskrit(1),Tamil(1),English(1) |
|Unit – 5 |Yoga – Breathing technique for Voice culture |
|Title of the Paper | Elective I – Ritualistic and Artistic Traditions (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Elective |
|Year & Semester |Third Year Fifth Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Ritualistic dance and music in temples – Navasandhi, Kudamurai, Araiyar Sevai and Ahamargam |
|Unit – 2 |Rare dance and music forms: Simhanartanam, Perani and Prenkani |
|Unit – 3 |Musical instruments for dance as evidenced from temple sculptures |
|Unit – 4 |Study of musical instruments used for dance: Vina, Flute, Violin and Mruthangam. |
|Unit – 5 |Isai Vellalars: Their Contribution to music and dance (Nadaswaram & Tavil); Tanjore Quartet, Eminent |
| |dancers, Nattuvanars, Vocal and Instrumental performers. |
SIXTH SEMESTER
|Title of the Paper |Paper XII – Theatrical Expression (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Third Year Sixth Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Puppet theatre, masks, mask-like make up |
|Unit – 2 |Pulluvan Pattu, Tala Madalle, Udukkadi Pattu, Theyyam |
|Unit – 3 |Kuravanji Natakam , Pallu |
|Unit – 4 |Harikatha Kalakshepam and others story telling traditions. |
|Unit – 5 |Basics of Aharya: Costume designing, Make-up and Jewellery (for Bharata Natyam) Solo / Dance dramas, |
| |Historical and Social Plays. |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XIII – Natya VI & Nattuvangam II (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Third Year Sixth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Sabdam, Varnam. |
|Unit – 2 |Jati Recitation and handling the talam for Sabdam,Varnam. |
|Unit – 3 |Representative dramatic style – Harikatha Methodology |
|Unit – 4 |Patterns of Karagam,Kavadi,Oyillattam/Kummi,Kollattam |
|Unit – 5 |Theatre Skills – Movement/ Voice modulation |
|Title of the Paper |Elective II- Choreography (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Elective |
|Year & Semester |Third Year Sixth Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 | Choreography for : |
| |Given Jathis. |
|Unit – 2 |Given songs / song text and movements. |
|Unit – 3 |Group of 5 or 6 dancers. |
|Unit – 4 |Ragas and Moods (9). |
|Unit – 5 |Play production –Selection, Music, Movements. |
|Title of the Paper |Elective III– Cultural Scenario 14th TO 20th Century A.D. (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Elective |
|Year & Semester |Third Year Sixth Semester |
|Credits |5 (FIVE) |
|Subject Code | |
|Course Outline |
|Unit – 1 |Contribution to the revival of culture and Arts in South India during 14th century to 16th century. |
|Unit – 2 |Nayak kings and Marathas of Thanjavur |
|Unit – 3 |Theatre styles of Tamil Nadu during 19th-20th centuries: Thanjavur Marathi theatre, Madurai, Tamil |
| |theatre movement, (Bhaskardas, Shankardas, Pammal Sambandar) |
|Unit – 4 |Music Trinity,Tamil Trinity,Dance compositions & composers (14th -20th centuries). Cultural scenario of|
| |Bharathanatyam during 19th -20th centuries (based on literary sources), Kamba Ramayana and Villi |
| |Bharatam |
|Unit – 5 |Guru Sishya relationship in Indian Culture and Purpose and Ethics of Natya |
1. Recommended Texts:
1. Dr. S. Singaravelan , 2005, Tolkappiyam : Simple notes (in Tamil) (Eluthu
Adhikaram, Sol Adhikaram, Porul Adhikaram) Tirunelveli, South India. Saiva Siddhanta Kazhagam Limited,154, T.T.K. Salai, Chennai-18.
2. Dr. S. Ilakkuvanar. M.A, M.O.L, Ph.D, Tholkappiyam: In English with critical
studies, Neelamalar Educational Publishers, Madras.600 101.
3. P. Sambamoorthy, South Indian Music, 6 Vols., Indian Music Publishing House
Madras (Eng).
4. R.S. Nagar – Edited, Natyasastra of Bharatamuni (Sanskrit) with
The commentary of Acharya Abinava Gupta. Vol. I. Chapter (1-7), Vol II. Chapter (8-18), Vol III. Chapter (19-27), Vol IV. Chapter (28-36).
5. Dr.Man Mohan Ghosh, Naatya Sastra I &II. (A Treatise on Ancient Indian
Dramaturgy and Histrionics ascribed to Bharatha Muni) Vol I- (chapter 1-27) Vol II –
(Chapters 28-36).
6. Ghosh, Manmohan, Nandikesvara’s Abhinayadarpanam,Manisha Granthalaya Pvt
Ltd.,Calcutta,1981.
7. Sri. T.V. Ananthanarayanan, Learning Through Yoga published by Krishnamacharya
Yoga Mandiram, Ch – 28.
8. Dr. E. R. Gopalakrishnan, Be a Healthy Dancer, Yoga Maiyam, Chennai – 20.
2. Reference Books:
1. S. V. Subramanian and V. Veerasami – Edited, Cultural Heritage of the Tamils
International Institute of Tamil Studies.
2. Dr. Padma Subrahmanyam, Karanas - Common Dance codes of India and
Indonesia, Nrithyodaya, Chennai .Vol I
3. Dr. K.K. Pillai. 1975 ,The History of TamilNadu & Social History of Tamils.
4. Hiriyanna, M. Art Experience, 1954, Mysore: Kavyalaya Publishers,
5. ------------------Indian conception of values: 1975, Mysore: Kavyalaya Publishers.
6. Pandey, 1959, K. C., Comparative Aesthetics, Vol. I Indian Aesthetics, Varanasi.
Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office.
7. Radhakrishanan, S.,Indian Philosophy in 2 Vols.London: Allen & Unwin.1958.
8. Raghavan, V.,The Number of Rasas,The Adyar Library and Research Centre, Madras- 600 020.1975.
9. Ramachandran, T.P., The Indian Philosophy of Beauty Vols. I & II, Madras:
University of Madras.
10. Swami Prajnananda, Cultural Heritage of Indian Fine Arts.
11. Tejomayananda,Swami, Hindu Culture: An Introduction,Mumbai: Central Chinmaya Mission Trust.2000.
12. Khokar, Ashish Mohan, Bharatanatyam, Rupa & Co, New Delhi.2002.
13. Rukmini Devi Arundale, Birth Centenary Volume,The Kalakshetra Foundation, Chennai.2003.
14. Vatsyayan Kapila: Indian Classical dance, Publications Division, New Delhi, 1992.
15. Varadpande, M.L: History of Indian Theatre: Loka Ranja panorama of Indian Folk Theatre, Abhinav publications, New Delhi, 1992.
16. Vastsyayan, Kapila: Traditional Indian Theatre: Multiple Streams, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 1980.
17. Dr. Padma Subrahmanyam: Legacy of a Legend, A collection of articles. Nrithyodaya, The Academy of Performing Arts, Mumbai – 22
18. De, S.K. Sanskrit poetics as study of Aesthetics with notes by Edwin Gerow. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press 1963.
19. Manjul Gupta A study of Abhinava Bharathi on Bharata’s Natya Sastra and Avaloka on Dhananjaya’s Dasaroopaka. Dramatgrical Principles.
20.------------------- Abhinavagupta, An Historical and Philosophical study, Varanasi. Chowkhamba Sanskrit Series Office, 1935.
21. Subramanyam, Padma., Natya Sastra and National Unity, Kerala : Sri Ramavarma Government Sanskrit College, Tripunithura, 1997.
22. ------------------- Bharata’s Art, Then and Now. Bhulabhai Memorial Institute Bombay – 36 & Nrithyodata, Madras – 20, 1979
23.Bashyam, A.L. (1975), Cultural History of India, Oxford Clarendon Press, UK
24. Epson, E.J. (Ed.) (1979), Cambridge History of India: Vol I. Ancient India, S. Chand, New Delhi.
25. Sathianathaier, R., (1972), Political and Cultural History of India, Vol-1, S. Vishvanathan Printers & Publishers, Madras
26. Smith, V, (1958), Oxford History of India, Oxford University Press, UK
27. Thapar, Romila, (1996), History of India, Vol – 1, Penguin, London.
28. Tripathi, Ram Shauhar. (1987), History of Ancient India, Motilal Banarasidas, New Delhi
29. Dr. A. N. Perumal : Tamil Drama, Origin and Development, International Institute of Tamil Studies, Chennai – 20
30. Adya Rangacharya, Drama in Sanskrit Literature, Popular Prakasan
31. M. Christopher, Concept of Ancient Indian Theatre, Munshiram Manoharlal Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
32. K.K. Pillay, Social History of the Tamils, University of Madras 1975
3. Website, e-learning resources:
1. indian- 2.
3 4.
5. 6.
7. 8.
9. 10.folkdances.htm
11 12. softsolutions.co.in
Instruction for Course Transaction (for all courses in each semester)
| |For Theory Papers |For Practical |
| | |Papers |
|Lecture Hours | 4 | |
|Library Hours | 1 | |
|Field work Hours which includes attending of Seminars/ Symposium/ Conferences | 1 | |
|Practical Learning Hours | | 4 |
|Listening (cassettes/ compact discs/ records etc.) hours which includes listening to live| | 1 |
|concerts | | |
|Self learning writing/ teaching aids like notation, cassettes, etc. | | 1 |
Model Question Paper Total marks:75.
Core paper I Introduction to Natya Time : 3 Hrs.
Part –A-(50 words) Answer any 10 out of 12 questions= 10x1=10
1. What is the Indian conception of values called?
2. Define Natya. Is it synonymous with Nrtta?
3. Name the authors of Nātya Śāstra and Tolkappiyam.
4. Which are the adhikarams in Tolkappiyyam? 5. Name four dance styles popularly known as ‘classical’ in India today?
6. What is meant by Muthamizh?
7. From which play has the word Bharata been explained as Bhava,Raga and Tala?
8. Define the two distinct heads under Iyal .
9. Name two commentators of Silappadikaram.
10. Two famous Bharatanatyam dancers:
11. Name 2 commentators of the Natya Sastra.
12. Which chapters deal with Angika Abhinaya in the Natya Sastra?
Part –B- (200 words) Answer any 5 out of 7 questions= 5x5=25
1. Distinguish between Nātya Veda and Nātya Śāstra.
2. Define Abhinaya. Explain the different types.
3. How many types of Puruśartha-s are there? Explain.
4. Name the chapters in the Nātya Śāstra that deal with music.
5. What is the nature and purpose of Nātya?
6. Explain the term Purvaranga.Who are the main characters in it?
7. Explain Bharata’s theory of Rasa.
Part –C-(500 words) Answer any 4 out of 6 questions= 4x10=40
1. Write an essay on any two major folk dance forms of Tamilnadu.
2. Elaborate on Meippattiyal of Tolkappiyyam.
3. Explain briefly about the contents of the Nātya Śāstra.
4. Elaborate upon the mythological origin of Nātya.
5. Compare and contrast any two of the following dance
styles: Bharathanatyam, Odissi, Kathak and Kathakali.
6. Compare and contrast Rasaadyaaya of Natya Sastra and Meipattiyal of Tolkappiyam
--------
Programme Structure for PG course
|Title of the Paper |Paper XIV - Bhava & Rasa (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Seventh Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Bhava |
|Unit - 2 |Rasa |
|Unit - 3 |Mei padu and Suvai |
|Unit - 4 |Nayaka and Nayika bheda lakshanam |
|Unit - 5 |Concepts of Aucitya, Vakrokti, Ninda Stuthi, Apahnuti, in Nrtta |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XV - Early literary sources for Natya and Koothu(Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Seventh Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |References to Natya in the Vedas. |
|Unit - 2 |References to Natya in Ramayana and Mahabharata |
|Unit - 3 |References to Koothu in Sangam literature |
|Unit - 4 |References to Koothu in Silapathigaram |
|Unit - 5 |Natya Sastra; Date & Mythologies |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XVI - Natya VII (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Seventh Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Netraabhinaya and Yoga |
|Unit - 2 |Tamil Padhavarnam/ Pravesha Daru |
|Unit - 3 |Thillana |
|Unit - 4 |Karanas (1 – 27) |
|Unit - 5 |Music Thirupavai(1), Thiruvampavai(1) and above items |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XVII - Nattuvangam & Direction III (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Seventh Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Choreography of Jathiswaram- Solo. |
|Unit - 2 |Rechoreography of Jathiswaram for 2/more dancers |
|Unit - 3 |Nattuvangam for Jathiswaram |
|Unit - 4 |Nadai for Characters |
|Unit - 5 |Recitation of Vachanas (Vachika Abhinaya) |
|Title of the Paper |Elective I – Pan Indian Classical Dance forms: Kuchupudi/Mohiniattam (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Elective |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Seventh Semester |
|Credits |3 (Three) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |History and Themes |
|Unit– 2 |Angika -Repertoire |
|Unit– 3 |Vachika-Language and music |
|Unit– 4 |Aharya-costumes and jewellery |
|Unit– 5 |Famous performers |
|Title of the Paper |Elective II- Cultural Tourism in India (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Elective |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Eighth Semester |
|Credits |3 (Three) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit 1 |Cultural Sites |
|Unit 2 |People: Heritage and Customs |
|Unit 3 |Fairs and Festivals |
|Unit 4 |Handicrafts |
|Unit 5 |Food |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XVIII - Dance sculpture in temples (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Eighth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Temple as the focal centre for dance |
|Unit- 2 |Relationship of Natya Sastra with Agama Sastra |
|Unit - 3 |Karana Sculptures of Thanjavur |
|Unit - 4 |Karana Sculptures of Chidambaram, Kumbakonam,Darasuram |
|Unit - 5 |Karana Sculptures of Thiruvannamalai, Virudhachalam |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XIX - Natya Therapy (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Eighth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Therapy for dancers, actors |
|Unit - 2 |Therapy through Natya – Physiology |
|Unit- 3 |Therapy through Natya – Psychology |
|Unit - 4 |Speech therapy |
|Unit - 5 |Music Therapy |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XX – Natya VIII (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Eighth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit -1 |Karanas (28 – 55) |
|Unit - 2 |Mallari |
|Unit - 3 |Karanas-(56-81) |
|Unit - 4 |Music Tamil Kritis (4), Tevaram(1), |
|Unit - 5 |Bhasa: Karna Bharam(One Act Play) |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXI - Nattuvangam IV(Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Eighth Semester |
|Credits |2 (TWO) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Vachika in Tala |
|Unit - 2 |Learn recitation of following theermanams: |
| |Thrikalajathi in Adi Thalam |
|Unit - 3 |Thrikalajathi in RupakaThalam |
|Unit - 4 |Theermanam in Khanda ChapuThala |
|Unit - 5 |Theermanam in Misra ChapuThala |
|Title of the Paper |Elective III – Philosophy Of Beauty (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Elective |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Eighth Semester |
|Credits |3 (THREE) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Definition and Nature |
|Unit - 2 |Beauty in Nature |
|Unit- 3 |Beauty in Art |
|Unit - 4 |Some Important Theories in Aesthetics |
|Unit - 5 |Some Important Aestheticians. |
|Title of the Paper |Elective IV - Pan Indian Classical Dance Form: Kuchupudi/ Mohiniattam (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Elective |
|Year and Semester |Fourth year Eighth Semester |
|Credits |3 (THREE) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Basic steps |
|Unit - 2 |Invocatory Item |
|Unit- 3 |Nrtta item -1. |
|Unit - 4 |Abhinaya item-1 |
|Unit - 5 |To sing any one of the above. |
NINTH SEMESTER
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXII –Professionalism (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Ninth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Pedagogy |
|Unit - 2 |Elements of choreography |
|Unit - 3 |Music in relation to Natya |
|Unit - 4 |Sound and Lighting system for a presentation |
|Unit - 5 |Management of Art Institutions and performances |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXIII - Natya in Space and Time (Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Ninth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit -1 |Natya Sastra and Martial Arts |
|Unit - 2 |Pan Indian nature of Natya Sastra – Karanas in Satara |
|Unit - 3 |Pan Asian view of Natya Sastra and Ithihasas – Karanas in Prambanan (Indonesia) |
|Unit - 4 |Traditional Indian Natya forms - Ramaleela, Rasleela, Ankia Nat-Sattriya,Bhavai,Tamasha. |
|Unit - 5 |Contributions of Masters to Dance Music – Melattur Venkatrama Sastri, Gopalakrishna Bharati, Uttukadu |
| |Venkatasubbaiyyar. |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXIV - Natya IX(Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year & Semester |Fifth year Ninth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |1 Astapadi |
|Unit- 2 |1 Javali, 1 Bhajan |
|Unit - 3 |1 Abhang, 1 Dasar Padam |
|Unit - 4 |Improvisation – 1 scene from traditional/ folk theatre |
|Unit - 5 |Karanas (82-108) |
|Title of the Paper |Elective V - Choreography and Direction (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Elective V |
|Year & Semester |Fifth year Ninth Semester |
|Credits |3 (THREE) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Learn to sing and do nattuvangam for all the items learnt in dance practical |
|Unit- 2 |Teaching practical classes for students of final year B.A |
|Unit - 3 |Choreographing a half hour long dance drama involving atleast 8 – 10 students |
|Unit - 4 |Play production for children |
|Unit - 5 |Yoga Therapy module for performers |
|Title of the Paper |Elective VI : Nataraja Tattvam(Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Elective VI (Offered to other departments) |
|Year & Semester |Fifth year Ninth Semester |
|Credits |2/3 (TWO/THREE) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Concept of Thandava – 7, 12, 108. |
|Unit- 2 |Sculptural Representation |
|Unit - 3 |Philosophical Significance |
|Unit - 4 |Chidambaram – Tamil Nadu, Uttara Chidambaram – Maharastra |
|Unit - 5 |Two Major Works on Nataraja |
|Title of the Paper |Internship Paper – Aharya (Practical Internship) |
|Category of the Course |Internship |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Ninth Semester |
|Credits |2(TWO) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Audio balancing |
|Unit - 2 |Lighting |
|Unit - 3 |Preparation of stage décor and usage |
|Unit - 4 |To observe Choreography and Rehearsal methodology under a professional troupe |
|Unit - 5 |Costume designing |
TENTH SEMESTER
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXV - Research Methodology(Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Tenth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit 1 |Purpose & Types of Research |
|Unit - 2 |Problem & Hypothesis |
|Unit - 3 |Data Collection |
|Unit - 4 |Research Design |
|Unit - 5 |Writing a research proposal and report |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXVI - Concert I Choreography & Direction (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Tenth Semester |
|Credits |2 (TWO) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Nattuvangam & Choreography for Thillana- Solo. |
|Unit - 2 |Rechoreography of Thillana for 2/more dancers |
|Unit - 3 |Choreography of Padam based on the Navarasas. |
|Unit - 4 |Choreography of Padam based on Astanayika |
|Unit - 5 |Directing a skit/mime on a social issue/problem. |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXVII – Concert II Performance (Practical) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Tenth Semester |
|Credits |2 (TWO) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Performance (Dance) |
|Unit- 2 |Performance (Drama) |
|Unit - 3 |Performance (Music) |
|Unit - 4 |Performance (Yoga) |
|Unit - 5 |Multimedia Presentation of the arts. |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXVIII– Project Work/Dissertation Viva -Voce(Theory) |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Tenth Semester |
|Credits |6 (SIX) |
|Subject Code | |
|Title of the Paper |Paper XXIX – Resources & Docummentation of Natya |
|Category of the Course |Core |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Tenth Semester |
|Credits |4 (FOUR) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |Literary Sources |
|Unit- 2 |Oral Tradition |
|Unit - 3 |Sculptural and Epigraphical Sources |
|Unit - 4 |Documentation Through Written forms |
|Unit - 5 |Documentation through Audio, Video |
| | |
|Title of the Paper |Elective VII – Classical and Folk dances of Madras from 1600 A.D to the present day. |
|Category of the Course |Elective |
|Year and Semester |Fifth year Tenth Semester |
|Credits | 3 (THREE) |
|Subject Code | |
| |
|Unit - 1 |17th Century. |
|Unit- 2 |18th Century. |
|Unit - 3 |19th Century. |
|Unit - 4 |20th Century |
|Unit - 5 | 21st Century |
Instruction for Course Transaction (for all courses in each semester)
| |For Theory Papers |For Practical |
| | |Papers |
|Lecture Hours |4 | |
|Library Hours |1 | |
|Field work Hours which includes attending of Seminars/ Symposium/ Conferences |1 | |
|Practical Learning Hours | |4 |
|Listening (cassettes/ compact discs/ records etc.) hours which includes listening to live| |1 |
|concerts | | |
|Self learning writing/ teaching aids like notation, cassettes, etc. | |1 |
13. M.A.DEGREE COURSE IN PHILOSOPHY
THIRD SEMESTER
SYLLABUS
CORE PAPER-IX: PHILOSOPHY OF RELIGION
1.Introduction:
Nature and scope of philosophy of religion - its relation to philosophy, psychology and theology.
2.Origin and Development of Religion:
Primitive or tribal religion - animism, spiritism , totemism- fetishism- mana and magic - chief characterisitc features of national or priestly religion and universal or prophetic religion-definition of religion - basic religious beliefs.
3.Psychology of Religion:
The psychological basis of religion - attitudes to religion, intellectual, moral and emotional.
4.The Nature and Types of Religious and Mystical Experience:
Illustrations from the lives of the mystics of all religions - characteristic features of religious and mystical experience - criticisms of psychologists and philosophers – Pseudo mystical experience- values and significance of religious and mystical experience.
5.The Metaphysics of Religion:
The nature and attributes of God - God as a necessary Being-omnipresent, omniscient and omnipotent - the personality of God - God as personal - God as ethical - God as immanent and transcendent – God as absolute.
The problem of evil - the idea of evil in history of religion - nature and moral evils - evil and omnipotent God - human freedom (solutions) and evil- current solutions for the problem of evil.
Books for Study: (Relevant Chapters Only)
1. George Galloway, The Philosophy of Religion
2. E.S.Brightman, The Philosophy of Religion
3. W.K. Wright, Students Philosophy of Religion
4. Evelyn Underhill , Mysticism and Philosophy.
5. John Hick, Philosophy of Religion (Ed)
6. Y. MASIH, Introduction to Religious Philosophy
CORE PAPER-X PHILOSOPHY OF KANT - I
1. The Critique of Pure Reason:
Unit – I
The influence of hume and liebnitz on kant – historical background – the problem of kant.
Unit – II
General problem of metaphysics – the transcendental ? Of critical method- copernican revolution.
Unit – III
Apriori knowledge-types of judgment-are there synthetic apriori judgments?-sense and sensibility.
Unit - IV
Space and time as intuition, as metaphysical deduction and as transcendental deduction. Schematism of the categories-the system of all principal-idioms of intuition.
UNIT – V
Anticipation of perceptions, analogies of experience – postulates of empirical thought – phenomena and noumena – the refutation of idealism - transcendental illusion – the paralogisms of pure reason – antinomies of pure reason – the ideal of pure reason
Books for study: (Relevant Chapters Only)
1. H.J. Paton, Kant's Metaphysics of Experience, 2 Vols.
2. S.Korner, Kant (Penguin)
3. Justus Hartnack, Kant's Theory of Knonwledge.
4. A.C.Ewing, A Short Commentary on Kant's Critique of Pure Reason.
5. Abbot (Trl)., Kant's Theory of Ethics.
6. H.B. Acton, Kant's Moral Philosophy.
7. C.D. Broad, Five Types of Ethical Theory (Chapter on Kant)
8. H.J. Paton, The Categorical Imperative (Hutchinson).
9. H.W. Cassirer, A Commentary on Kant's Critique of Judgement, Barnes noble and Methun.
CORE PAPER-XI POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY
1. Greek Political Thought:
City-state - the relation of state and citizen - forms of government - relation of ethics and politics.
Plato: Method of politics - works - theory of state - theory of justice - theory of education - theory of communism- property and family - Republic and laws.
Aristotle: Method of politics - theory of state - justification of slavery - citizenship - on government - best constitution - rule of Law , New art of the states.
2. Origin of State:
The divine right theory - the force theory - the social contract theory - Hobbes, Locke, Rousseau - Historical or evolutionary theory.
3. Machiaveli:
Political background - denial of divine law - denial of natural law - conception of human nature - the prince.
4. Hindu Political Thought:
The Theory of property, Law and Social order. The Theory of state, Rajya, state authority.
5. Political Thought of Thiruvalluvar.
Books for Study: (Relevant Chapters Only);
1. D.R. Bhandari, History of European Political Philosophy.
2. V.D. Mahajan, Recent Political Thought.
3. A.C. Kapoor, Principles of Political Science.
4. G.H. Sabine, A History of Political Theory.
5. Tirukkural (Ed) Madras University Publication
6. M. Venkataraman - A guide to Political Philosophy
CORE PAPER-XII PHILOSOPHY OF SCIENCE
1. Perspectives in Philosophy of Science: Historical (Toulmin and Kuhn) and
Logical Empiricistic Perspectives. Hempell, Rudolf, Carnap.
2. Philosophical aspects of Biology: Organismic Biology - Reductionism. The
relation of physical science to Biology.
3. Space and Time: Idealistic (Kant), Realistic (Samuel Alexander), Relativistic
(Einstein) and anti - intellectualistic (Henri Bergson) theories.
4. Methodological Problems of Social Sciences
5. Cosmologies (Steady state and Big Bang Theories)
Books for Study:
1. Peter Caws, Philosophy of Science
2. Ernest Nagel, The Structure of Science
3. Bernard Baumrin, Philosophy of Science
4. Durbin, Philosophy of Science
5. R.Harre, Philosophy of Science
6. R.Harre,An Introduction to the Logic of Sciences
7. Stephen Toulmin, The Philosophy of Science
8. Thomas Kuhn, The Structure of Scientific Revolution
EXTRA - DISCIPLINARY II PHILOSOPHY OF HUMAN RIGHTS
UNIT – I NATURE OF RIGHTS
- Right – definition
- the rights of man – fundamental rights by nature – five freedoms
- rights and duties
- classification of rights – moral rights, legal rights, civil rights and political rights.
UNIT – II THEORIES OF HUMAN RIGHTS
- Introduction, definition and features of human rights
- the theory of natural rights
- social welfare theory and legal theory
- the concept of liberty, equality, peace and human rights.
UNIT – III UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS
International covenants of human rights
Indian constitutional guarantee on human rights
Fundamental rights. Part iii of the constitution
Directive principles of the state policy part iv of the constitution.
UNIT – IV RIGHTS OF THE EMERGING SECTORS:
Children rights exploitation, labour
Women’s rights – right to inheritance, right to divorce, right to marry, right to education & right to equality.
Minority rights – religious and linguistic rights
UNIT – V ENFORCEMENT OF HUMAN RIGHTS:
Uno amnesty international, asia watch.
National human rights commission
Ngo’s activities and movements.
Ref: 1. Introduction to ethics – william lillie
1. Sivagami paramasivam – human rights a study. Sri ram computer prints and offset, salem, tamil nadu.
Books for study:
1. Patrick Hayden (ed) 2001. The Philosophy of Human Rights, St.Paul, MN,
Paragon House.
2. Rorty, "Human Rights, Rationality and Sentimentality"
3. Harman, "Moral Relativism as a Foundation for Natural Rights"
4. Locke,Second Treatise on Government - Chapter - II
5. Louis Pojman, "Are Human Rights based on Equal Human Worth?"
6. J.Roland Pennocck, "Rights, Natural Rights,and Human Rights? A General View"
7. Michael J.Perry, (August 1997). "Are Human Rights Universal? The Relativist Challenge and Related Matters," Human Rights Quarterly, Vol. 19, 3.
Elective - III Philosophy of Education
Unit – 1
Meaning of Education – Science, Philosophy and Education – Aims of Education- Scope of Philosophy of Education
Unit - 2
Naturalism in Education – Rousseau’s formulations of the principles of Education- Education for different stages-Influence of Rousseau
Unit – 3
Pragmatism in Education – John Dewey’s Philosophy of Education- Process of Instruction and Methods of teaching- Aims of Education and organization of curriculum-Discipline and interest-Dewey’s influence on modern Education.
Unit – 4
Psychological Tendencies in Education – Pestalozzi’s Educational Principles-contribution of Pestalozzi – John Frederick Herbart’s Psychology of Education – Doctrine of interest – need for instruction – curriculum and correlation – method of instruction – Process of instruction.
Unit – 5
Philosophies of Education – Rabindranath Tagore, Mahatma Gandhi and Swami Vivekananda.
Books for Study:
1. R.P. Sharma, Educational Theories and Modern Trends
2. K.K. Bhatia and C.L. Narang, Philosophical and Sociological Formulations of Education
3. S.K. Murthy, Philosophical and Sociological Foundations of Education
4. John S. Brubucher, Modern Philosophies of Education
5. B. Guha, An Introduction to Philosophy of Education.
FOURTH SEMESTER
CORE PAPER-XIII - PHILOSOPHY OF MANAGEMENT
Unit - 1
Nature and scope of
(A) philosophy management
(c) philosophy of management
Unit - 2
Managerial effectiveness: a model based on indian ethics
Wisdom worker
The psycho-philosophical model
The sadhana for a wisdom worker
The concept of self in indian psycho-philosophy.
UNIT – 3
Self – management
Be satisfied with yourself
Do your work with full concentration without any anxiety for results.
Develop an appropriate mental attitude in you.
Needs and desires – existence, knowledge and happiness.
UNIT - 4
Leadership – skills
Communication skills
Decision – making skills
Conceptual skills
UNIT – 5
Art of living
The fundamental problem in life
Selection of the problem
The purpose of life
Macro vision
Books for Study: (Relevant Chapters only)
1. S.k. chakraborty, managerial effectiveness and quality of work life: indian insights
2. G.d. sharma, management and the indian ethos
3. Christopher hodgkinson, the philosophy of leadership
4. Nalini v. Devi, vedanta and management
PAPER-XIV SAIVA SIDDHANTA
1. History:
(A) Traces of Saivism in the Rig Veda, the Yajur Veda and the Atharva Veda. The
ideas of Rudra-Pasupti and Stamba worship.
2. Development of Siddhantic thought:
(A) The Upanishads, especially the Svetasvatara.
(B) Traces of Saivite thought in the Tolkappiyam and Sangam literature .
(C) Devotional literature of the Samayacharyas and Nayanmars.
(D) Philosophical literature of the Santanacharyas.
(E) Systematization of worship in the Agamas.
3. Theory of Knowledge:
Pramanas - Sense - Perception. Reasoning and Authority para and apara vidyas .
Theories of truth and error. (Prama and Bhrama)
4. Metaphysics:
The three ultimate Realities : Pati, Pasu and Pasa Satkarya vada. The idea of
causation.
(A) Nature of Pati-Criticism or Nirguna vada . Divine motherhood and the redemptive
principle of grace - Criticism of the doctrine of Avatara, Form, Formless and
Linga concepts - Pancha kritya - Nataraja dance.
(B) Nature of Pasu-Saiva Siddhanta Psychology - Plurality of souls - characteristics of
the soul and its relation to God - soul as sadasat - classification of souls -avasthas.
(C) Nature of Pasa - The three - fold character- anava, maya and karma - the thirty six
tattvas and their relation to the soul.
5. Ethics and Religion :
(A) The highest purushartha : Mukti or redemption.
(B) Means of attaining salvation (carya, kriya, yoga, jnana and diksha)
(C) Five lettered mantra - Significance.
Books for Study :
1. Suryanarayana Sastri: Article in Cultural Heritage of India
2. Nilakanta Sastri: Article in the Cultural Heritage of India Volume.
3. V. Paranjoti: Saiva Siddhanta.
4. John Piet: A Logical Presentation of Saiva Siddhanta.
5. C.V. Narayana Iyer: Origin and Early History of Saivism in South India
6. Article in A History of Philosophy - Eastern and Western.
7. V.A. Devasenapathi: Saiva Siddhanta, University of Madras.
Core Paper XV Philosophy of Kant - II
Critique of Practical Reason
UNIT- I
Analytic and Dialectic – three formulations of moral principles: (1) as a categorical imperative (2) as a principle of human dignity and (3) as a principle of self legislation
UNIT – II
Hypothetical and categorical imperative – motive and consequences – “person” and “thing”
UNIT – III
Formalism – regorism and stringency of Kantian ethics
UNIT IV
The postulates of morality – freedom of the will, immortality of the soul and existence of God – alleged inconsistency and insufficiency of the postulates
UNIT – V
Critique of Judgement
Analytic of beautiful – Analytic of Sublime – Analytic of Teleological judgement
Book for study:
Abbot (Trans.) Kant’s Theory of Ethics
H. B. Acton, Kant’s Moral Philosophy
C.D. Broad, Five types of ethical theory
H.J. Paton, The Categorical Imperative
H.W Caassier, A Commentary of Kant’s Critique of Judgements
CORE PAPER XVI INDIAN CULTURE
Unit – 1
Culture
Meaning and Scope – Culture and Civilization-General Characteristic – Features of
Indian Culture – Geographical Impact of Indian Culture, Indus Valley Culture
Unit – 2
Culture in Sangam Age and Post-Sangam Age
Sangam Literature – Society-Political and Economical Conditions-Trade-Religion
and Fine Arts
Unit – 3
Pallavas’ Contribution to Indian Culture
Origin-Pallavas Administration-Society-Economic and Religious Conditions-Art
and Architecture-Literature and Education.
Unit – 4
Cholas’ Contribution to Indian Culture
Chola Polity-Local Administration-Election Method-Social and Economic
Conditions-Religion-Silver Age of the Cholas-Literature and Fine Arts.
Unit – 5
Cheran and Pandiyan Contributions to Indian Culture:
Administration-Society-Social & Economic Condition-Religion-Fine Arts
Prescribed books:
1. N. Subramaniyam, History of TamilNadu
2. B.N. Lunia, Evolution of Indian Culture
Books for Reference:
1. Subrate K. Misra, Culture and Rationality
2. R.N. Saletore, Encyclopedia of Indian Culture
3. K.A. Nilakanda Sastri, A History of South India
4. S.K. Aiyangar, The Contribution of South India of Indian Culture
5. Charles A Moore, Philosophy and Culture
ELECTIVE PAPER IV INDUSTRIAL PSYCHOLOGY
Unit – 1
Introduction
Definition-Nature-Scope-Problems in Organizational Psychology
Unit – 2
Personnel Psychology
Employee Selection-Interview-observation-Training and Development in Organization.
Unit – 3
Organizational Psychology
Leadership-Motivation-Job Satisfaction-organizational Structure.
Unit – 4
The work place
Conditions of Work-Employee safety and health-Stress in work place.
Unit – 5
Engineering Psychology
Introduction-Time and Motion Analysis-Man Machine Problem-Computers-Industrial Robots.
Prescribed Book:
Duane P. Schutz, Sydney Ellen Schultz, Psychology and Industry Today
Books for study:
1. P.K. Ghosh, M.B. Ghorpade, Industrial Psychology.
2. Thomas W, I larrel, Industrial Psychology
3. M.K. Blum and J.C. Naylor, Industrial Psychology – it’s theoretical and Social foundations.
14. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN POLITICAL SCIENCE
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
CORE 9 - ISSUES IN INDIAN POLITICAL THOUGHT
Unit I
Nature and context of Modern Political Thought in India --Origins of various Social Reform Movements in India, Arya Samaj, Brahma Samaj- Colonialism, Caste, Order and
Politics and Religion
Unit II
Nationalism- Spiritual Nationalism (Aurobindo) Vivekannada, Militant Nationalism – Extremism—Balagangadhar Tilak--- Revolutionary Nationalism
Liberalism- Gokhale- Constitutionalism Democracy --Dr. B.R.Ambedkar
Unit III
Socialism – Democratic Socialism ---Radical Humanism: Rammanohar Lohia, Jawaharlal Nehru, M. N. Roy
Social revolution – Social Change – Secularism: Jyotirao Phuley, E.V. Ramasamy Naicker, B.R.Ambedkar
Unit IV
Gandhism – Truth and non-violence – Satyagraha – Swaraj – Trusteeship
Unit V
Sarvodaya, Total Revolution: Vinoba Bhave, Jayaprakash Narayan
Reference:
Mehta V.R. & Thomas Pantham (eds) Political Thought Ideas in Modern India: Thematic Explorations, New Delhi, Sage 2006
Rodriguez, V (ed) The essential writings of B.R.Ambedkar, New Delhi OUP 2002
Parikh, Bhikhu, Gandhi’s Political Philosophy New Delhi, Ajanta, 1995
V.R.Mehta, Indian Political Thought New Delhi, Manohar 1996
CORE 10 - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Unit – I Philosophical Foundations
Applied Philosophy – Epistemology – Metaphysics – Logic, Ethics and Aesthetics – Philosophy of Science – Philosophy of Social Sciences – Social Science Research – Quantitative studies, Qualitative studies and Interpretive studies.
Unit – II Research Problem
Classification of Quantitative studies Formulation of the research Problem- Review of Literature – Research Design – Hypothesis – Null Hypothesis – Observation Comparative Studies Cross sectional and Longitudinal – Theoretical framework.
Unit – III Data Collections
Secondary Sources – Print Sources – Non – Print Sources – Online and Internet Resources – Archival Research – Databases and Abstracts, Primary Sources, Interviews, Questionnaire, Field studies, Participative Methods – Errors in data collection
Unit – IV Data Analysis
Processing of data, Analysis of data, Descriptive Statistics and Probabilistic Statistics, Data Processing and SPSS
Unit – V Presentation of Research Output
Writing the Report: a) for awarding Diplomas/Degrees/Certificates – Reporting for Mass Media – Reporting for Peer view (Workshop, Seminar, Symposium, Conference, Colloquium) – CAD and Multimedia – Power Point Presentation. Presentation of the Report Language and style – Footnotes, Endnotes, Bibliography
Plagiarism and its consequences
Reference:
Kothari, C.R. Research Methodology: Methods and Techniques New Delhi: Vikas, 2004.
CORE 11 - HUMAN RIGHTS
Unit – I Introduction
Concept, meaning, nature of Human Rights – classifications of human rights – approaches to human rights – Thesis of human rights – human rights and duties
Unit – II Development of Human Rights
UN Charter and human rights – Universal Declaration of Human Rights – International government – International instruments – conventions – conferences & protocol – UN Commission for Human Rights
Unit – III Human Rights in India
Indian Constitution & Human Rights – National Commission on Human Rights – National Human Rights Commission – State Human Rights Commission – National Commission or minorities, SC/ST & women
Unit –IV Issues in Human Rights
Violation of Women’s rights – Violation of child rights – Bonder labour – injustice against marginalised and Dalits – problems of refugees and displaced persons – Tortures
Unit – V Promotion of Human Rights
Role of Police – Administration & Intervention – Human right Courts – Role of NGOs– Role of Media
Reference:
1. S. Subramanian, Human Rights: International challenges, Manas, Delhi.
2. V.R. Krishna Iyer, Dialectics & Dynamics of Human Rights, Eastern Law House
3. C.J. Nirmal(Ed) Human Rights in India, Oxford University, New Delhi
4. Ibohol Singh, Human Rights in India – Constitutional & Legal provisions,
vibher law
5. Vinod Sharma, Human Rights Violation, APH publisher, New Delhi
6. Ram Ahuja, Social Problems in India, Rautav publisher, New Delhi
7. Upendra Daxi, future of Human Rights in India, Oxford University publisher
ELECTIVE - 3
URBAN AND RURAL GOVERNMENTS IN INDIA
Unit – I
History of Local Government in India – Community Development Programme – Balwantrai Mehta committee Report
Unit – II
Recent developments in the Panchayat Raj System – G.V.K. Rao Committee – L.M. Singhvi committee – P.K. Thungan committee – Panchayat Raj under Rajiv Gandhi – 73rd Constitutional Amendment Act (Role and functions of Rural Local Government)
Unit – III
Emerging Trends of urbanization in India – the 74th Constitutional Amendment Act and Urban Government – Municipal Corporation – Municipal Council – Cantonment Board – Township – Town Planning.
Unit – IV
Personnel Administration in Rural Local Government – Personnel Administration in Urban Government – Finances of Rural Local Government – Finances of Urban Government.
Unit – V
Role of women in local government administration – Role of political parties and elections in rural-urban government – Right to Information and transparency in rural-urban governments.
Reference:
1. Maheswari S.R. – Local Government in India, Lakshmi Narain Agarwal, Agra, 2006.
2. Joshi R.P. and Narwani G.S. Panchayat Raj in India, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2005.
ELECTIVE -4
GLOBALISATION AND POLITICAL DEVELOPMENT
Unit – I
Implications of globalization for state power, security, culture and governance. Diffusion of globalization and its causes
Unit II
Actors and agenda --- Role of ideas, interests and institutions in the adjustment to globalization -- Political movements, issues of governance -- Creation of new multilateral institutions like WTO
Unit III
Nature of economic strategy in India that preceded globalization -- spread of neo – liberal economic orthodoxy-- The shift to economic liberalization and stimulus for it -- Nature and development of globalization and India’s experience with it --- Impact on India’s economy, society and polity
Unit IV
Contesting globalization: anti- globalization movements, challenges, responses and risks of globalization, Strategies, politics and ideas that shape and constrain globalization conflicts and the consequences of globalization
Unit V
The future of democracy, Transformation of state sovereignty -- Future role of states and inter governmental organizations and the evolution of non – territorial forms of nationalism, nature and evolution of the ideas of sovereignty, New forms of global governance
Reference:
Nayar, Baldev Raj (ed): Globalization and Politics in India, Delhi, 2007.
Lane, Jan – Erick: Globalization and Politics, Ashgate, 2006
IV SEMESTER
CORE 12 -CONTEMPORARY POLITICAL THINKERS
Unit I:
Introductory survey of contemporary analytic, normative and critical political theory with a focus on Marxism, communitarianism, Feminism, Liberal equality and Green Political Theory.
Unit II:
Gramsci’s political themes such as hegemony, the distinction between political society and civil society and historic block and his influence on the left thinking
Unit III:
Hannah Arendt’s thoughts on totalitatarianism, Revolution and Human condition
Unit IV:
John Rawls’s Perspectives on Justice and political liberalism
Unit V:
Habermas’s development of the concept and theory of communicative reason, his defence of modernity and civil society
Books for reading:
1. Kymlica, W Contemporary Political Philosophy: An Introduction
2. Parikh Bhikhu, 1982, Contemporary Political Thinkers, Oxford, Martin
Robertson Political Thought, Cambridge University Press
3. Benewick Robert and Philip Green (ed.), 1998, The Rutledge Dictionary
of Twentieth-Century Political Thinkers, London, rout ledge
4. Ball Terence and Richard Bellamy (ed.), 2003, The Cambridge History of Twentieth Century
5. Adams Ian and R.W.Dyson,2004, Fifty Great Political Thinkers, London, Rout ledge
6. Trivey Leonard and Anthony Wright ,1992, Political Thought Since 1945, Aldershot, Edward Elgar
CORE 13 - STATE POLITICS IN INDIA
Unit I
Significance of the study of state politics --- Diversity and complexity of politics in Indian states -- Salient features of state politics ---- Socio-economic determinants of state politics –emerging trends in state politics
Unit II
Leadership in states – Elections in Indian states and Coalition and Minority governments in states
Unit III
Impact of national politics on state politics – Growth if regional political parties and their linkages with national parties and the federal setup, Issues of autonomy and decentralization -- Identity Politics in states
Unit IV
Caste and politics – Religion, politics and violence –communal violence
Unit V
Economic Reforms and India’s economic future--- The politics of ongoing economic transformation --- Welfarism and Development debates- Relations of the state government with local governments
Books Recommended for Study
B. Arora and D. V. Verney (eds.) Multiple identities in a single state, Indian Federalism in a Comparative Perspective, Delhi. Konark, 1995.
G. Austin, Working a Democratic Constitution: The Indian Experience, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 2000
M. Chandda Ethnicity, Security and Separatism in India, Delhi, Oxford University Press, 1997.
P. Chatterjee (ed.) State and Politics in India, Delhi, Oxford University, Press 1997.
R. Chatterjee (ed.) Politics in India: The State - Society Interface, New Delhi, South Asian Publishers, 2001.
Z. Hasan, Politics and State in India, New Delhi, sage, 2000.
A. Kohli, Democracy and Discontent: India's Growing crisis of Govern ability, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 1991.
......., (ed.) the success of Indian democracy, Cambridge, Cambridge University Press, 2001.
S. Pai, State Politics: New dimensions: party system, Liberalization and politics of Identity, Delhi, 2000.
L. Saez, Federalism without a Center: The impact of political and economic reform on Indian system, New Delhi, sage 2002
CORE 14 – PROJECT
ELECTIVE-5
TRADITIONAL AND NON-TRADITIONAL SECURITY
Unit I
Actors- Role of the states -How the threats affect inter state relations—Security threats to society –Kinds and historical developments
Unit II
Non – traditional threats:
Human security: “Freedom from want”(Economic) “Freedom from fear” (Political and Human rights) from state to individual as a unit
Unit III
Environment: degradation, struggle for resources (Energy, Water), Migration and human trafficking organized crime, Epidemics, Natural Disasters
Unit IV
Linkage to traditional security, Non state actors (organized crime and NGOs), Interplay of traditional and non – traditional security threats
Unit V
Barry Burzan and Amartya Sen’s Perspectives on Human Security
References:
1. Farah Faizal and Swarna Rajagopalan (editors)Women, Security, South Asia - A
Clearing in the Thicket, Sage Publications, 2005
2. Sen, Amarthya K, Development as Freedom Oxford London ,1999
3. Graham and N. Poku: Migration, Globalisation and Human Security, London,
Routledge, 2000
4. Burzan Barry, Old Weaven and Japp de Wilde Security: A New Frame Work for
Analysis, Boulder: Lynee Reinner, 1997
15. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
SYLLABUS
THIRD SMESTER
CORE 9 - HUMAN RIGHTS IN INDIA
Unit – I- Introduction
Origin, nature and scope of Human Rights – Theories of human Rights – Classification of Human Rights – Human Rights and Duties.
Unit- II- Indian Constitution and Human Rights
Preamble – Fundamental Rights – Constitutional Remedies of Human Rights
Violation- Directive Principles of State Policy
Unit-III-Administration of Human Rights
United Nations Charter and Human Rights – Universal Declaration of Human
Rights (UDHR)-National Commission on Human Rights – State Human Rights
Commission- Human Rights Courts
Unit- IV- Issues in Human Rights
Right to Dissent –Communal Violence in India- Violation of Women’s Rights -
Violation of Child Rights – Female Infanticide- Refugees and Displaced Persons -
Bonded Labour – Under trials and Presence – Suspension of Human Rights
during. Emergency – (UNHCR)
Unit- V-Promotion of Human Rights
Human Rights and Media- Human Rights and Voluntary Organizations in India
-Promotion of Human Rights – Challenges of Human Rights – Human Rights
and Global Perspectives-Human Rights in New era.
Reference:
1. Dr.S.Mehartaj Begum, (2000) Human Rights in India- Issues and Perspective, APH Publishing Corporation , New Delhi.
2. P.L.Mehta and Neena Verma, (1999) Human Rights Under Indian Consitution, Deep & Deep Publications, New Delhi.
3. Vinod Sharma, (2002) Human Rights Violation – A Global Phenomenon, APH
Publication, New Delhi.
4. Dr. (Mrs.) Sivagami Paramasivam,(1998) Human Rights – A Study, Sriram Computer Prints and Offset, Salem (Tamil Nadu)
CORE 10 - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
Unit – I
Scientific Research – Aims, Characteristics; Types and Methods of Scientific research – Aims of social research.
Unit – II
Concept, Constructs, Variables, Hypothesis – Types, functions
Unit – III
Research design – Selection of research topic – characteristics of good research design – sampling
Unit – IV
Techniques of data collection – Questionnaire interview, schedule, observation, case study, content analysis.
Unit – V
Data processing and Analysis – Report writing – Comparison of mean, median, mode.
Reference:
1. Good and Hatt, Social Science Research Methods
2. Johnson and Joslyn – Research methods in Political Science
3. Kothari Research Methodology
4. Wilkinson and Bhandarkar – Methodology and Techniques of Social research
Himalaya Publishing co, New Delhi, 1993.
CORE 11- GENDER AND PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION
Unit I
Status, Power, Leadership, Legitimacy and Change-
Gender inequalities in earnings and employment,
Unit II
Policies toward families, Gender and development, Gender based analysis, Glass Ceiling
Unit III
Strategies that have influenced policies, Women’s historical progress as public employees.
Unit IV
Status of women employees in federal, State and local governments, Leadership
Unit V
Gender responsive budgeting- Mainstreaming Gender in organizations and budgeting
Reference:
Gender Images in Public Administration Strivers, Camilla Policy, Sage, Politics 2002 and Gender Staudt, Kathleen, Kumarian Press, 1998.
CORE 12 - INTERNATIONAL ORGANISATION AND ADMINISTRATION
Unit I
Global Governance and Institutions in a changing world - Promises of international institutions
Unit II
Theories of international organizations: Realist, Power based theories, Liberal institutional theories, and Organizational theories
Unit III
Pathologies of International Organisations- Non-State actors in Global governance
Unit IV
Global Financial Institutions – IMF, World Bank; Regional and Multilateral Trade Institutions- WTO
Unit V
International Environmental Institutions- Environmental Regulations and issues and problems
Reference:
Margaret Karns and Karen Mingst.2004. International Organizations: The Politics and Process of Global Governance. Boulder: Lynne Reinner Publishers. ISBN: 1555879632
Lisa Martin and Beth Simmons .2001.International Institutions: An International Organization Reader. Cambridge: MIT Press. ISBN: 0262632233.
ELECTIVE -3
URBAN MANAGEMENT IN INDIA
Unit I
Urbanization Trends and Development-- Planning and Management of cities: Role of Government
Unit II
Basic Services: Nutrition, Health, Education, Water/ Sanitation, Housing
Unit III
Role of markets in financing cities; cities and the new economy,
Land ceiling Act, Development authorities. Rent controls, Housing Boards, Pollution and Waste Management
Unit IV
Urban Poverty: - Issues and approaches, Management of urban services- Raising finances for urban local bodies
Unit V
Urban water management – urban environmental management - Community participation in management
Reference:
1. S.L.Goel, Urban development and Management, Manohar
2. Kulwant Singh and Steinberg, Florian, Urban India in Crisis , New Age International New Delhi, 1996.
FOURTH SEMESTER
CORE 13 - POLICE ADMINISTRATION
Unit – I
Nature, scope and importance of police administration – Evolution of police administration – Approaches to police administration
Unit – II
Central police system – Armed, unarmed and auxiliary in police administration – Role of Home ministry in police administration – state police system – District police – police in union territories – women police
Unit – III
Police Recruitment – Training – promotion and Retirement – pay and compensation – Job enrichment – Autonomy and Accountability in police administration
Unit – IV
Police ethics and code of conduct (violence and cultural corruption) – police reforms
Unit – V
Police and Judiciary – police and mass media – police and terrorism and insurgency – police and Juvenile delinquency – police and economic crimes – police and information technology
Refernce:
1. Aparna, S, Role of police in a changing society, APH publications, New Delhi, 1999.
2. Ghosh S.K. and Rustamju K.F. Encyclopedia of police in India. Vol I to IV
3. Girija Shah, Indian Police, Cosmo publication, New Delhi, 1986
4. James Vadakkumcheri, police and Delinquency in India, AT.H Publications, New Delhi, 1996.
5. Mohan Rao, Police Personnel Management, Anmol publications, New Delhi
6. Srivatsav, Indian Police Law and Reality, Manas publications, New Delhi, 1997.
7. Ramakkant, Police Administration, Amson publications, New Delhi, 1990.
CORE 14- NEW PUBLIC MANAGEMENT AND GOVERNANCE
Unit I
Core themes and features of New Public Management --- Managerialism -- Is Managerialism ideological? How has Managerialism affected the public sector --- Inherent tensions of New Public Management --- Difference between `new' Public Management and `old' Public Administration
Unit II
Strategic management in public sector --- Barriers for effective strategic management -- scope of competition and markets --- Introduction of competition in Public services --- changes marketing brought to public sector – how far markets replaced hierarchies
Unit III
Performance indicators and Performance Measurement --Management in public sector organizations --- Performance Evaluation—Quality management in public sector-
What are performance indicators and measures? Why measure and evaluate performance? Limitations of performance evaluation
Unit IV
Reasons for contractualisation -- contracting mechanisms --- Long term and short term contracts---- Variety of roles of government in contracting regimes
Unit V
Governance and Government – Networking with stakeholders and engaging with citizens and stakeholders
Reference:
Hughes, O.E., Public Management and Administration, Macmillan, London,. 1998
Lane, Jan-Erik New Public Management, Rout ledge, London, 2000
Bovaird, Tony and Loffler, Elke (eds) Public Management and Governance, Rout ledge, London, 2003
PROJECT
ELECTIVE- 4
ISSUES OF DISINVESTMENT AND PUBLIC SECTOR UNDERTAKINGS IN INDIA
Unit I
Public Enterprises in India: Its Importance and Development in Indian Economy ---Concept of Public Enterprises - Genesis and Growth of PEs --Development of PEs During Plan Period - Government Policy on PEs - Rationale and Importance of PEs in India
Unit II
Public Enterprises at the state level : Kinds of Public Enterprises that emerged, Types of Public Enterprises organizations – Working of Public Enterprises – Efficacy of Public Enterprises
Unit III
Human Resource Management in PEs- Recruitment- Training- Compensation- State level Public Enterprises
Unit IV
Economic development, Financial performance of public Enterprises; Accountability issues, Parliamentary control over public enterprises in India,
Unit V
The effects of ownership and competition on efficiency; Liberalisation and Privatisation, Rationale and methods of Privatisation- Disinvestment in India, Policy, Procedure, proceeds, performance of disinveted public enterprises in India
Reference:
1. Naib, Sudhir, Disinvetment in India, Sage, 2004
2. Yadav, B.S. & Aggarwal, Poonam, Disinvestment of Public Sector Enterprises in India, Eastern, Delhi, 2006
3. Mathur, Vibha Disinvestment of Public Sector Enterprises in India: Policies and Challenges, New Century Publications, 2004
4. Health, John Public Enterprise at the crossword.Essays in Honour of V.V. Ramanatham, Routledge, 1990, London
16. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN PUBLIC RELATIONS
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
Core 9 - Communication Research Methods
Unit 1: Fundamentals of Social Research
Knowledge, Paradigms, role of theory in research
Unit 2: Varieties of Research Designs-
Survey, Experimental, Textual methods-Applications (e.g. Opinion Polls)
Unit 3: Social Measurement
Guidelines for Questionnaire Design
Unit 4: Basic Statistical Techniques
Application of statistical models for social research
Unit 5: Data Analysis
Strategies for Data Analysis and Interpretation-Data Presentation Graphs
References
Communication Research: Strategies and Sources Rebecca B. Rubin (Author), Alan M. Rubin (Author), Linda J. Piele (Author)
Core 10 - Media Skills II: PR Writing(Practical)
Unit 1: Theoretical Influences- Leal, Ethical, Cultural Influences on Writing
Unit 2: Message Design, Audience Analysis, Background Research
Unit 3: PR Writing-Forms, Structure and Style, Flow-different media
Unit 4: Features, Newsletters, Annual Reports, Press Releases
Unit 5: PR Writing Exercises-Drills
Core 11 - Corporate Communication
Unit 1: Fundamentals of Corporate Communication (CC),
Functions of corporate communication, Leadership
Unit 2: Tools and Techniques
Guidelines for Corporate Communication (Annual Reports), Audit, Image Audit
Unit 3: Corporate Communication a
Role of Human Resource Management in PR
Unit 4: Crisis Communication-
Stages and Process-Reputation Management
Unit 5: Investor-Mergers, Acquisitions-CC
References
Treadwell,Donald and Tredwell, Jill (2005).Public Relations Writing. Sage Pubication
Elective- 5
Entertainment & Society
Unit 1: Entertainment Definition-
Characteristics of Mass Mediated Entertainment
Unit 2: Perspectives on Entertainment
Pleasure Principle, Narrative Theory, Dramatic Theory
Unit 3: Understanding Entertainment Audiences-
Audience analysis, choices and characteristics
Unit 4: Media Effects
Cultivation/Cultural Effects), News as Entertainment
Unit 5: Business of Entertainment
Markets, Trends, Regulations, Interactive Media
References
Sayre,Shay and King, Cynthia (2003) Entertainment and Society. Audiences, Trends, and Impacts. Sage Publication
Elective- 6
Community Relations
Unit 1: Role of Public Relations in Community Developments
Definitiions and Functions of Community Relations and Community development
Unit 2: Corporate Social Responsibility,
Need for CSR. Difference between CSR and Cause Related Marketing, Cases studies
Unit 3: Public Relations in Non-government Organizations
PR& NGOs-Media Advocacy, Fund Raising and Media Relations
Unit 4: Strategies for Community Relation building
Participatory Approaches, Community Involvement, Tools and Techniques
Unit 5: Media Advocacy-Case Studies (E.g Health Campaign)
Case Studies of NGO-Relations-Health Communication and Awarness Campaigns
References
Kumar, Smessh (2002) Methods of Community Participation.A Complete Guide to Practioners Vistaar Publication
Mikkelsen, Birtha(1995).Methods for Development Work and Research.A Guide for Practioners.Sage Publicatiuon
Soft Skills
Internship
FOURTH SEMESTER
Core 12- Media Planning and Budgeting
Unit 1: Scope of Media Planning
Marketing Strategy and Media Planning
Unit 2: Steps in Media planning-
Relationship between media, advertising and consumers
Unit 3: Basic Measurement
Media Planning Metrices-Audience Measurement (Frequency Reach, share etc.)
Unit 4: Strategic Media Planning
Principles and Practices of Strategic media planning in a competitive, multimedia enviornment
Unit 5: Case Studies and Exercises
Evaluation, Analysis of Media Data, Campaign Development
References
Sisdors and Bumba. Advertising Media Planning (1995). NTC Business Books
Core 13- Advanced Public Relations
Unit 1: PR Organization,
Department, Client-Relationship- PR Business Enviornment
Unit 2: Human Resource Management
PR-Labor Relations-Public and Pivate Sector parternerships
Unit 3: Crisis Communication-Case Studies
Stages of Crisis and Role ofCommunication-Issues in Crisis Communicaiton
Unit 4: New Media
Online media as a public relations tool-Applications and Assessments
Unit 5: Media Advocacy-Ethical Issues-PR and Society
Internal Research, Social Issues Integration, international PR
References
Moss and DeSanto (2002).Public Relations Cases. International Perspective. Routledge
Core 14 - Research Project Work
Core 15 - Media Skills III: Event Management/ PR Campaign (Practical)
Unit 1: Elements of Public Relations Campaign
Unit 2: Steps and Process of Event Management
Unit 3: Organizing, Scheduling, Operational Issues
Unit 4: Media Relations (Press Conferences)
Unit 5: Evaluation of the Campaign
Specialization (Practical)
Elective – 7
Media Management &Economics
Unit 1: Media Management Context and Media Organizations
Media Business in India. Issues, Trends and Challenges
Unit 2: Media Market Analysis
Media Market Analysis-Readership and Audience Segmentation
Unit 3: Marketing
Strategies for Media Selling, Media Planning
Unit 4: Cost Structure and Revenue Models
Economics of Media-Newspapers, TV. Industrial Organizational Model
Unit 5: Cases and Exercises
Case Studies in Media Management
References
Lavine, John M and Daniel B. Wackman. (1988) Managing Media Organizations: Effective Leadership of the Media. Longman. New York
Kothari Gulab, Newspaper Management In India. (Intercultural Open University, The Netherland's,1995)
Soft Skills
17. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN SANSKRIT
SYLLABUS
Paper XI – Grammar – I
Text Prescribed: (i) Madhya Siddhanta Kaumudi – Samjna, Sandhi,
Karaka, Ajanta Pullinga
Unit I - Samjna
Unit II - Ac sandhi- visarga Sandhi
Unit III - Hal Sandhi
Unit IV - Karaka
Unit V - Ajanta Pullinga
Paper XII – Introduction to Darsanas –II
Text Prescribed : Yogasutra of Patanjali; Adhyaya 1
Unit I - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 1 to 6
Unit II - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 7 to 20
Unit III - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 21 to 32
Unit IV - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 33 to 42
Unit V - Yoga Sutra Adhy. 1. Sutra 43 to the end.
PaperXIII - Campu
Text Prescribed : Visvagunadarsa Campu of Venkatadhvarin. Portion verse26 to 380.
Pub: Chowkhamba Vidyabhavan, Varanasi, 2004.
Unit I -Text – Initial Portion i
Unit II -Text – initial portion ii
Unit III -Text – Middle portion i
Unit IV -Text – Middle portion ii
Unit V -Text – end portion i & ii
Elective I – Special I- Paper I-
See attachment
Elective II Special II- Paper I
See attachment
FOURTH SEMESTER
Paper XIV – Grammar - II
Text Prescribed : (i) Madhya Siddhanta Kaumudi – bhu, edh,
lakarartha, krt (Krtya), taddhita (Saisika & Svarthika), samasa up to the end of Dvandva
Unit I - bhu, edh & lakarartha
Unit II - krt,
Unit III - taddhita
Unit IV - samasa- Avyayi Bhava , Tatpurusha
Unit V - Bahuvrihi - Dvanta
Elective V – Modern literature in Sanskrit
Text : Anarkali by Dr.V.Raghavan Acts – I to V
Unit I - Intrduction to Morden literature
Unit II - Acts 1 &2
Unit III - Act 3
Unit IV - Act 4
Unit V - Act 5
Paper XV – Indian Logic
Text : Tarka Sangraha Dipika by Annam Bhatta
Unit I - Introduction
Unit II - up to buddhi Section.
Unit III - Pratyaksha
Unit IV - Anumana Section
Unit V - from upamana to the end.
Elective 3 – Special I- Paper II-
See attachment
Elective 4 - Special II- Paper II
See attachment
Extra Disciplinary : Paper II Indian Philosophical classics
Text : Gouda pada Karika Prakarana One and two
Unit I : Introduction
Unit II : first Adyaya first half
Unit III First Adhyaya second half
Unit IV: Second Adhyaya First half
Unit V : Second Adhyaya Second Half
Special Papers Attachement
1. Vedanta
Paper I (3 Credits) :
Prescribed Text : Vedanta Paribhasa of Dharmaraja Adhvarin
Paper II (3 Credits):
Prescribed Text : (1) Yatindramatadipika of Srinivasadasa
(2) Pramanalakshna and Mayavadakhandana of
Anandatirtha
2. Alamkara
Paper I :
Prescribed Text : Dhvanyaloka (Adhys. 1, 2& 4 only)
Paper II:
Prescribed Text : Rasagangadhara First anana up to end of Santarasa
discussion
3. Vyakarana
Paper I (3 Credits) :
Prescribed Text : Siddhanta Kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita
(Samjna, Paribhasa, Sandhi & Karaka only)
Paper II (3 Credits):
Prescribed Text : Mahabhasya of Patanjali (Ahnika 1-3)
4. Nyaya
Paper I (3 Credits) :
Prescribed Text : Nyayabhasya of Vatsyayana, Ch. 1 and 2
Paper II (3 Credits):
Prescribed Text : Siddhanta Muktavali of Visvanathanyayapancanana
(Pratyaksha and Anumana Only)
18. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN SOCIOLOGY
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
CORE 9 - RURAL SOCIOLOGY
Unit – I Introduction
• Characteristics of Agrarian and Peasant Society
• Habitat and Settlement in Rural Society
• Caste and Religion in Rural Society
• Family in Society
Unit –II: Agrarian Structure and Change
• Socio-Economic inequality
• Land reforms and social change
• Green revolution and social change
Unit-III: Planned Change for Rural Society
• Panchayati Raj and Local Self Government
• Community Development Programmes
• Rural Development Strategies
Unit – IV: Agrarian Movement
• Peasant Movements: Causes and Structure
• Farmer’s Associations
• Agricultural Labourers Associations
Unit – V: Problems of Rural Society
• Landless Labourers
• Rural Poverty and Rural Indebtedness
• Problem of Rural Industries and Rural Marketing
• Impact of CATT & WTO
References
1. Berch, Berberoguse, (1992) Class, State and Development in India 1,2,3 and 4
Chapters, Sage, New Delhi
2. Desai A.R., (19970, Rural Sociology in India, Popular Prakashan, Bombay
3. Mencher J.P., (1983), Social Anthropology of Peasantry Part III, OUP
4. P.Radhakrishnan, (1989), Peasant Struggles : Land Reforms and Social Change in
Malabar 1836-1982, Sage Publications, New Delhi
5. Thoner Daniel and Thoner Alice, (1962) Land and Labour in India, Asia Publications,
Bombay
6. Dhanagare D.N., (1988), Peasant Movement in India, OUP, New Delhi
CORE 10 - SOCIOLOGY OF ORGANIZATION
Unit I Understanding organization
• Scope and purpose of organisation
• Forms of organsations- Formal, Informal, Tall and Flat organisations
• The emergence of large scale organizations
Unit II Theories and models of organisation
• Classical theory
• Resource dependency theory
• Institutional theory
• Economic theory
• Theory of Density-Dependent evolution
• Organizational equilibrium theory
• Models of organisation : Mechanistic, The organic and the contingency models
Unit III Dimensions of new organisation
• New economy and new organisation
• Continuity and change at work
• Corporations and culture
• Unit IV Organisational Dynamics
• Change and innovation
• Communication and leadership
• Stress, work and emotion
• Team building
• Identity work
Unit V Organisational analysis
• Methods and levels of organizational analysis
• Organisational development, change and transformation
References:
1. Michael J.Handel. 2003.-The Sociology of organisations -Sage Publications, NewDelhi
2. Paul Thompson and David Mchugh, 2002, –Work organizations -Palgrave, Newyork
3. David Dunkerley, 1972--The study of organisation-Routledge &Kegan Paul Ltd, London
4. Amitai Etzioni-Modern organisation, 1964 -Foundations of modern Sociology series, Prentice Hall, New jersey
5. Michael Armstrong,2005 -Human resource management Practice-Kogan Page, London
6. Organization: Structure. Process and out come- Richard .H.Hall
7. Organisation Theory: Modern, Symbolic and Post modern Perspectives- Mary Jo Hatch, Oxford University Press
****
CORE 11 - INDIAN SOCIAL PROBLEMS
Unit- I: Introduction
The Concept of Social Problem- Characteristics of Social Problems- Causes of Social Problems- Types of Social Problems- Methods of Studying Social Problems
Unit-II: Poverty and Unemployment
The Concept- Incidence and Magnitude- Causes of Rural Poverty- Problem of the Poor and the Pains of Poverty- Strategies for Alleviating Poverty.
Present Features of Unemployment in India- Types- Causes – Consequences.
Unit-III: Child Abuse and Child Labour
Child Population and the Working Children- Concept and Types of Child Abuse - Incidence of Child Abuse- Causes of Child Abuse - Problem of Child Labour.
Unit- IV: Violence against Women
Women’s Harassment- Nature, Extent and Characteristics of Violence Against Women- Violence Against Widows- Victims of Violence- Types of Violence- Motivation in Violence.
Unit-V: Terrorism
The Concept- Characteristics- Objectives- Origin and Development- Perspectives- Mass Support- Support Base – Terrorism in India – Terrorism in other Countries.
References:
✓ Ahuja Ram, Crime against Women, Rawat Publications, Jaipur, 1987.
✓ Attachand, Poverty and Underdevelopment, Gian Publishing House, Delhi, 1987.
✓ Prasad, Population Growth and Child Labour, Kanishka Publishers distributors, New Delhi, 2001.
✓ Bhattacharya, S.K., Social Problems in India, Regency Publications, New Delhi, 1994.
✓ Kattakayam and Vadackumchery, Crime and Society, A.P.H, Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, 1999.
✓ Kohli and Sharma, Poverty Alleviation and Housing Problem, Anmol Publications, Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 1997
✓ Kempe, R.S and Kempe C.H., Child Abuse, Fontana, London, 1978.
****
CORE 12 - SOCIOLOGY OF HEALTH
Unit-I: Introduction
Concept of health- Scope and importance of Sociology of Health. Development of Medical Sociology and Social Medicine in the West and in India. The emerging relationship between medicine and sociology- Dimensions of health.
Unit-II: Sociological Perspectives on Health
The Sick role- Illness as lived experience- social structure, health and disease – social and psychological factors in health and illness- Parsons’role theory and health interaction.
Social context of health: Community health, Relevance of sex education, the contribution of sociology to social policy.
Unit-III: Social Epidemiology
Epidemiological approach to health, Socio-Cultural factors bearing on health in India. Common occupational diseases and prevention of occupational diseases.
Preventive and protective hygienic habits.
Infectious and Physical Deficient Diseases:
A) Tuberculosis, Malaria, B) Heart diseases, diabetes, obesity.
Unit-IV: Health Professionals and Health Care Organizations
Professional qualities of physician- Professionalization of physician. Doctor– Patient relationship- Role of nurse in health care- Hospital as a social organization. Structure and function of a hospital. Medical social service in a hospital.
Unit-V: Health Planning in India
Health policy and five year plans, Health infrastructure in India- National Health programmes. Implementation of Health Programmes and their effectiveness. Role of International Organization- WHO and other UN Agencies.
TEXT BOOKS:
1. Cockerham, William, C. Medical Sociology (Ninth Edition), Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2003.
2. Cockerham, William, C. Readings in Medical Sociology, Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 1997.
3. Park K. Text Book of Preventive and Social Medicine, M/S, Banarsidas Bhanot Publishers, Jabalpur, 2000.
REFERENCES
✓ Anne, Marie Barry and Chris Yuill, Understanding Health- A Sociological Introduction, Sage Publications, New Delhi, 2002.
✓ Blaxter Mildred., Health, Polity Press,Cambridge, UK, 2004.
✓ Bury, Michael and Jonathan Gabe, et. al., The Sociology of Health and Illness- A Reader, Routledge Publication, U.K, 2003.
✓ Conrad, Peter et.at., Handbook of Medical Sociology, Prentice Hall, New Jersey,2000.
✓ DAK T.M. Sociology of Health in India, Kaveri Printers Private Ltd., New Delhi, 1991.
✓ Eugene B. Gallagher and Janardan Subedi, Global Perspectives on Health Care, Prentice Hall, New Jercy, 1995.
✓ Graham Scombler Sociological theory and Medical Sociology, Tavistock Publications: London and New York, 1987.
✓ Kevin White, An Introduction to the Sociology of Health and Illness, Sage Publicatoins, New Delhi, 2002.
✓ Madhu Nagla, Medical Sociology, printwell publishers, Jaipur, 1988.
✓ Rajiv Misra et al., India Health Report, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2003.
****
ELECTIVE II
INDIAN SOCIETY
Unit- I: Approaches to the study of Indian Society
• Indological Approach
• Structural Functional Approach
• Dialectical Approach
• Subaltern Approach
Unit-II: Characteristics of Indian Society
• Caste System: Structure- Changing trends in Caste –Caste Conflicts
• Joint Family System – Characteristics – Changing Scenario
• Village Organization: Physical- Social- Economic – Political Organization
• Social and Cultural Diversity in India
Unit- III: Colonial Context
• Colonial Ethnography and Fragmentary view of Society
• Imperial Gazetteer and Colonial Policy
• Colonial Legacy, Neo-Colonialism
Unit – IV: Postcolonial Context
• Indian Constitution
• Legislative History
• Social Legislation, Social Policy and Social Change
Unit – V: Current Debates
• Contextualisation
• Indigenization
• Text and Context
• Sociology for India
References
✓ Ahuja Ram., Indian Social System, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 2002.
✓ Atal Yogesh, Indian Sociology- from where to where, Rawat Publication, New Delhi, 2003.
✓ Beteille Andre, Caste, Class and Power: Changing Patterns of stratification in a Tanjore Village, University of California Press, USA, 1965.
✓ Chandra Bipan et. al., India After Independence, Viking Penguin India Publication, New Delhi, 1999.
✓ Desouza, P.R. (ed), Contemporary India, Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2000.
✓ Dhenagare D.N., Themes and Perspectives in Indian Sociology, Rawat Publication, Jaipur, 1993.
✓ Dube S.C., Indian Society, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 1996.
✓ Dube S.C, The Indian Village, Routledge Publication, London, 1967.
✓ Dumont Louis., Homo Hierarchicus: The Caste System and its Implications, Vikas Publication, New Delhi, 1970.
✓ Fadia B.L., Indian Government and Politics, Sahitya Bhawan Publications, Agra,2000.
✓ Kashyap C. Subhash, Our Constitution- An Introduction to Indian Constitution and Constitutional Law, National Book Trust, New Delhi, 2004.
✓ Mukherjee D.P., Diversities, People’s Publishing house, Delhi, 1958.
✓ Oommen T.K., and P.N. Mukherjee., (etd) Indian Sociolgy: Reflections and Introspections, popular prakashan, Bombay, 1986.
✓ Singh Y., Indian Sociology: Social Conditioning and Emerging concerns, Vistaar, Delhi, 1986.
✓ Singhi K. Narendra (etd)., Theory and Ideology in Indian Sociology, Rawat Publication, New Delhi, 1996.
✓ Srinivas M.N., India’s Villages, Asia Publishing House, Bombay, 1960.
✓ Vani Prabhakar, Third World Sociology, Dominant Publisher and distributor, New Delhi, 2003.
****
Elective – Extra Disciplinary
HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Unit- I: Introduction: Definition of Human Resource Management- Nature and Scope – Evolution, Role and Status of Human Resource Management in India- Structure and Function- Systems view of HRM- Vital importance of Human Resources in Organizations.
Unit-II: Manpower Planning: Definition- Organization and Practice- Manpower Planning – Techniques- Short- term and long term planning.
Unit-III: Recruitment, Selection & Placement: Definitions, Job Analysis – Description- Job Specification- Selection process- Tests and Interviews- Placement and Induction.
Unit-IV: Performance Appraisal: Definition – Purpose – Factors affecting Performance Appraisal- Methods and Systems of Performance Appraisal – Counselling.
Unit-V: Training and Development: Definition- Need and importance- Assessment of Training Needs- Training and Development of various categories of personnel.
Unit-VI: Workers’ Participation in Management: Meaning and Purpose of Workers’ Participation in Management- Effectiveness of Workers’ Participation.
Text Book:
1. Monappa, Arun, Personnel Management, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
References:
➢ Agarwal, R.D, Dynamics of Personal Management in India, Tata McGraw Hill, Bombay,1973.
➢ Davis, Keith, Human Behaviour at Book, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1983.
➢ March, J.G. (etd.), Handbook of Organizations, Chicago Rand McNally, 1965.
➢ Venkataretinam, C.S., Personal Management and Human Resources, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1990.
FOURTH SEMESTER
CORE 13 - NGOS AND DEVELOPMENT PRACTICE
Unit-I: Alternative Development:
• Concepts: Alternative Development- Grass Root Development, Sustainable Development.
• Philosophy of Voluntary Service: Social Justice and Distributive Justice
• Social Action: Social Action and Social Activism- Objective of Social Action
Unit-II: Voluntary Organization and Development Initiatives:
• Genesis and development of Voluntary Organizations & Types of NGOs
• NGOs as Catalysts of change and development
• Social action for social advocacy, policy formulation, enforcement of social legislations, social empowerment and alleviation of social problems
• Internationalization of NGOs.
Unit- III: NGO Management:
• Social Entrepreneurship- Concept, Theories, Principles and Organization
• Structure of NGOs
• Governance and Accountability
• Organizing Development practice
• Assessing NGO Performance
Unit-IV: Project Management:
• Types of Development Projects
• Project Identification and project selection
• Fund Raising
• Project planning and project formulation
• Institution building and project implementation
• Project monitoring and evaluation
• Project documentation
Unit-V: Development Practices- Case Studies
• Poverty Alleviation
• Women and Development
• Health and Development
• Environmental Protection and Natural Resource Management
REFERENCES:
✓ Bhose S.G.R Joel., NGOs and Rural Development, Theory and Practice, Concept Publising Company, New Delhi, 2003.
✓ Lewis David and Tina Wallace (etd), Development and NGO’s and the Challenges of Change- New Roles and Relevance, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 2003
✓ Lawani B.T., NGOs in Development, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 1999
✓ Pawar S.N et.al, NGOs and Development, The Indian Scenario, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 2004
✓ Dharmarajan Shivani, NGOs As Prime Movers, Sectoral Action for Social Development, Kanishka Publication and Distributions, New Delhi, 2001
✓ Edward Micheal and Alan Flower, NGO Management, Earth Pub, New Delhi, 2003
✓ Somesh Kumar, Methods for Community Participation, Sage Pub, New Delhi, 2002
✓ Bhatia Anju, Women’s Development and NGO’s, Rawat Pub, Jaipur, 2000
✓ Sen and Derez, The Amartya Sen & Jean Derez Omnibus, OUP, New Delhi, 1999
✓ Roa Mohan, (etd) Disinvesting in Health – The World Bank’s Perception for Health, Sage Publication, New Delhi, 2001
✓ Baviskar, Anitha, In the Belly of the River, OUP, New Delhi, 1997.
****
CORE14- URBAN SOCIOLOGY
Unit – I: Introduction
• Classical Theories; Emile Durkheim, Karl Marx, Max Weber & Tonnies
• Urban Community and Spatial Dimensions: Park- Burgess, Mekenzie, Simmel, Louis Wirth and Redfield
Unit – II: Urbanization in India
• Trends in Urbanization
• Factors of Urbanization
• Causes of Urbanization
• Consequences of Urbanization
Unit – III: Urban Centres
• Classification of Town, Cities and Metropolis
• Characteristics of Urban Society
• Urban Social Structure: Caste, Class, Family
Unit – IV: Urban Social Problem
• Urban Housing
• Slums
• Urban Crime
• Environmental Problems
Unit –V: Urban Management
• Urban and Regional Planning
• Urban Services
• Urban Development Programmes and Polices
REFERENCES:
1. Pickwance C.G (ed) 1976, Urban Sociology, Critical Essays, Methuen.
2. Saunders Peter, 1981, Social Theory and Urban Question, Hutchionson.
3. Bose Ashis, 1978, Studies in India Urbanization 1901-1971, Tata McGraw Hill,
Delhi.
4. Abrahimson M, 1976, Urban Sociology, Englewoot, Prentice Hall.
5. Ronnan, Paddison, 2001, Handbook of Urban Studies, Sage Publication, India.
6. Bharadwaj., R.K., 1974, Urban Development in India, National Pub House, New
Delhi.
7. Gold, Harry, 1982, Sociology of Urban Life, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliff.
8. Alfred De Souza, 1979, The Indian City, Poverty, Ecology and Urban Development,
Mahonar, Delhi.
9. Desai A.R and Pillai S.D (ED) 1970, Slums and Urbanization, Popular Prakashan,
Bombay.
10. Ramachandran R, 1991, Urbanization and Urban Systems in India, OUP, Delhi.
11. Elllin Nan, 1996, Post-Modern Urbanism, Oxford, U.K.
****
ELECTIVE III
ORGANIZATIONAL BEHAVIOUR
Unit-I: Introduction
• Definition and types of organizations
• Theoretical approaches to the study of organization
• Classical organization theory – Bureaucracy – Scientific management
• Human relations approach (Hawthorne experient)
• Modern organizational theory- open systems approach and contingency approach
Unit-II: Organizational Behaviour
• Elements of Organizational behaviour systems
• Models of organizational behaviour: Autocratic- Custodial- Supportive- Collegial model
Unit-III: Group Dynamics
• Formal and informal groups
• Nature of groups
• Group cohesiveness, group performance and Group norms
Unit-IV: Leadership
• Leadership style
• Types of leadership
• Leadership skills
Unit- V: Organizational Communication
• Inter personal communication
• Downward Communication
• Upward communication
• Interactive Communication
Text Books
Fred, Luthans (1989) Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill, International Editions,New York.
Hugh, Arnold and Danial, Heldman (1989) Organizational Bahaviour
Keith, Davis and John Newstorm (1989), Human Behaviour at work: Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill Book and Co., New York.
****
19. M.A. TOURISM AND TRAVEL MANAGEMENT
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
PAPER IX - FRONT OFFICE MANAGEMENT
UNIT – I
The Lodging Industry – Hospitality Industry – Level of Service – Ownership and Affiliation – Reasons of Traveling
UNIT – II
Hotel Organization – Organization Charts – Classify Functional Areas – Room Division – Food and Beverage Division - Sales and Marketing Division – Account Division – Engineering and Maintenance Division – Security Division – Human Resource Division – Front Office Operations – Organization – Goal and Strategies – Job Description – Job Specification.
UNIT – III
Front Office Operation - Guest Cycle – Front Office System – Front Office forms – The Front Desk – Front Office Equipment – Telecommunication –Property Management System – Reservation – Types of Reservation – Reservation Maintenance – Reservation Report – Registration – Pre Registration – the Registration Record – Method of Payment.
UNIT – IV
Front Office Responsibilities – Front Office Communication – Inter Departmental Communication – Guest Service – Guest Relations – Front Office Security Functions - Managing Human Resources – Recruiting – Selecting – Hiring – Skills Training.
UNIT – V
Front Office Accounting – Accounting Fundamentals – Creation and Maintenance of Accounts – Internal Control – Settlement of Accounts – Concept of Revenue Management.
Books for Reference:
Michael L Kesavana and Richard M Brooks, 2005, Front Office Procedures, Educational Institutional American Hotel and Motel Association.
M.A. Khan, 2005, Front Office, Anmol Publication Pvt Ltd., New Delhi.
Ahmed Ismail, 2005, Front Office Operations and Management, Thomson Delmar learning.
James A Bards, 2004, Hotel Front Office Management, Jhon wileg and Sons inc, New Jersy
frontoffice.htm Date: April 2006
jobs/office-administration-jobs.aspx Date: April 2006
PAPER X - HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
UNIT - I
Introduction to Personnel Management and Objectives – Scope and Functions of Personnel Management – Qualities of a good Personnel Manager
UNIT - II
Personnel Management in India – Origin and growth of Personnel Function – Factors impending the growth of Personnel Management in India – Future of Personnel Management in India
UNIT - III
Manpower Planning – Definition of Manpower Planning – Significance, Nature, Need of Manpower Planning – Stages and steps in Manpower Planning – Objectives of Human Resource planning – Advantages and disadvantages of Manpower Planning
UNIT - IV
Recruitment Sources – Merits, Demerits of Recruitment – Recruitment Policy – Selection – Steps in Selection Procedure - Interview – Induction - Promotion - Transfer – Training – Communication-Performance Appraisal
UNIT – V
Employee Morale-Management of Grievances- Compensation Management – Methods of Wage Payment – Sound Wage Plan – Incentive Wage Plan – Types of Incentive Plans – Factors influencing Wage Structure – Top Evaluation – Merit Rating – Wage Regulations – National Wage Policy-Employee Safety-Industrial Health-Trade Unions.
Books for Reference:
G.R.Krishna, P.G Aquinas, 2004, Personnel/Human Resource, Management: Authors Press, Delhi.
C.B.Mamoria & S V Gankar, 2005, Personnel Management, Himalayan Publishing House, Mumbai.
S.Gupta, 2004, Human Resource Development, Deep and Deep Publications Ltd, Delhi.
S.K.Bhatia, 2004, International Human Resource Management, Deep and Deep Publications Ltd, Delhi.
P.C.Tripathi, 2004, Personnel Management and Industrial Relation, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
L. M. Prasad, 2003,Human Resource Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
S. L. Goel, 2003, Personnel Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
Arya P Pand Tandon B.B., 2004, Human Resource Development, Deep and Deep Publications Ltd., Delhi.
Subbah Rao, 2004, Human Resource Management, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
bisc/hrpg.htmt Date: April 2006
iimlac.in/faculty/rm.htm Date: April 2006
PAPER XI - RESEARCH METHODOLOGY
UNIT I
Introduction to Research Methodology – Meaning of Research – Objectives of Research – Motivation in Research – Types of Research – Significance of Research – Methodology, Criteria for Good Research
UNIT II
Research Design and Sampling Design – Meaning of Research Design – Need for Research Design – Features of a good Design – Concepts relating to Research Design – Developing Research Plan – Steps in Sampling Design – Characteristics of a Good Sampling Design – Types of Sample Design
UNIT III
Data Collection – Collection of Primary Data – Collection of Data through Questionnaires and Schedules – Collection of Secondary Data – Processing and Analysis of Data – Sampling Fundamentals
UNIT IV
Testing of Hypothesis – What is Hypothesis? – Basic Concepts – Procedure for Hypothesis – Tests of Hypothesis
UNIT V
Report Writing – Significance of Report Writing – Different Steps in Writing Reports – Layout of Research Reports – Types of Reports – Oral Presentation – Mechanics of Writing a Research Report – Role of a Computer in Research
Books for Reference:
C.R. Kothari, 1995, Research Methodology, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
P.C. Tripathi, 1998, Research Methodology, Sultan Chand and Sons, New Delhi.
G N O. Prakash, Srivastava, 1997, Advanced Research Methodology, Sultan Chand and sons, New Delhi.
Santosh Gupta, 1998, Research Methodology and Statistical Techniques, Deep and Deep Publications, New Delhi.
Ganesh Pandey and Verma, 2000, Research Methodology, Deep and Deep Publications, New Delhi.
Arya. P.P. and Y Pal, 2002, Research Methodology in Management, Deep and Deep Publications, New Delhi.
Date: April 2006
mission.india.nicf.in/workshop/GR.Bhatia-173.06pdf
Date: April 2006
ELECTIVE III - MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEM IN TOURISM
UNIT – I
Introduction - Concept – Role and Impact of MIS in Tourism Industry - Modern Media Techniques – Internet and Tourism Industry - Computers in Cargo, Airlines, Hotels and Railways. CRS - Galileo, Abascus – Amadeus
UNIT - II
Process of Management – MIS A Tool for Management Process – Basic Model of Organisation Structure – MIS and Organisation
UNIT - III
Decision Making Concepts – MIS - Decision Support System – Characteristics and Capabilities of DSS – Components of DSS
UNIT - IV
System Approach and MIS – Data Base Management System RDBMS
UNIT - V
Function Management, Marketing, Personnel, Production and Finance, Information System
Books for References:
Gordon B Davis and Margrette H Olson, 2003, Management Information System, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company.
Gerald V Post and David L Anderson, 2004, Management Information System, Tata Mc Graw Hill Company.
Avdesh Gupta and Aurag Malik, 2006, Management Information System, Fire Wall Media Publications.
Verma,.S.B., 2006, Information Technology and Management, Deep and Deep Publication Delhi.
Goel, D.P.O., 2005, Management Information System-Concept and Applications, Deep and Deep Publications, Delhi.
R.K. Subha, 1999, Leisure Tourism, Dominant Publishers and Distributors, Delhi.
Arnold O. Putnam, 2003, Management Information System.
page3.html Date: April 2006
som.iltkgp.ernet.in/faculty/debjani/Bayero1.pdf Date: April 2006
EDC II - COMMUNICATIVE SKILL IN FRENCH LANGUAGE - II
UNIT –VII
Suivez le guide…. Pages 111-126
UNIT - VIII
A La mode… Pages 127-144
UNIT - IX
Le cinema … pages 145-164
UNIT - X
D’hier a demain… pages 165-182
UNIT - XI
Les sports…. Pages 183-202
UNIT – XII
Un air de fete…. Pages 203-225
Books for Reference:
J.O. Courtillon, LIBRE ECHANGE-TOME 1-G D, de Salins,Hatier/Dider,Paris. 1995.
Rajeshwari Chandrasekar, RekhaHangal,Chitra Krishnan, Claude Le Ninan, Asha Mokashi,Hachette Livres, A VOTRE SERVICE – TOME I, General Book Depot, NewDelhi, 1999.
Apprenons le francais Mahita Ranjit,Monica Singh,Saraswathi House Pvt ltd ,New Delhi 2005.
La cle des champs ,I,R Geoffroy Dominique Lo Cascio,Marinie Rivas,Larousse,Paris,1991.
Farandole,I C Le Hellaye,D Barzotti,Hatier/Didier,Paris 1992.
Mes premiers pas en francais,Mariette Barraud Hachette ,Paris 1990.
Pile Ou Face I,JeanneVassal,Cle International,Paris,1991.
FOURTH SEMESTER
PAPER XII - AIR TICKETING AND FARE CONSTRUCTION
UNIT - I
Civil Aviation in India - Air Transport: Airlines Abbreviations, Codes and Definitions-Chicago Convention-Warsaw Convention – Aircraft and in-flight services – Airport Facilities and Special Passengers – Automation- Baggage- International Regulations-Bilateral Agreements –Travel Guides-Aviation Geography-IATA.
UNIT - II
Airfares and Ticketing-1: Arrangement of the Tariff Manuals-Guidelines for International Tariff Rules – Terms and Definitions – Published Fares-Arrangement of Foreign Currency-RBI Regulations and Formalities – Currency Regulations – Round and Circle Trip Fares – Journeys in Different Classes – Special Fares – Discounted Fares – Taxes –Ticketing Instructions – BSP Procedures – Stock Control and Security of Accountable Documents.
UNIT - III
Airfares and Ticketing-2: Review of Basic Fare Construction Principles-General Ticketing Instructions-MCO(Miscellaneous Charges Order)-PTA(Prepaid Ticket Advice) – The Mileage System – Lowest Combination Principle – Round and Circle Trip Fares – Journeys in Different Classes of Service – Around the World Fares – “Open Jaw” Journeys – Special Fares – Re-routings – Collection of Fares.
UNIT - IV
Tour Programmes: Terms and Abbreviations – Types of Tours – How and why Tours are Produced – Items included in a Tour Brochure – Booking Conditions – Reservation Procedures.
UNIT - V
Travel Formalities: The Passport – Health Certificates – Taxes, Customs and Currency – Travel Insurance-Credit Cards-Travel Freight Formalities-Travel Formalities – General Preventive Measures – The Travel Information Manual (TIM) – Consequences of Negligence.
Book for reference:
Guides to IATA/ UFTAA, Training Courses and Journals Published by International Air Transport Association and Universal Federation of Travel Agent Association.
Jagmohan Negi, 2004, Air Travel Ticketing and Fare Construction, Kanishka Publishers, NewDelhi.
Jagmohan Negi, 2004, International Tourism and Travel, S. Chand and Company Ltd, NewDelhi.
PAPER XIII - ECO TOURISM
UNIT – I
Basic Principles of Tourism Ecology - Definition of Ecology – Five Basic Laws of Ecology – Environment – Eco System – Basic Properties of Eco Systems and their Relevance in the context of Tourism – Eco System Diversity – Habitat, Species, Community – Cultural – Eco System – Absorbing Capacity – Carrying Capacity – Stability – Dynamics – Multi-functionality, Integrity and Sustainability.
UNIT – II
Eco Tourism –Interaction of Ecology and Environment for Tourist activities – Various Types of Eco Tourism - Eco Cultural Tourism, Health Tourism, Heritage Tourism, Adventure Tourism - Farm Tourism – Angling (Fishing Tourism) and Water Sports related Eco Tourism activities.
UNIT – III
Conservation of Ecology – Management of Eco Systems – Basic Principles, goals and strategies with special emphasis on Tourism Codes of Conduct for different Stake - holders - Ecological Planning – UN initiatives on Ecology and Environment – National Policy on Ecology and Environment – Future Prospects and Policy Alternatives.
UNIT – IV
Introduction to Human Ecology – Tourism Geography – Pollution Ecology – Energy Environment nexus – Non-equilibrium Ecology – Ecological Footprints Ecological and Socio-Economic Indicators - Ecological Economics – Eco-Cultural Tourism Adaptive/Sustainable Management of Eco System with special reference to Tourism.
UNIT – V
Environmental Education and Legislation – Needs and Strategies with special emphasis on Tourism – Suggestions for Long Term Sustainable Tourist activities – A Critical Review of Tourist Policy and Eco Tourism Policy of India – Tourism Planning and Implementation in India - Sustainable Tourism Planning for Ecologically Sensitive Areas and Protected Areas - Methodology for Developing New Tourism Activities without affecting existing Ecology and Environment.
Books for References :
David B. Weaver, 2005, The Encyclopedia of EcoTourism , Oxford University Press.
P.C. Sinha, 2005, The Encyclopedia of EcoTourism, Anmol Publications , NewDelhi
Prabhas Chandra, 2003, International Ecotourism, Environment Rules and Regulation, Kanishka Publication,Delhi.
Prabhas Chandra, 2003, Global Ecotourism, Codes, Protocols and Charter, Kanishka Publication,Delhi.
P.C. Sinha, 1998, Eco Tourism and Mass Tourism, Anmol Publications, New Delhi.
ELECTIVE IV - GLOBAL TOURISM - I
UNIT - I
International Tourism: Growth and Trends – Tourism and International Economy – Tourism and International Understanding
UNIT - II
Tourism in Europe-Austria-Belgium-U.K - Denmark-France-Germany-Greece-Ireland-Italy-Spain-Portugal-Norway-Sweden-Switzerland
UNIT - III
Tourism in USA-New / York-New / Jersy-Florida-California-San Fransisco-Washington D.C - Hollywood-Chicago-Illinois-Hawaii-Miami-Niagara-Philadelphia-Georgia-Texas-Important Landmarks in Latin America- Australia- New Zealand
UNIT - IV
Tourism in South East Asia: Singapore, Malaysia, Hong Kong, China, Japan
UNIT - V
Contemporary Issues in Global Tourism –Future of Global Tourism
Books for References :
Lonely Planet, 2005
Rough Guide, 2005.
Foder Explorer, 2005.
Let’s go Travel guide 2005-Europe
G.S. Badra, 2004, Globalisation and Marketing Management, Deep and Deep Publications New Delhi.
Date: April 2006
Date: April 2006
Date: April 2006
ELECTIVE V - GLOBAL TOURISM - II
UNIT - I
Future of Global Tourism-Obstacles in Tourism-Tourism as a Great Economic and Social Force-Travel, Trade, Fairs and Exhibitions
UNIT - II
Tourism in Pakistan-Bangladesh-Sri Lanka
UNIT - III
Tourism in South Africa and Middle East
UNIT - IV
Importance of Geography in Tourism-Natural and Climatic Regions of the World in brief-Impact of Weather and Climate on Tourist Destinations.
UNIT - V
Global Tourism Geography-Map Reading-Latitude-Longtitude-International Data Line-Time Zones-Calculation of Time-Time Difference-Variations-Standard Time.
Books for Reference:
Lonely Planet to Middle East, 2005.
Rough Guide, 2005.
Foder`s Explorer S.Africa, 2005.
Let`s Go Travel Guide, 2005
G.S. Badra, 2005, Globalisation and Marketing Management, Deep and Deep Publications New Delhi.
Date: April 2006
Date: April 2006
Date: April 2006
PAPER XXI - PROJECT
_____________________
20. MASTER OF SOCIAL WORK (M.S.W)
SYLLABUS
THIRD SEMESTER
SPECIALIZATION – SOCIAL WORK WITH FAMILIES
Paper – XI – Social Work with Children Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
To sensitize the students on the situation of children in India in the context of child rights.
To develop an understanding of the policies, programmes and legal provisions for the child.
To enhance understanding on the role of social work in the implementation of child rights..
Unit I 15 hours
Concept of child rights, demographic profile of the child in India. Constitutional safeguards for children in India, National Policy for Children, U.N. Charter on the Rights of the Child. Situational analysis of the child in the context of child right to survival, health, nutrition, education and protection. The status of the girl child in India and programmes for the girl child. National Charter for Children 2004, National Plan of Action 2005. Changing trends in working with children from charity to rights based approach.
Unit II 15 hours
Health and Nutritional Services for the Child in India – the ICDS project, school health programmes, health and nutrition programmes for the child Governmental and nongovernmental programmes for children.
Educational Needs of the Child in India - alternatives to formal education, Sarva Siksha Abhiyan, transit schools, non-formal education, vocational education.
Unit III 10 hours
Children in special circumstances: Overview of the problem of the destitute child, delinquent child, street child – definition, nature, causes, prevention and services - Institutional and non-institutional services, cottage system of care, SOS children’s village, Governmental and Non Governmental programmes. Juvenile Justice system in India. Role of Social Work with children in special circumstances.
Unit IV 10 hours
Socially exploited and oppressed children: Overview of the problem of Child Labour, Child Abuse, Child Beggars, Child Prostitution, Child trafficking. Definition, Nature and extent of the problem, causes and effects. National Child Labour Elimination Programme. Child Labour Prohibition and Regulation Act (1986). National Commission for Protection of Child Rights Act, Overview of the programmes for care and protection of the child. Role of social work. with socially exploited and oppressed children
Unit V 10 hours
Children in need of Special Care: Overview of the problem of the differently abled child (physically and mentally challenged), emotionally disturbed child, learning disabled, children living with HIV/AIDS, children of prisoners. Definition, Nature, types, extent, causes and effects, treatment and prevention. The Persons with Disability Act,1995. Role of the Child Guidance Clinic. Application of social work methods for children in need of special care.
Substitute Services for children Sponsorship: Meaning requirement, procedures in sponsorship, role of social worker in Sponsorship programme.
Adoption: Meaning, nature of adoption, legal provisions and procedures regarding in-country and inter-country adoption of the Indian child. Problems in adoption, role of the social worker in an adoption service.
Role of NGO’s and INGO’s in the service of children.
References
1. Baruah, Arunima (2003) Child Abuse, Reference Press, New Delhi
2.Chaturvedi, T.N. (ed.) (1979), Administration for Child Welfare, Indian
Institute of Public Administration, New Delhi.
3. Chowdry, Paul. D. (1963), Child Welfare Manual, Atma Ram and Sons, New Delhi.
4. Devi, Laxmi (ed.), (1998), Child and Family Welfare, Institute for
Sustainable Development, Anmol Publications Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi.
5. Gandhi, Anjali 1990 School Social Work, Commonwealth Publishers, New Delhi.
6. Holmes, Robyn M. (1998) Field Work with Children. Sage Publications, New Delhi.
7. Kaldate, S.V. (1982), Society, Delinquent and Juvenile Court, Ajanta Publications,
New Delhi.
8. Kanbargi, Ramesh (ed.) (1991), Child Labour in the Indian Sub Continent,
Dimensions & Implications, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
9. Mander, Harsh & Vidya Rao, (1996), An Agenda for caring – interventions
for Marginalised Groups, Voluntary Health Association of India, New Delhi.
10. Mazumdar, Vina & Krishna (Eds.) (2001) Enduring Conundrum India’s Sex Ratio
Centre for Women’s Development Studies. Rainbow Publishers Ltd.
11. Pati, R.N. (ed.) (1991), Rehabilitation of Child Labourers in India, Ashish
Publishing House, Delhi.
12. Sarkar, Chandana, 1987, Juvenile Delinquency in India, An Etiological analysis,
Daya Publishing House, Delhi.
13. Sibert, Jo, (1992), Society & Community Pediatrics Edward Arnold, London.
14. Tardon, R.K. & Sudarshan, K.N. (1998), Directory & Hand book on Children,
Asish Publishing House, New Delhi.
15.Unicef Mapping India’s Children. An Agenda for Action. New Delhi.
16. Central Adoption Resource Authority (2006), Guidelines for Adoption from India.
New Delhi, Govt. of India.
17.Web resources: wcd.nic.in .in
SPECIALIZATION – COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND EMPOWERMENT
Paper – XI – Urban Community Development Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To enable students to gain an understanding about the urban poor.
_ To develop sensitivity and commitment for working with the urban poor.
_ To provide knowledge on various developmental efforts.
_ To expose students to skills and techniques of working with urban poor.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Concept of Urban, Urban Development, Urban Community Development, Urbanization. Urbanism, Differences between urban development and Urban Community Development. Principles and Approaches of UCD.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Slum : Definition, Characteristics, types, causes and consequences of growth of slums. Theory of slums, Power structure of Slums. The Tamil Nadu Slum Areas (Slum Clearance and Improvement) Act, 1971 – Policies, structure and functions of the Tamil Nadu Slum Clearance. Problems of slum dwellers, squatter settlement dwellers, street children. – programmes for the development of slum dwellers. Critical analysis of the Programmes and approaches.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Urban Community Development in India – Delhi and Hyderabad projects – Urban Community Development in Tamil Nadu – MUDP and TNUDP
Governmental agencies in Urban Community Development – structure and functions of the Tamil Nadu Housing Board, HUDCO, Corporation of Chennai, CMDA – Non-Governmental agencies in Urban Community Development.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
People’s participation in Urban Community Development – concept of involvement – importance and scope of people’s participation – factors hindering promoting people’s participation.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Conscientization – goal settings; identifying and developing leadership, resource mobilization; human resource development resolving group conflicts, programme planning and service delivery, eliciting people’s participation, monitoring and evaluation.
References
1. Ashish Bose, (1971), India’s Urbanisation : 1990 – 2001, McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
2. Bhattacharya, B., (1979), Urban Development in India, Shree Publishing House, Delhi.
3. Bidyut Mohanty, (1993), Urbanization in Developing Countries Basic Services and Community Participation, ISS and Concept Publishing Co., New Delhi.
4. Clinard, Marshall, B., (1970, Slums and Urban Community Development, The Free Press, New York.
5. Desai, A.R. & Devadas Pillai (ed.) (1972), Slums and Urbanization, Popular Prakashan, Bombay.
6. Paul Wiebe, (1975), Social Life in an Indian Slum, Vikas Publishing House, Delhi.
SPECIALIZATION – HUMAN RESOURCE AND MANAGEMENT
Paper – XI – Labour Legislations Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To help students learn the basic facts concerning Labour Law.
_ To assist the students to acquire attitudes that are apt in the practice of Labour Law
_ To enable them to realize the need to have suitable skills for the practice of Labour Law
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Labour Legislation : History of labour legislations in India; Labour in the Indian
Constitution; Industrial jurisprudence; industrial Law as distinguished from
common law; International Labour Code (ILC), Judicial set up and Administration of Industrial and Labour Judiciary-Administration set up and functions of Factory Inspectorate
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Legislations Pertaining to Working Conditions:
Factories Act, 1948, Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946, Apprentices Act, 1961, Contract Labour (Regulations and Abolition) Act, 1970,Plantations Labour Act, 1951.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Shops and Establishment Legislation
Tamil Nadu Shops and Establishments Act, 1947, The Tamil Nadu Catering Establishment Act, 1958, The Tamil Nadu Industrial Establishment (conferment of permanent Status to workmen) Act, 1981, The Tamil Nadu Payment of Subsistence Allowance act, 1981, Tamil Nadu Industrial Establishment (National and Festival Holidays) Act,1951- Tamil Nadu Labour Welfare Fund Act, 1972.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Wage Legislation and Social Security Legislations
Payment of Wages Act, 1936
Minimum Wages Act, 1948
Payment of bonus Act, 1965
Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923
Employee’s State Insurance Act, 1948
Employee Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 195
Maternity Benefit Act, 1961
Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Industrial Relations Legislations
Trade Unions Act, 1926
Industrial Disputes Act, 1947
References
1. Bhagoliwal, T.N., (1967), Economics of Labour and Social Welfare, Sahitya
Bhavan, Agra.
2. Government of India, Ministry of Labour, (2002), Report of the National
Commission on Labour, Vol- I, II, III Manager of Publication, New Delhi.
3. Misra.S.L (1983) Labour and Industrial Laws, Pioneer Publication, New Delhi.
4. Puri, S.K., (1984), Introduction to Labour Law & Industrial Law, Agricultural Institute, Allahabad.
5.Srivastava,S.C (2000) Industrial Relations and Labour Laws, Vikas Publishing
House, New Delhi.
6. Suryanarayan Misra, (1982), Introduction to Labour Law & Industrial Law,
Agricultural Institute, Allahabad.
7.Tripathi,P.C. (1998) Industrial Relations & Labour Laws, Sultanchand Publication,
New Delhi.
SPECIALIZATION – MEDICAL AND PSYCHIATRIC SOCIAL WORK
Paper – XI – Medical Social Work Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
• To know and understand the beginnings of social work in the medical setting and its development and current status.
• To develop a holistic and integrated approach to social work practice in the field of health.
• To develop a deeper understanding of common physical diseases and health problems of vulnerable groups
• To develop the capacity to perceive the relation of environment and socio cultural and psychological factors in the causation, treatment and prevention of diseases.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
The Concept and Definition of Medical Social Work: The meaning of health, hygiene, diseases, illness and handicap; medicine as per WHO; Changing concept of health; Concept of patient as a person. Historical Development in Medical Social Work in India. Trends in Medical Social Work practice in Chennai. Scope of Medical Social Work.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Health care models – Medical health Prevention and Promotion model, Integrative model and Development model; holistic approach to health; alternative system of health-Yoga, meditation, Naturopathy.
Health Education : Concept and Principle, Models, Methods and Techniques: Social Action, Empowerment, Lobbying, Advocacy & Social marketing.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
The Psychosocial Problems of
Major communicable diseases – TB, STD, AIDS, Polio, diarrhoeal diseases, Malaria, typhoid, leprosy, leptospirosis, Respiratory Tract Infection (RTI).
Major no communicable diseases – cancer, diabetes, hypertension, cardiac disorders, neurological disorders, asthma
Physically challenged
Nutritional disorders
Occupational health problems
Women’s health problems
Pediatric health problems
Geriatric health problems
(12 Hrs)
Unit IV
Organization and administration of Medical Social Work Department in hospitals Medical social work in relation to different disciplines
Multidisciplinary approach and team work
Patients right in health care
Implications of hospitalization for the patient and his family.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Medical social work practice in different settings – hospitals, out-patient departments, emergency / crisis care ART centres . Hospice, special clinics and community health use of volunteers, social support and self help groups. Role of Medical Social Worker in Hospital setting.
Problems encountered by medical social workers in the field.
References
1. Anderson R. & Bury M. (eds) (1988), Living with chronic illness – The Experience
of Patients and their families, Unwin Hyman, London.
2. Bajpai P.K. (ed.) (1997), Social Work Perspectives in Health, Rawat Publications,
Delhi.
3. Barlett H.M. (1961), Social Work Practice in the health field; National Association
of social workers, New York.
4. Crowley M.F., (1967), A New look at nutrition; Pitman Medical Publishing Co., Ltd.,
London.
5. Field M., (1963), Patients are people – A Medical – Social Approach to Prolonged
Illness; Columbia University Press, New York.
6. Gambrill. E. (1997), Delhi Social work in the 21st century, Pine forge press, New
Delhi.
7. Golstein D., (1955), Expanding horizons in medical social work, The University of
Chicago Press, Chicago.
8. Pokarno K.L., (1996), Social Beliefs, Cultural Practices in Health and diseases;
Rawat Publications, Delhi.
SPECIALIZATION – SOCIAL WORK WITH FAMILIES
Paper – XII – Social Work with Youth Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To understand the concept of youth development, the need and
importance of working with youth.
_ To understand the various factors influencing youth .
_ To understand the specific problems pertaining to youth.
_ To understand different governmental / non governmental programs for the welfare and development of youth.
_ To develop an understanding of the different methods of working with youth
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Youth development: Concept, definition, aims and objectives – demographic profile of the youth in rural and urban India, youth policy and programmes for youth.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Needs of the youth – physical, intellectual, emotional, social and religious needs of the youth. Socialization of the youth – influence of the family, peers, neighborhood, reference groups, religion, impact of westernization, modernization, urbanization and globalisation.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Specific problems of the youth --- Behavioural problems, Drug abuse, alcohol dependence, Sexually transmitted diseases, sexual problems, HIV/AIDS, Eating disorders and obesity
Emotional problems – identity crises, alienation, low self-esteem, Suicide, career conflict, conflicts in selecting a partner.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Role of youth in social change involvement – youth in polities, youth and leadership, youth in conflict situations, terrorism, youth and entrepreneurship
Government Schemes for rural and urban youth. Governmental, NREGA, NCC, NSS, Scouts, Guides, Hostel facilities, youth festivals, career counseling, Rajiv Gandhi National Institute of Youth Development. Other programmes – Nehru Yuva Kendra, Vishva Yuvak Kendra, Bharat Seva Samaj, Servants of India Society, Students Federation of India, Democratic Youth Federation of India, All India Catholic Universities Federation
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Application of Social Work methods in working with youth and youth groups. Training for youth development.
References
1. Chowdhry D Paul, (1993), Youth Participation and Development, Atma Ram
and Sons. New Delhi
2. Elliot and Merill, (1965), Social Disorganizations, 4th ed., Harper and Brothers,
London.
3. Erikson H Erik, (1968), Identity Youth and Crisis, W.W., Norton.
4. Fred Milson Paul, (1972), Youth in a Changing Society, Routledge and Kegan
Paul Ltd,
5. Gore, M.S. (1978), Indian Youth – Process of Socialization; Vishva Yuvak. New
Delhi
6. Laskhminarayana. H.D., (1985), College Youth Challenge and Response,
Mittal Publications,
7. Madan, G.L., (1994), Indian Social Problems, Allied Publishers.
8. Mehta, Prayag, (1980), Indian Youth Emerging Problems and Issues, Allied
Publishers, New Delhi.
9. Nair P.S. (1991), Indian Youth, Mittal Publications. New Delhi
10. Ruhala S.P. (2001), Sociology of Youth Culture in India, India Publishing
House. New Delhi
11. Vishwa Yuvak Kendra , (1985), For Youth in India – Schemes of the Central
and State Government. New Delhi
12. webresources: yas.nic.in .in
SPECIALIZATION – COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND EMPOWERMENT
Paper – XII – Rural Community Development Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To develop in students an in-depth understanding of rural communities.
_ To provide knowledge of the various methods, programmes, strategies and
developmental efforts towards rural community development
_ To understand the role and contribution of professional social work in the
development process.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Community Development
Definition, concept, philosophy and objectives, scope of rural community
development – approaches to rural community development – process, area
applied, need, spatial, sectoral.
Concepts and Definition of Rural Community Development
Rural development (RD), Rural Community Development (RCD), difference
between RD and RCD – philosophy, objectives, approaches, principles.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
History of Rural Development in India
Early pioneering period (Sriniketan, Marthandom and Guragon)
Probation trial period (Baroda, Etawah, Nilohkeri and Firka) projects
Launching period – post launching: Technical integration. Administrative
adaptation and Panchayati Raj.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Community Development Administration
Organization and administration of community development from block to
national levels. Components of block administration, development programmes
and their coordination. Functions of BDO and other functionaries. Training for
community development functionaries.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Land, Water and Analysis of Rural Problems.
Systems of land tenure; Land reform measures, Land alienation. Water
harvesting, watershed management, Agricultural development program.
Poverty – alienation, rural bondedness – Unemployment and underemployment,
deprivation. Social problems – casteism, ill health, housing, illiteracy,
conservation, agricultural labourers, marginal and small farmers.
Rural power structure – Economic, political and social
SCs, STs, BCs, National Rural Employment Guarantee Act, 2005 – objectives,
characteristics, strategies, organization and administration, World Bank and Rural Development. Impact of Globalisation on Rural Development
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Role of A Community Development Worker
Identifying leaders, resource mobilization, activating and mobilizing people,
organizing and working with groups, influencing, lobbying, facilitating,
negotiating, Cooperation.
Panchayat systems and local self-government in ancient India. Balwanthrai
Mehta Committee report. Three tier system, administrative set up and
functions, finance and problems of Panchayatiraj, Tamil Nadu Panchayat Act,
1994 and the 73rd amendment.
References
1.Agarwarl .A.N (2001) Indian Economy, Nature , Problems and Progress, Vikas
Biraj, Prakash, New Delhi
2. Dayal, Rajeshwar, (1974), C.D. Programme in India, Kitab Mahal Pvt, Ltd.,
Allahabad.
3. Desai, A.R., (1971), Rural Sociology, Popular Press, Bombay.
4. Desai, Vasanth, (1994), Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development,
Himalaya Publishing House, New Delhi.
5. Dubhashi, P.R., (1977), Rural Development Administration in India, Popular Press,
Mumbai.
6. Jain, S.C., (1985), Rural Development Institute and Strategies, Rawas Publications.
7. Kartar Singh, (1986) Rural Development-Principles, Policies and Management,
Sage Publications, New Delhi.
8. Michel Lipton, (1982), Why Poor People remain poor, Heritage Publishers, New
Delhi.
9. Mukerji, B., (1961), Community Development in India, Orient Longman, Chennai.
SPECIALIZATION – HUMAN RESOURCE AND MANAGEMENT
Paper – XII – Human Resource Management and Human Resource Development
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To help students build a knowledge base appropriate to Human Resource
Management
_ To enable the students to perceive the attitudes required for the successful
application of Human Resource Management.
_ To assist them to perceive and develop the skills appropriate to the field
practices
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Management : Principles and Functions, Concept of Business Management :
Principles, Functions, POSDCORB. Concept of Business Organisations,
Outline of different Management functions – Production, Sales, Advertising & Marketing, Finance, Capital Mobilization, Stocks and Shares.
Human Resource Management : Concept, History, Role and importance as part of general management objectives and Classification of Functions.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Human Resource Planning : Concept and Process of Human Resource Planning,
Recruitment, using modern technology for recruitment, Selection, Job Design, Job Analysis, Job Description, Job Classification, Job Evaluation, Induction and placement.
Reward Systems : Employee compensation systems and models of compensation, compensation bench marking. ESOP, perks and benefits,
flexible pay, variable pay, performance linked incentive programme. Personal
taxation.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Training and Development : Objectives, principles and theories of training.
Training policy. Methods and techniques of training. Training evaluation.
Professional training organizations : (ISTD, HRD Network and NIPM)
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Modern Management Practices : JIT, 5S, TPM, TQM, Quality Control, Kaizen, ISO, PCMM, BPR, BPO, Balance Score Card
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Human Resource Development : Definition, Importance of good HR practices; contribution of HR instruments, Processes, Outcomes for Organizational Effectiveness.
The HRD Function : The tasks structure and functions of the HRD department; Qualities and competency requirements of HRD managers.
HRD and Systems Concepts : Elements of a good HRD system; Various HRD sub-systems. HR and IT – office automation – HR Audit and HRIS, People soft, SAP, ERP.
References
1. Bhonsle, Y.B. Personnel Management Indian Scene, Ruth Benedt Deborah
Prayer House.
2. Brahman, John, (2000), Human Resource Planning, Universities Press (I)
Limited, Hyderabad.
3. Koontz and Weihirich (1980) Essentials of Management, McGraw Hill, New York.
4.. Mamoria, C.B. (1996), Personnel Management, Himalayan Publications, New Delhi
5. Mondy, Robert & Share (1996).Human Resource Management, Prentice Hall, New
Delhi.
6. Pigors, Paul,.& Myers (1993) Personnel Management Mc Graw Hill, New York.
7. Rao, T.V. & Pereia, D.F. (1986), Recent Experience in HRD, Oxford & IBH
Publishing Co., New Delhi.
8. Rao, T.V. & Pereia, D.F. (1990), The HRD Missionary, Oxford and IBH Publishing Co., New Delhi.
SPECIALIZATION – MEDICAL AND PSYCHIATRIC SOCIAL WORK
Paper – XII – Mental Health and Social Work Total Teaching Hours: 60
Objectives
• To understand psychiatric social work in the context of changing trends in
health care.
• To understand the concept of mental health and acquire knowledge in mental
Disorders and their treatment
• To develop skills in identifying mental disorders in health settings and
community.
• To understand the role of the psychiatric social worker.
Unit I (12 hrs)
Psychiatric Social Work: history and scope of psychiatric social work, changing perspectives of psychiatric social work, changing trends in mental health care, Indian view of mental health and well being.
Unit II (12 hrs)
Psychiatric Assessment – Case history taking and mental status examination,
Psycho- social and multidimensional assessment of mental disorders in Psychiatric Social Work practice. Use of scales in mental health assessments and intervention.
Unit III (12 hrs)
Common Mental Disorders and their treatment modalities: Organic Mental Disorders, mental and behavioural disorders due to psychoactive substance use, schizophrenia and delusional disorders. Mood disorders, behavioural syndromes associated with physiological disturbances, disorders of psychological development, behaviour and emotional disorders with onset in childhood and adolescence. Neurotic, stress related and somatoform disorders. Disorders of adult personality disorders and behaviour, sexual disorders, mental retardation and suicide. Epilepsy and culture bound syndromes.
Unit IV (12 hrs)
Institutional and non institutional models of care for management of mental disorders. Role of psychiatric Social Worker in the mental health field. Practice of psychiatric social work in non psychiatric settings. Collaborating and networking with various organizations; new avenues of mental health.
Unit V (12 hrs)
Psychosocial rehabilitation: concept, principles, process and programmes.
REFERENCES
1.Ahuja, Niraj (2002) A Short textbook of Psychiatry, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers Ltd., New Delhi.
2.American psychiatric ASSN. 1994 Diagnostic criterion from DSM-IV American Psychiatric assn,
3.Barker P. Child Psychiatry; Granada Publishing Ltd.
4.Bellack A.S. (1984) Schizophrenia, treatment Management in Adult, Bailliere Tindall,
London.
5.Berrios, G.E. & Dawson J.H. (1983) Treatment and Management in Adult Bailliere
Tindall, London.
6.Colin Pitchard, (2006), Mental Health Social Work, Routledge Publishers
7.Hepworth D.H. & Larsen J.A. (1986) Direct Social Work Practice, Theory and Skill
Third Edition.
8.Kaplan, H.I. Freedom A.M. and Sadock B.J. (1980) Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, (third ed.) vols. 1,2 &3; Williams and Wilkins, Baltimore / London.
9.Kappur, M Sheppard. Ralph and Renate (Eds) (1993) Child Mental Health – Proceedings of the Indo – US
10.Mane P. & Gandevia K. (Eds.) (1993) Mental Health in India Issues and Concerns;
Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Mumbai
11.Robert, Albert R. Greene,Gilbert J., (2002), Social Workers’ Desk Reference, Oxford University Press, New York.
12.Sekar, K. Parthasarathy,R.,Muralidhar,D. Chandrasekhar Rao (2007) Handbook of Psychiatric Social Work, NIMHANS, Bangalore
13.Srinivasa Murthy & Burns B. (Eds) (1992) Community Mental Health –
Proceedings of the Indo-US Symposium, NIMHANS, Bangalore.
14. World Health Organisation, Geneva (1992) The ICD 10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders. Clinical Description and Diagnostic Guidelines; Oxford University Press.
ELECTIVE
Paper – XIV –Counseling Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
• To help students distinguish between counseling, Case Work and Psychotherapy
• and to acquire the required knowledge in this regard.
• To sensitize the students to the attitudes required for the practice of counseling
• To engage the students to identify and practice the appropriate skills.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Counseling
Definition, Elements, Characteristics and Goals,
Evolution of counseling
Foundations of Counseling
Philosophical Foundations – dignity of the human person
Sociological foundations – influence of social system
Psychological foundations – concept of self, goal directed behaviour, learning
principles, developmental needs at different stages.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
The Counseling Relationship
Regard and respects - Authenticity - Empathy
Personal Growth and Effectiveness of the Consellor
Concerns of self, attitudes, values, beliefs, relationships, self-esteem, openness
to others, accepting personal responsibility, realistic levels of aspiration, self
actualization.
The portrait of the helper
The portrait of a trainee
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Counseling Process
Stage – I – Problem Exploration and Clarification
Stage – II – Integrative Understanding – Dynamic Self-Understanding
Stage – III – Facilitation Action; Developing New Perspectives, Preferred
Scenario.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Group Counseling and Counseling in different settings
Definition, types, goals, Group counseling process – Group development.
Counseling in Family, School, Industrial & Health setting – De-addiction
centers, correctional settings, HIV / AIDS.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Theoretical Approaches to Counseling
Client-centered – TA – Rational emotive therapy – Cognitive approach –
Family Therapy – Behaviour – Eclectic approach.
References
1. Association of Psychological and Practice, (!982), Counseling in Asia, Perspective and Practices, Educational Counsellors of Asia.
2. Bengalee, M., Ehroo D., (1972), Guidance if you please, Macmillan, Bombay.
3. Currie, Fr. J., (1989), Barefoot Counseling – A Primer in building relationship, Asiam Tarding Corp, Bangalore.
4. Dave, Indu, (1953), The Basic Elements of Counseling, Sterling, New Delhi.
5. Delaney & Eisenber, (1973), The Counseling Process, Dept. of Mental Health Education and Mental Health Programme, Report NO.1, 11 US.
6. Fuster, J.M., (1972), Helping Personnel Growth – A New Approach to Counseling, Thompson Publication.
7. Welfare Egan, Gerard, (1982), The Skilled Helper, Brooks / Cole Publishing Co. California.
ELECTIVE
Paper – XIV – Management of Developmental and Voluntary Organizations
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
To understand the overall environment and its impact on the nature, structure and development of the organizations in corporate, public and voluntary, sectors in context of social work profession
To understand policies and procedures involved in establishing and maintaining human service organizations, need for change.
To acquire skills to network and participate in the management of resources – human, material, environmental and network.
To develop skills to participate in management of programmes, as a part of the inter-disciplinary team and initiate as well as develop new programmes.
To develop ability to analyze the practices applied in specific settings.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Social Services
Development and Welfare Organization’s response to societal needs; role of state voluntary and corporate sector
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Management services
Types of settings, organizational characteristics like origin, nature, size, structure, and design, organizational climate and impact socio-political environment impact
Management Process: Vision of planning, organizing, directing staff, cooperation, evaluation
Establishments, registration, different types of legislations, legal status, constitution, rules and procedure, goals
Financial Resources: Organizational budget, sources of finance, fund raising records, audit.
Physical: all activities related to acquiring, hiring and maintaining importable structure and infrastructure, maintenance of premises and daily upkeep.
Enhancing the involvement and the potential of people in organization’s executive boards, committees, professionals and other staff, relationship, communication, team building, supervision, and participation in training.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Programme Development
Programme management: Long term, short term, and documentation;
Project proposals based on felt needs, nature of resources, eligibility criteria, records, evaluation and research
Impact analysis-qualitative and quantitative
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Public Relation
Public relations need and its promotion by all in the organization. Representing the organization, networking, public, corporate and voluntary sector, resource building, accountability, transparency, social audit, use of Media for publicity.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Change and its Management
Understand and manage change, innovation-in a rapidly changing social environment: for policy programmes and structure
Organizational Understanding conflict, conflict resolution, creating positive climate
References
1. Choudhari, D. Paul, (1983), New Delhi,Social Welfare Administration, Atma ram and Sons,
2. Garain, S. (1998), Organizational Effectiveness of NGOs, University Book House, Jaipur
3. 1988), Social Welfare Administrative : Theory and Practice, Vol. I, and II, Deep and Deep Publications, New Delhi.
4. Haimann, A. (1982), Professional Management and Practice, Eurasia Publication,
Delhi.
5. Kapoor, K.K. (1986, Directory of Funding Organization, Information and News Network, Delhi.
6. Lauffer, A. (1977), Understanding your social agency, Sage Publications, London.
7. Lauffer, A., (1977), Getting the Resources you Need, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
8. Luthans, Fred, (1990), Organizational Behaviour Boston, McGraw Hill, Irwin.
9. Siddiqui, H.Y. (1984), Social Work and Social Action, Hamam Publication, New
Delhi.
10. Slavin, S. (ed.) (1978), Managing Finance Personnel and Information in Human
Services, Howorth Press, New York.
11. Slavin, S., (ed.) (1978), Social Administration, The Haworth Press, New York.
12. Weiner, M., (1982), Human Service Management, The Dorsey Press, Illinois.
INTER –DISCIPLINARY
Paper – XV – Social Policy and Social Legislation
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To develop an understanding of the social policy in the perspective of the National Goals as stated in the Constitution, particularly with reference to fundamental rights and the directive principles of the state policy.
_ To develop the capacity to recognize the linkage between development issues and social policy in terms of the plans and programmes
_ To develop an understanding of the concepts of social policy and social welfare policy to emphasize the relationship between the production and the redistribution of the resources at the micro and the macro level
_ To develop an understanding of the relevance of social policy to social work practice.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Social Policy and Constitution
Social policy, social welfare policy, its relation to the constitution, fundamental rights and Directive Principles of State Policy and Human Rights.
Definition, needs and contents, evolution of social policy in India, social policy and planned social change and development.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Policy Formulation
Approaches to social policy
Unified, Integrated and Sectoral
Different models of social policy and their application to Indian situation
Process of Policy Formulation
Social Policies, Plans and Programmes
Policies in India – a historical perspective policy regarding backward classes, scheduled classes. Scheduled tribes, denotified communities, women, children, youth, handicapped, aged, populations, family welfare, urban & rural development, education, health, poverty alleviation
Review of Five year plans
Programmes and policies of 11 th Five year plan.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Policy and Planning
Concept of social – developmental Planning, Scope of social planning, linkages between social policy and planning.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Planning Process and Planning Machinery
Indian Planning – historical perspective. Political systems. Political process, co-ordination of center and state, Panchayati Raj, Peoples participation. Political judiciary, social movement and voluntary action, legal aid and public interest litigation.
Planning Machinery and Monitoring
The Machinery process of social planning in India
Implementation of social planning at various levels
Monitoring and evaluation of planning
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Overview of Major Social Legislation in India
Hindu law : legislation pertaining to marriage divorce and succession, Hindu
Marriage Act 1955, Hindu Adoption and Maintenance Act, 1956, Hindu Minority and Guardianship Act ,1956, Hindu Succession Act ,1956.
Special Marriage Act, 1954 , Provision regarding marriage and divorce in Mohammedan law.
Legislation pertaining to children: Child Labour (abolition & regulation) Act
1986. Juvenile Justice Act 2001.
Legislation pertaining to social problems: Protection of Civil Rights Act (1976),
SC/ST. Prevention of Atrocities Act, 1989. Dowry Prohibition Act (1961)
Immoral Traffic Prevention Act (1956) Tamil Nadu Slum Areas (Improvement and
Clearance) Act (1971) the Mental Health Act, 1987, Medical Termination of Pregnancy Act 1971. Manual Scavenging and Dry Latrines (prohibition) Act 1993, the Bonded
Labour Abolition Act 1976, Transplant of Human Organs Act 1994, Family Court’s
Act 1984, Protection of Human Rights Act, 1993 Tamil Nadu Prohibition of Eve teasing Act 1988. Tamil Nadu Prohibition of Ragging Act 1997. Persons With Disabilities Act 1995.
References
1. Adoms Robert, (2002), Social Policy for Social Work, Palgrove.
2. Baldock John, (2000), Social Policy,Oxford, Oxford University Press.
3. Dubey S.N. (1979), Administration of Social Welfare Programmes in India, Soymaiya Publications, Bombay.
4. Gangrade, K.D., (1991), Social Legislation in India, Concept Publishing, New Delhi.
5. Kulbarai P.D., (1999), Social Policy of Social development in India, ASSWI.
6. Kulkarni. P.D., (1965), The Central Social Welfare Board, Asia Publishing House, New Delhi.
7. Nair, T. Krishnan (ed.) (1976), Social Work Education & Development of Weaker Sections, Madras-Association of Schools of Social Work in India.
8. Shanmugavelayutham .K. (1998) Social Legislation and Social Change, Chennai, Vazhga Valamudan Publishers
8. Yeetes Nicole, (2001), Globalization of Social Policy, London Sage Publication.
INTER – DISCIPLINARY
Paper – XV – Human Rights Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
To provide a perspective and foundation for a human rights culture among
students.
To study the Indian Constitution and human rights and how it can be enforce.
To create awareness on the Indian legal system, rule of law, human rights
related to custody and detention.
To enable students to work for the promotion and protection of children’s rights
women rights, dalit rights, workers rights (especially unorganized labour) right
of the urban poor and victims of displacement and resettlement.
To understand statutory provision, for protecting the environment, consumer
protection, local governance and right to information.
To equip students with knowledge about the human rights movements and new
rights gained.
To prepare students to play a role in promotion and protection of Human Rights
using advocacy strategies.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Introduction to human rights; categories and foundation of human rights,
International Human Rights Law and how to use it.
Indian Constitution and human rights protection and enforcement. Writ
jurisdiction and Public Interest Litigation.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Understanding law and the State. The relationship between human rights,
democracy, sustainable development, equality, sovereignty, secularism and non
discrimination.
The Indian Legal System, Indian Penal Code, Criminal Procedure Code and
Civil Procedure Code. Human rights in relation to custody and detention.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Global Market and Human Rights
Business corporations and human rights standards Science, technology and
human rights. Protection and regeneration of natural resources. Intellectual
Rights
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Empowering the most exploited and oppressed
Children rights, rights of coastal Communities, women’s rights, dalits rights,
workers rights, especially unorganized labour rights of the urban poor, victims
of displacement and resettlement.
Law and Strategy regarding protecting the environment, consumer protection,
local governance empowerment and right to information.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Human rights struggles and the Human rights movement in India
Statutory Commission and Human Rights Courts for the protection of rights.
Procedures for intervening in this process.
Strategies and skills for human rights advocacy.
References
1. Baxi, Upandra, (2005) future of human Rights Oxford University Press,London
2. Chandra, Sathish (1996) Interntrional Documents of Human Rights, Mittal Publications, New Delhi.
3.Chakrborthy, Somen, (2004) Human Rights Trainer’s Manual,Indian Social Insitutute, New Delhi.
4.Donnelly, Jack (1989) universal Human Rights in Theory and Practice, Cornell University, Press, USA.
5. Mathew P.D & Mathew, P.M (2005) Indian Legal System: An overview, Indian Social Institute, New Delhi
6.Shanmugavelayutham,K. Social Legislation and Social Change , Vazhga Valamudan Publishers, Chennai
7. Srivastava and Narayan (2002) united Nations on Human Rights, Indian Publishing Distributors, New Delhi.
7.United Nations, 1994: Human /Rights and Social Work , A Manual for Schools for Social Work and the Social Work Profession, Centre for Human Rights United Nations, Geneva.
Web Sites
.
unhcr.ch
SEMESTER – IV
SPECIALIZATION – SOCIAL WORK WITH FAMILIES
Paper – XVI – Social Work with the Elderly Total Teaching Hours : 60
Introduction
The course aims at providing knowledge of theories, concepts and perspectives
in gerontology, information of changing demography of older persons, vulnerability for
abuse in old age and guiding principles of work with other persons. It also provides
understanding of psychodynamic, ecological and advocacy approaches in social work
with the elderly.
Objectives
To understand the theories, concepts and perspectives in gerontology and gerontological social work
To examine the historical norms of roles, power and status of older persons and emerging trends and issues in the context of liberalized political economy and changing demography.
To study the physical, mental, sexual, emotional, economic, social and spiritual aspects of ageing and emerging needs.
To understand and analyze the policies, laws and programme affecting older persons.
To acquire skills in developmental programmes for the aging, their family members and the community in general.
.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Roles, Power and Status of Elderly – Historical norms in different cultures, urban / rural, tribal, economic, age and gender contexts. Situational analysis of the aged with respect to age, gender, place of residence, economic status and globalization. Demographic characteristics of the Elderly
.Unit II (12 Hrs)
Health of the Elderly - Longevity and physical health, Mental and emotional health Ill health, disabilities and care giving
Sexuality in old age, Spirituality in old age
Review of health policies for the disabled and their implementation with references to elderly
Health intervention : periodical check up, information and awareness about prevention of problems, recreation and creative art programmes, spiritual discourses, counseling, physical aids and access to geriatric treatment.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Elderly and Family
Interventions of elderly with parents, spouse, children, children-in-laws, grand children and others.
Care giving roles between elderly and the family. Stress management of caregivers
Issues of division of property, housing and social security.
Issues of neglect, abuse, violence and abandonment
Review of laws for inheritance and protection from abuse
Intervention needs : Raising family awareness about bereavement, And bereavement counseling
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Policy, Legislation and Schemes for Elderly
National policy for elderly, 1999 Scheme for the welfare of the aged,
institutional care and non institutional care in day care and mobile Medicare
units, Laws affecting elderly Policy and Plans for elderly.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Intervention
Developmental programmes for ageing: Development programmes for
preparations for old age, retirement planning, programmes for preparation for
understanding death and bereavement planning, and raising family and
community awareness about ageing and death.
Non-institutional services / Community services: Continuing educations,
mutual/self help groups, second career, training of elderly as volunteers,
counseling and legal aid to elderly, multi-services / day care centers,
home/family-based services, telephone help lines, information and referral
services, and death with dignity.
Minimizing the need for and humanizing the existing institutional services.
Training of para professionals and volunteers for care of the elderly.
References
1. Dandekar, K. (1996), The Elderly in India, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
2. Desaum N abd Suva Rahym (2000), Gerontological Social Work in India,
Some Issues and Perspectives, B.R. Publishers, Delhi.
3. Irundaya Rajan, S. Mishra, U.S. and Sarma P.S., (!997), Indian Elderly: Asset
or Liability, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
4. Khan, M.Z., (1997), Elderly in Metropolis, Inter India Publishers, New Delhi.
5. Krishnan, P and Mahadevan, K. (eds.) (1992), The Elderly Population the
Developed World: Policies, Problems and Perspectives, B.R. Publishing, Delhi.
SPECIALIZATION – COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND EMPOWERMENT
Paper – XVI – Development Planning Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To develop theoretical understanding of development and planning
_ To enable students to gain an understanding of the administrative machinery
involved in development.
_ To provide knowledge on various methods strategies and development efforts.
_ To understand the role and contribution of professional social worker in the
development.
Unit I
Development Planning (12 Hrs)
Planning – Concept – models, approaches – types planning process – need and
importance of planning for development. Development – definition – concepts
– indicators – types – models, social development and planning as a major development thrust in India.
Unit II
Participatory Planning (12 Hrs)
Participatory planning and development – history of participatory development
in India – models and approaches – participatory planning in Panchayati Raj
institutions.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Agriculture
Government’s plan for Agricultural development – agricultural productivity –
causes and problems of agriculture in India – marginal and small farmers
agricultural problems and strategies to solve them.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Co-operative Movement in India
History, Principles – legislations planning to cooperatives – Role and
achievements of cooperative – problems and limitations of cooperatives –
problems and limitations of cooperatives – types of cooperatives – Role of
Cooperatives to develop the poor.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Development of SC & ST
Concept, constitutional provision, problems and programmes for their
development – control and state schemes – Role of Professional Social
Workers, NGO’s in the development of SC & ST, Refugees and displaced.
References
1. Chakravarthy, Sukhamoy, (1996), Development Planning the Indian
Experience, Oxford University Press.
2. Cottrell, Stella, (2003), Skills for Success, The Personal Development
Planning Handbook, Palgrave.
3. Dahiya, S.B., (1988), Development Planning Models, Inter India.
4. Kabra Kamal Nayan, (1997), Development Planning in India Exploring an
Alternative Approach, Sage Publications, Delhi.
5. Parman Mary, (1993), Development Planning in India, Reliance Publication.
SPECIALIZATION – HUMAN RESOURCE AND MANAGEMENT
Paper – XVI – Industrial Relations And Labour Welfare
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To assist the students to acquire a global as well as local perspective on
Industrial Relations and trade unions, labour welfare, the facts and its history.
_ To sensitize the students to adopt suitable attitudes for practice of Industrial
Relations
_ To help the students see the need for appropriate skills in this regard.
Part – A Industrial Relations
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Industrial Relations; Concept, characteristics of model industrial relations
system.
Industrial Relations at Plant and Shop Floor Level: Discipline, domestic
enquiry, and grievance settlement procedure.
Industrial Conflicts : Concepts of industrial peace and industrial conflict, cause
and consequence of industrial conflict, Strikes and Lock-outs; Meditation,
Conciliation. Arbitration and adjudication Statutory and Non-Statutory
machinery for prevention and settlement of disputes.
Trade Unions : Trade unionism in India, and its role in Industrial relations.
Wage and Salary Administration : Definition of wages, wage theories, types of
wages : wage determination: Wage structure, wage differentials, wage
Standardization, wage policy, Wage incentives, bonus and profit sharing.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Collective Bargaining : Meaning, theories, goal, phases, pre-requisites,
principles, strategies and negotiation skills, factors influencing collective
bargaining; collective agreements, Productivity bargaining.
Employee Empowerment : Worker’s Education – purpose, objectives,
experiments in India : Worker’s participation in Management – Meaning and
scope of industrial democracy
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Emerging Trends in Industrial Relations : Globalization and Liberalization and
its impact : Employer federations in India; International labour Organisation and
its impact.
Part – B Labour Welfare
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Labour Welfare : Concept, Philosophies, need, objectives, principles, scope and
limitations of labour welfare; Historical development of labour welfare in India.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Statutory and Non-Statutory Welfare Provisions : Housing, education, family
Planning, transport, recreation and additional health facilities; Industrial
Counseling-Pre-retirement, Quality of work life.
Social security : Concept and Scope of Social security, social assistance and
social insurance; Social security measures in India.
References :
1. Agnihotri V., Industrial Relations in India, Atma Ram and Sons, Delhi.
2. Arya, V.P., Strikes, Lockouts and Gheraoes, Oxford & I.B.H. Publishing Co.,
New Delhi.
3. Desai, A.M. Vandana Dole, Industrial Social Work, Tata Institute of Social
Sciences.
4. Dufty, N.F. Industrial Relations in India, Allied Publishers, Bombay.
5. Government of India, Report of the Study Group on Worker Participation
in Management, Publications Division, New Delhi.
6. Karnik, V.B., Strikes in India, Manaktlas, Bombay.
7. Krishna C.S., (1989), Labour Movement in Tamil Nadu, K.P. Bagchi & Co.
8. Mamoria, C.B., (1991), Dynamics of Industrial Relations, Hill House Press.
9. Mathur, A.S., Labour Policy and Industrial Relations in India, Asia
Publishing House, Bombay.
10. Moorthy. V. Principles of Labour Welfare, Gupta Brothers, Visakapatnam,
11. Myers, C.A and Kannappa, S., Industrial relations in India, Asia Publishing
House, Bombay.
12. Nirmal Singh & Bhatia, (2000), Industrial Relations & Collective
Bargaining, Dehorah Prayer Group.
13. Panicker P.T.K. and Other, Employee Participation in Share Capital, Madras
School of Social Work. Madras.
14. Patil, (1993), Collective Bargaining Perspective & Practices, Universal Law
Publication.
15. Patil, B.R., Conciliation in India, Chugh Publications.
16. Punekar, S.D. & Others, Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial
Relations, Himalaya, Bombay.
17. Ramanujam, G., (1990), Indian Labour Movement, Sterling Publishers, New
Delhi.
18. Sarma, A.M, Aspects of Labour Welfare and Social Security, Himalaya,
Bombay.
19. Subramanian, K.N., Labour Management Relations in India, Asia Publishing
House, Bombay.
20. Vaid, K.N., Labour Welfare in India, Sri Ram Center for Industrial Relations,
New Delhi.
SPECIALIZATION – MEDICAL AND PSYCHIATRIC SOCIAL WORK
Paper – XVI – Community Health Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
To develop an understanding of the health care system in India, health policies
and legislative provision relating to health.
• To develop an understanding of the existing programmes and services at local,
national and international levels and the need for a preventive and developmental approach in the field of health.
• To develop skill in programmes planning and education for different target
groups about handling of their health problems.
• To develop a holistic and integrated approach to social approach to social work
practice in the field of health.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Public health – concept and development in India : Organization and
administration of Health Care at the Center, State, District, Municipality and
Village level; health planning in India; Health committees; 11th Five Years Plan and
its relation to Health Care.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Community Health Care – changing concepts; primary health care for all; health
status and health problems; health care systems – primary health center; private
health systems; indigenous systems; voluntary health systems; role of Professionalo Social Worker in community health.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Health Legislations and Policies
ESI Act, 1948, Amendment, 1975
MTP Act, 1971
Doctors, patients and the consumer protection act, 1986
Persons With Disability Act, 1995
Environment Protection Act
National Health Policy, 1983
The Population Policy
Health for all 2000
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
National Health programmes
Family welfare; Maternal & Child Health, ICDS; School Health Programmes,
National Rural Health Mission (NRHM), UIP NEMP; NLEP; NTP; Diarrhoeal disease control Programme: IDD: AIDS Control programme : National Programme for control of blidness: Health Programmes in the 11th Five Year Plan, welfare measures for the physically challenged; International Health organizations (WHO, UNCEF, Red Cross)
State health programmes for weaker sections, Physically challenged and
developmentally challenged.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
National Mental Health programme
Research applications in health – sources of health information –
epidemiological and vital statistics; role of ICMR in health research.
References
1. Banerjee U. (1977), Health Administration in Metropolis, Abhinav Publications, New Delhi.
2. Bose A & Desai P B (1982), Studies in the social dynamics of Primary Health Care : Hindustan Publishing Co. Delhi.
3. Charns M.P. & Schaeffer M.J. (1983), Health Care Organization – A Model for Management; Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey.
4. Hanlon J.H. (1975), Principles of Public Health Administration, C.V. Mosby Co. Tokyo.
5. Javaratham J (ed.) (1993), Occupational Health in Developing Countries,
Oxford University Press, Oxford.
6. Miller D., (1976), Dimensions of Community Health, C Brown Co.
7. Pandy R & Kahere V. (1997), Activist’s handbook of occupational Health &
safety; Society for participatory research in Asis, New Delhi.
8. Philips D.R. (1990), Health & Health care in the third world, Long man
Scientific and technical, New York.
SPECIALISATION : SOCIAL WORK WITH FAMILIES
Paper – XVII – Family Social Work Total Teaching Hours : 60
Introduction
This course promotes an understanding of the changing norms of the family social
systems and development opportunities throughout its cycle. It also aims to develop
skills in identifying scope for reform and positive awareness for need of a healthy
family unit.
Objectives
_ Understand normative and changing norms of the institution of family and
variations in them with reference to the family social ecology.
_ Understand the implications of family norms for status of individuals and
developmental opportunities in the family by age and gender.
_ Encourage study of the process of family socialization and understand family
norms ecology and dynamics.
_ Understand dynamics of family interactions and developmental tasks through
the family life span, in the context of family norms and family ecology.
_ Develop skills in identifying the need for reforms in family norms and creating
public awareness in this area.
_ Develop skills in writing holistic family case studies and carrying out family
need assessment for identifying areas of intervention.
_ Develop positive attitude to support understanding the need of a healthy family
unit.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Theoretical and conceptual frame works to study family
Origin and evolution of family and marriage
Ideology of family rights and responsibilities
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Normative family functions and structure and changes
Normative family and marriage functions and structure, ethnicity and socioeconomic
background.
Social changes and changes in family and marriage functions and structure.
Implications for the family and its members.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Alternative Family and Marriage Patterns and Structure Dual earner / career facilities
Single parent families Female headed households Childless families Reconstituted / Step families Consensual unions
Homosexual families
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Family Socialization of Child, Family
Family interaction
Family development / Family life cycle
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Positive Parenting.
Responsible parent hood and child care, planning ones family - the choice of suitable
methods for family planning.
References
1. Desai, M (ed.) (1994), Family and Intervention: A Course Compendium,
Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Bombay.
2. Engles, F., (1994), Origin of the Family, Private Property and the State,
People’s Publishing House, Bombay.
3. Hartman, A, and Laird, J (1982), Family Centred Social Work Practice, Free
Press, New York.
4. Horchschild., A., (1989), The Second Shift : Working Parents and the
Revolution at Home, Viking, New York.
5. Khasgiwala, A., (1993), Social Work Perspectives, Anmol Publications, New
Delhi.
6. Klein, D.M. and White, J.M., (1996), Family Theories : An Introduction, Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications.
7. Raju M.L. and Krishna, G.R. (eds.) (1996), Future of Indian Family Challenges for Social Work Education, Tirupathi : Sri Padmavathi Mahila Visvavidyalayam,.
8. Special Issue of The Indian Journal of Social Work on “Family Development”, Tata Institute of Social Sciences, Mumbai.
9. Uberoi, P. (2000), The Family in India : Beyond the Nuclear Versus Joint
Debate, Occasional Paper in Sociology, Institute of Economic Growth, Delhi.
SPECIALISATION : COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT AND EMPOWERMENT
Paper – XVII – Entrepreneurship Development
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To provide an understanding, nature and process of entrepreneurship
development
_ To motivate the students to go for entrepreneurship development
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Evolution of Entrepreneurship: Nature, Elements, Interactive Process.
Entrepreneur and Entrepreneurship: Importance of Entrepreneurs – Characteristics and Competencies – Enterprise culture – Role of Entrepreneurs in Economic development.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Developing the Entrepreneurship Plan : Environmental Assessment, Opportunities in Education. Corporate field.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Managing Entrepreneurship Growth: Development stages. Financial aspects of Entrepreneurship.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Entrepreneurship – Personality characteristics – Social and cultural determinants. Skills required. Entrepreneurship – Factors related to success and failure – preparation of project proposal.
Unit V (12 Hrs)
Small Scale Industry – Definition and meaning – Classification – Characteristics. Importance of SSI. Exports and SSI Sector – financial institutions – SSIs.
References
1. Curtis, E.T., Megginson, L.C. Scott, C.R. Trueblodd, L.R. (1975), Effective Small Business Management, Business Publications, Dallas, Texas.
2. Curtis, E.T., Megginson, L.C. Scott, C.R. Trueblodd, L.R. (1975), Successful Small Business Management, Business Publications, Dallas, Texas.
3. Donald F. Kuratko, Richard M. Hodgetts, (2001), Entrepreneurship – A Contemporary Approach, Harcourt College Publisher, London.
4. Gupta M.C., (1987), Entrepreneurship in Small Scale Industry, Anmol Publications, New Delhi.
5. Lambden, Johnc and Targett, David, (1990), Small Business Finance – A Simple Approach, Pitman Publishing, London.
SPECIALISATION : HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT
Paper – XVII – Organizational Behaviour and Organizational Development
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
_ To help students build a knowledge base appropriate to Personal Management
and Organizational Behaviour.
_ To enable the students to perceive and develop the attitudes required for the
successful application of personnel management and organizational Behaviour
_ To assist them to perceive develop the skills appropriate to the field practices.
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Organizational Behaviour, History, evolution, concept, behavioural Sciences,
Organizational types, conceptual models, Types of Personality.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Dynamics of Organizational Behaviour, Perception, Managerial leadership,
process, styles, types and theories, group dynamics, team building.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Human Behaviour at Work : Models and theories of motivation; attitude, job
satisfaction, morale, frustration, conflict and stress management.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Organizational Development : The concept, theory, scope and practice of
organizational development, organizational culture design, organizational
change.
UNIT V (12 Hrs)
Operational research – Network analysis, PERT – CPM, Process Mapping.
References
1. Dwivedi, R.S. (1982), Management of Human Resources, Oxford Publishing
Co., Bombay.
2. Frence, Wemdell and Cecil, (1995), Organization Development, Prentice –
Hall of India Ltd., New Delhi.
3. Luthans, Fred, (1995), Organizational Behaviour, McGraw Hill Ltd.,
Singapore.
4. Maier, Norman, (1983), Psychology in Industry, Oxford Publishing Co.,
Bombay.
5. Ouchi, William, (1981), Theory Z, Avon Books, New York.
6. Pareekh, Udai, (1998), Organizational Behaviour & Process, Rawat
Publications, Jaipur.
7. Robbins, Stephen, (1994), Essential Organizational Behaviour, Prentice Hall
of India Ltd, New Delhi.
8. Szilagyi, Andrew & Marc Wallance, (1997), Organizational Behaviour &
Performance, Scott Foresman and Co., London.
SPECIALIZATION – MEDICAL AND PSYCHIATRIC SOCIAL WORK
Paper – XVII – Psychiatric Social Work Practice
Total Teaching Hours: 60
Objectives
• To develop the capacity for critical assessment of mental health needs and
problems of various vulnerable groups in the Indian context and develop social
work methods in the prevention and promotion of health.
• To acquire knowledge of various treatments approaches and the skill to apply
the same to meet mental health needs of the people.
• To appreciate the preventive and promotive approaches to mental health and develop the ability to apply it.
• To critically review the institutional approaches and the need for non-institutional
alternatives.
• To understand the application of mental health interventions in special settings.
Unit I (12 hrs)
Life – Stress and Coping: Definition of stress and coping. Analysis of Stress and Mental health problems among children, adolescents, women, occupational groups, workers and the elderly. Coping with stress and crisis, use of internal and external resources in coping.
Unit II (12 hrs)
Social work treatment – Theory and Models
Psychoanalytical, Psycho-social, Transactional Analysis, Life Model, Family
Centred treatment, Tasks Centred, Crisis intervention, Behaviour modification,
Cognitive therapy, Strength Based/ Resilience Model, Evidence Based Practice
Unit III (12 hrs)
Psychiatric Social Work in special settings:
a) Child mental health and psychiatric social work practice - social work practice in
child guidance clinic. Prevention and promotive mental health interventions in family,
school, neighborhood and community settings.
b) Social work practice in treatment centres for substance abuse – deaddiction, recovery, relapse prevention and aftercare centres.
Unit IV (12 hrs)
c) Psychiatric Social Work Practice in crisis intervention centres and with
special groups such as rape victims and HIV / AIDS patients.
d) Disaster mental health and psychosocial care – Psychosocial care in response to disasters, Psychosocial care in recent disasters in India. Stress management of care givers. Disaster preparedness. Training for psychosocial care.
e) Geriatric Mental health – Mental health Interventions and prevention of mental health problems among the elderly and their families. Dealing with stress of caregivers.
Unit V (12 hrs)
Mental health Policies and Legislation in India; National Mental Health programmes. Rights of the mentally ill. Designing and implementing programmes that promote mental health in communities.
Research – single case evaluation; qualitative and action research on mental health issues; monitoring and evaluation programmes; case study of models of mental health care in Chennai – TTK Hospitals, Banyan and SCARF.
References:
1. Ahuja, Niraj (2002) A Short textbook of Psychiatry, Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers Ltd., New Delhi.
2. Berriors G.E. & Dawson J.H. (1983) Treatment and management in adult psychiatry;
Bailliere Tindall, London.
3.Bharat S. Desai M (eds) (1991) Research on family with problems in India, issues and
implication. Vol.1&2, unit for family studies.Mumbai Tata Institute of Social Sciences.
4.Lakshminaraya, Rashmi, Srinivasa Murthy, R., Diaz Joseph O. Prewitt, Editors (2004)
Disaster Mental Health In India, Indian Red Cross Society
5.DGHS (190) National mental health programme for India Progress report (1982 – 90)
DGHS New Delhi
6. Ellis, Albert (1967) Reason and emotion in Psychotherapy. NY; Lyle Stuart.
Gerald Caplin (1961) An approach to community Mental Heatlh, Grun and Straton
7.Goldstein E. (1984) Ego psychology and social work practice Free Press
8. Govt. of India (1982) National Mental Health Program for India, New Delhi Ministry
of Health and Family Welfare
9.Goldstein H. (!979) Social Work Practice a unitary approach Caroloine:University of
South Caroline Press.
10 Hartman and Lairdj (1983) Family Centered Social Work Practice, The Free Press. A
Division of Macmillan, New York.
11. Jehu, Derek et al (!972) Behaviour modification in social work : London, Wiley –
Inter science.
12 Kaplan, H.L. Freedman A.M. & Sadock b.J. (1980) Comprehensive Text book of
Psychiatry (3rd ed.) vols. 1, 2 & 3. Wiliams & Wilkins, Baltimore / London.
13. Kappur, N. Sheppard, Ralph & Renate (eds.) (1993) Child Mental Health –
Proceedings of Indo-US Symposium NIMHANS & ADAMHA
14. Levant Ronad F (1984) Family therapy, Prentice Hall of India PVT Ltd.
15. Mane P. & Gandevia K. (eds) (1992) Mental Health in India. Issues and
concerns, Mumbai, Tata Institute of Social Sciences.
16. Roberts, Roberts W & Roberts H (1970) Theories of Social Casework, Chicago,
University of Chicago Press.
17.Turner (ED) Turner F (ED) 1983 Social Work Treatment – The Free Press Differential
Diagnosis and Treatment in Social Work. The free Press. Third Edition.
18.Verma, Ratna (1991) Psychiatric Social Work In India, Sage Publications, New
Delhi,.
19.World Health Organization (1992) Innovative Approaches in Mental Health Care.
Psycho Social Interventions and Case Management. Division of Mental Health Geneva
ELECTIVE – I
Paper – XVII – Health Information and Health Education
Total Teaching Hours : 60
Objectives
• To understand critical reflection, action in relation to health problems
• To develop Scientific attitude to health conditions
Unit I (12 Hrs)
Concept of health, hygiene, mental health, community mental health, community psychiatry, normality and abnormality.
Changing perspective of health care and social work practice in the field of health. Programs for meeting health care problems: review of various health care provisions.
Concept of primary health care, principles and approaches of PHC.
Unit II (12 Hrs)
Symptoms, causes, prevention, treatment and control of the following diseases:
Major communicable diseases - Leprosy, TB, STD, Poliomyelitis, malaria, cholera, typhoid, diarrhea and AIDS.
Major non-communicable diseases: cancer, diabetes, Hypertension and Cardiac disorder.
Unit III (12 Hrs)
Physical disabilities: visual impairment, hearing impairment, speech impairment, and locomotor handicap.
Clinical manifestation of psychoses, neuroses, psychosomatic disorders, mental retardation, epilepsy, alcoholism and drug addiction.
Clinical manifestations of malnutrition: deficiency disorders.
Unit IV (12 Hrs)
Health work in the community; identifying basic health problems and interest
groups. Work with existing health services, governmental, non-governmental.
Organize health education programmes in the community.
Role of social work in community health.
Unit V 12 Hrs)
Health Education Workshop – Health Education – definitions, principles,
preparation and use of audio visual aids, Folklore, Puppets, Vllupattu, Flannel
Graph, Flipchart, Flash cards, drawing cartoons, posters and charts. Role play.
Low cost nutritive food domonstration.
References :
1.Miller R.S. Primary Health Care More Than Medicine; 1982 Prentice Hall Inc., London
2. Miller D. Dimensions of Community Health; 1975 C. Brown Co. Publications, Iowa.
3.Mohan Rao (Ed) Disinvesting in Health - The World Bank's Prescriptions 1995 for
Health
4. Nanda V.K. 1997 Health Education; Anmol Publications, Delhi.
5.Pandey R & Kanhere V. Activists Handbook of Occupational Health & Safety; 1997
Society for Participatory Research in Asia, Delhi.
6.Park J. E & Park K. Text book of Preventive and Social Medicine; 1997 M/s. Banarsidas Bhanot, Jabalpur.
7. Phillips D.R Primary Health Care - Health and Health Care in the Third World
8. Saleebey, Dennis, (ed) (2006), The Strengths Perspective in Social Work Practice, 4th ed,
Pearson Education, New York
9. Sekar, K. Parthasarathy,R., Muralidhar,D. Chandrasekhar Rao (2007) Handbook of
Psychiatric Social Work, NIMHANS, Bangalore
10.Smith B.C. Community Health - An Epidemiological Approach; 1978 McMillan
Publishing Co. New York.
11. WHO, 1972 Health Hazards in the Human Environment, WHO, Geneva
Paper – XIX – Research Project
Every student is required to complete a research project report under the supervision
and guidance of a Faculty of the Department who will guide the students on topics elated to Social Work education, practice, or some aspects of the field of specialization chosen by him / her. A student is required a submit two copies of the project report to the college on or before March 31st, of which the college should forward one copy to the University at least 15 days before to commencement of examinations. The total credits for Research Project is Four . Total Marks 100. Project Report - Report presentation : 80 Evaluation by External only. Viva voce carries : 20 (Both Internal and External)
Block Placement
After satisfactory completion of concurrent field work during the two academic years and after the Final University Examination, every student of the M.SW (Second year) is placed for Block Field Work for a period of 30 days for a full- time work in an approved agency or project in or outside Tamil Nadu. The Department approves agencies / projects form amongst a large number of them, keeping in mind the availability of learning opportunities for the students. All expenses in this connection have to be borne by the students themselves. The purpose of Block Field work is to broaden the student’s perspectives of development and welfare concerns, offer pre-employment work experiences, to him/.her and enable this/her to assume professional responsibilities after graduation. A students is not eligible for the degree unless he/she had completed Block Field Work to the satisfaction of the Department. At the conclusion of Block Field Practicum Agency Supervisor sends a confidential Report about the performance of the student to the Department. The students in his /her part also submits a comprehensive report of the Block Field practicum. It carries two credits.
.
21. M.A. DEGREE COURSE IN TAMIZHIAL
SYLLABUS
_‹wh« gUt«
(Τηιρδ Σεμεστερ)
jhŸ 9 - r§f ïy¡»a«-I
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ |Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility |
|Pre-requisities | |
|Objectives of the Course | |
|ℵϒ…∫⎯′?…⎧ ⊂∪′⎮®÷⎦ |⇐∨ 1 |↔÷↵ϒ⎣∨ 1 − 10 ℵϒ…⎠÷⎦ |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 | |
| |⇐∨ 2 | |
| |Unit 2 |®∪↵ϒ⎣∨ 1 − 20 ℵϒ…⎠÷⎦ |
| |⇐∨ 3 |↵⎫∪′♦| 1 − 20 ℵϒ…⎠÷⎦ |
| |Unit 3 | |
| |⇐∨ 4 |⊂∨⌠ƒ⎯ϒ♦÷ 1 −20 ℵϒ…⎠÷⎦ |
| |Unit 4 | |
| |⇐∨ 5 |÷⊗′∫ƒ⎯ϒ♦÷ 1 − 10 ℵϒ…⎠÷⎦ |
| |Unit 5 | |
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) ℵ℘′⌠∠♦℘ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ≡⎨÷⎮ ®⊗⊕⎟÷⎦, 1977, ↔÷↵ϒ⎣∨, ℑ∨ℵ⎯′⎮®, ⎯′∏ƒ↵⎠♣⊕⊗′
Recommended Texts : ƒ⎯⎬⊃′⌠⎯′ℜ ♦≡⊕ ≡′∫⎯ϒ⌠⎯ 〈⎫ℵ⎯′⎮®⎧ ÷∅÷⌡, ƒ≡⎬♦⊃ − 600 001
2. ≡⎨÷⎮ ®⊗⊕⎟÷⎦, 1970, ®∪↵ϒ⎣∨, ©⎯⎠ ℵ⎯′⎮®, ⎯′∏ƒ↵⎠♣⊕⊗′
ƒ⎯⎬⊃′⌠⎯′ℜ ♦≡⊕ ≡′∫⎯ϒ⌠⎯ 〈⎫ℵ⎯′⎮®⎧ ÷∅÷⌡, ƒ≡⎬♦⊃ − 600 001
3. ≡⎨÷⎮ ®⊗⊕⎟÷⎦, 1976, ↵⎫∪′♦|, ℑ∨ℵ⎯′⎮®, ⎯′∏ƒ↵⎠♣⊕⊗′
ƒ⎯⎬⊃′⌠⎯′ℜ ♦≡⊕ ≡′∫⎯ϒ⌠⎯ 〈⎫ℵ⎯′⎮®⎧ ÷∅÷⌡, ƒ≡⎬♦⊃ − 600 001
4. ≡⎨÷⎮ ®⊗⊕⎟÷⎦, 1985, ⊂∨⌠ƒ⎯ϒ♦÷, ©⎯⎠ ℵ⎯′⎮®, ⎯ℑ′⎥⎮ ℵ⎠÷♦⊗⎧÷∅÷⌡,
⎯⎪≡ϒ⎜⎟
5. ≡⎨÷⎮ ®⊗⊕⎟÷⎦, 1925, ÷⊗′∫ƒ⎯ϒ♦÷, ⎯ℑ′⎥⎮ ℵ⎠÷♦⊗⎧÷∅÷⌡, ⎯⎪≡ϒ⎜⎟
(2) ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ±?. ♦⊕ℜϒ®℘′⎮ℵ′⎦♦∩ (ℵ. ←.) − ≡⎨÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡
Reference Books : 2. ±?. ♦⊕ℜϒ®℘′⎮ℵ′⎦♦∩ − ≡⎨÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ ←℘ϒ⎞⎩≡′
3. ©. ⊕℘⎯℘ϒ≡⊃ϒ⎟ − ℵ∅⌠⎯ℑ′⎥ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ∫⎯′⎠ ⎭ℜ⎫♦÷
4. ↔℘⎨÷. ⎭℘ϒℑ⊗′⎨÷⌡, ≡⎨÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ∫⎯′⎠ ♣⊕⌠⎯⎟
5. ⊕. ⊆. ℵ. ℑϒ|′⎧÷⌡, ⎯ℑ′⎥⎧ ÷ϒ⎯⎠
(3) Website, e-learning resources.
jhŸ 10 - ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡ Ι
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ |Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility |
|Pre-requisities | |
|Objectives of the Course | |
|ℵϒ…∫⎯′?…⎧ ⊂∪′⎮®÷⎦ |⇐∨ 1 |〈⎬ℑ℘® |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 | |
| |⇐∨ 2 | |
| |Unit 2 |ƒℑϒ∅′ℑ℘® |
| |⇐∨ 3 |ℵ′∪⎮ℵ′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 3 | |
| |⇐∨ 4 |®|℘′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 4 | |
| |⇐∨ 5 |ƒ⎯ϒ♦÷ℑ℘® |
| |Unit 5 | |
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) ℵ℘′⌠∠♦℘ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⎟, 2000, ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ((ïs«óuz® - ciu) ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡, ℑ∨ℵ⎯′⎮®,
Recommended Texts : ⎯′∏ƒ↵⎠♣⊕⊗′ ƒ⎯⎬⊃′⌠⎯′ℜ ♦≡⊕≡′∫⎯ϒ⌠⎯ 〈⎫ℵ⎯′⎮®⎧ ÷∅÷⌡, ƒ≡⎬♦⊃ − 600 018
ciuÆš Édh¡fŸ miktJ jÉ®¡f¥g£lJ
(2) ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ©. ≡〉©÷⌡ℵ′⎦♦∩ (ℵ.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
Reference Books : 2. ≡. ♣⊕. ⊆⎮ℵ′℘ℑ|′ℜ⌡ (ℵ.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
3. ⊂. ⊆⌠⎯℘©⎟∫⎯′ (ℵ.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
4. ƒ≡. ♦⊕. ≡〉©÷⌡ − ±¬∫⎯′⊗⎧÷|⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈
5. ⎯′. ©∏÷℘∫⎯′⊃⌡ − ⎯ℑ′⎥ ±¬∫⎯′ℜ⎠ ↔⎬∨⌡ ⎭⎬∨⌡
(3) Website, e-learning resources.
jhŸ 11 - ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡ Ι
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ |Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility |
|Pre-requisities | |
|Objectives of the Course | |
|ℵϒ…∫⎯′?…⎧ ⊂∪′⎮®÷⎦ |⇐∨ 1 |÷′∩⊕′ℜϒ⎧÷⌡ |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 | |
| |⇐∨ 2 |♣⊕⎫∨♦ℑℜ′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 2 | |
| |⇐∨ 3 |♣⊕⎫∨♦ℑℑℜ⎨÷′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 3 | |
| |⇐∨ 4 |⊕′∩′ℑ℘® |
| |Unit 4 | |
| |⇐∨ 5 |ƒℵℜ℘′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 5 | |
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) ℵ℘′⌠∠♦℘ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⎟, 2000, ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡, nrdhtiua« ℑ∨ℵ⎯′⎮®, ⎯′∏ƒ↵⎠♣⊕⊗′
Recommended Texts : ƒ⎯⎬⊃′⌠⎯′ℜ ♦≡⊕ ≡′∫⎯ϒ⌠⎯ 〈⎫ℵ⎯′⎮®⎧ ÷∅÷⌡, ƒ≡⎬♦⊃ − 600 018
ciuÆš Édh¡fŸ miktJ jÉ®¡f¥g£lJ
(2) ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ©. ≡〉©÷⌡ℵ′⎦♦∩, (±. ←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
Reference Books : 2. ≡.♣⊕. ⊆⎮ℵ′℘ℑ|′ℜ⌡ (ℵ. ←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
3. ⊂. ⊆⌠⎯℘©⎟∫⎯′ (±.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
4. ƒ≡. ♦⊕. ≡〉©÷⌡ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗′⊗⎧÷|⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈
5. ♣ℑϒ. ⎭⊆℘♣ℜ⎠ − ƒℵℜ⎟⎩ƒ≡ϒ⎠, ⎭♦…⎩ƒ≡ϒ⎠, ↓℘′⎩ƒ≡ϒ⎠, ⊕′♦⊃⎩ƒ≡ϒ⎠.
(3) Website, e-learning resources.
jhŸ 1 2 - ⎯ℑ′¬⎧⊂⎧ ÷|′⊃′ℜ′⎬ ℵℜ⎬ℵϒ∈
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ |Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility |
|Pre-requisities | |
|Objectives of the Course | |
|ℵϒ…∫⎯′?…⎧ ⊂∪′⎮®÷⎦ |⇐∨ 1 |÷|′⊃′ − ƒℵϒ∠ ↔∪′©÷⌡ − ÷|′⊃′ ⊕℘⊗ϒ∨ − ⊕⎬ƒℵϒ∏∧⌡ |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 |ƒℑ⎬ƒℵϒ∏∧⌡ (Ηαρδωαρδ ανδ Σοφτωαρε) − ÷|′⊃′ℜ′⎬ ↔♦ℑ⎮®⎩ |
| | |ƒ≡ℜ⎠ℵϒ∈ − ÷|′⊃′ℜ′⎬ ⎭⎬♦∪ℜ ⊕∩⎟⎩≡′ |
| |⇐∨ 2 |÷|′⊃′ ƒℑϒ∅′÷∧⌡ ↵′℘⎠ ↓∏⊕ϒ⎧÷©⌡ (Χομπυτερ Λανγυαγε & |
| |Unit 2 |Προγραμμινγ) ⎭ℜ⌠⎯′℘ ƒℑϒ∅′ − ÷?∈ ƒℑϒ∅′ − ↓ℜ⎟↵′♦⊗ ƒℑϒ∅′ − |
| | |ƒℑ⎬ƒℵϒ∏⎦ ↵′℘⎠ ↓∏⊕ϒ⎧÷⌡ (Σοφτωαρε Προγραμμινγ) − ƒ≡ℜ⎫ℵϒ?∈ |
| | |ƒℑ⎬ƒℵϒ∏⎦ (Σψστεμ Σοφτωαρε) − ℵℜ⎬ℵϒ?∈ ƒℑ⎬ƒℵϒ∏⎦ (“ππλιχατιον |
| | |Σοφτωαρε) − ℵ⎠⎛…÷⌡ (Μυλτιμεδια) − ⎭♦|ℜ⌡ (Ιντερνετ)_ ℑ′⎬⊃⎪≡⎠ |
| | |(Ε−μαιλ) − ÷|′⊃′ℜ′⎬ ″♦⊃ℜ ℵℜ⎬ℵϒ∈÷⎦. |
| |⇐∨ 3 |÷|′⊃′ ƒℑϒ∅′ℜ′ℜ⎠ (Χομπυτατιοναλ Λινγυιστιχσ) − ⎭ℜ⎫♦÷ ƒℑϒ∅′÷⎦ ←⎞⋅ |
| |Unit 3 |(Νατυραλ Λανγυαγε Προχεσσινγ − (ΝΛΠ)) − ⎭ℜ⌠⎯′℘ ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮®(Μαχηινεσ |
| | |Τρανσλατιον) − ÷|′⊃′ ↔÷℘ϒ⎯′ℜ′ℜ⎠ (Χομπυτατιοναλ Λεξιχογραπηψ) − ⎯℘⋅ |
| | |ƒℑϒ∅′ℜ′ℜ⎠ (Χορπυσ Λινγυιστιχσ) − ƒ≡ϒ⎠ ℵ′℘′⎮ℵϒ⎬ (Παρσερ) |
| |⇐∨ 4 |×∩′ ⊕∅′ ±¬∫∠⎮ ℵ⊇⎮ℵϒ⎬ (Οπτιχαλ Χηαραχτερ Ρεχογνιζε) − ⊂℘⎠ |
| |Unit 4 |↔∪′⊕ϒ⎬ (ςοιχε Ρεχογνιζερ) − ÷|′⊃′ ♣↵ϒ⎧÷′⎠ ƒℑϒ∅′ ←⎞⋅ − ƒℑϒ∅′ |
| | |♣↵ϒ⎧÷′⎠ ÷|′⊃′ ←⎞⋅ − ƒ≡ℜ⎫♦÷ ↔∪′⋅∫ ⎯′∪⎬− ÷|′⊃′ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ←⎞⋅. |
| |⇐∨ 5 |⎯ℑ′⎥⎩ ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗ϒ∩⎟ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗ϒ∩℘′⎠ ⎭…⌡ ƒℵ∨⌡ ƒℑϒ∅′⎧ ÷∏⊕′÷⎦ − |
| |Unit 5 |ƒ≡ϒ⎫ℵ′♦∅ ⎯′∏∫⎯′ − ≡⌠⎯′⎮ℵ′♦∅ ⎯′∏∫⎯′ − ⎭⊗⎧÷|⎮ℵ′♦∅ ⎯′∏∫⎯′ − |
| | |ℵ⎠♣⊕∨ ↔÷℘ϒ⎯′÷⎦ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗♦…⋅ − ↔÷℘⊕℘′♦≡⎮ℵ∈∫⎯⎠ − ″♦⊃ℜ |
| | |ƒℑϒ∅′⎧÷∏⊕′÷⎦ − ℵ⎧÷ ⊕⊇⊕♦ℑ⎮® − ⎭♦…ƒ⊕∩′ ↔♦ℑ∫⎯⎠ − ℵ∫⎯′ |
| | |⊕⊇⊕♦ℑ⎮® − ±¬∫∠∏ − ℵ…⌡, ↔?…⊕♦| ⎭♦|∫⎯⎠ − ♣÷ϒ∈, ⊕?…⌡ |
| | |♣ℵϒ⎬∪♦⊕ ⊕♦℘⎯⎠ − ↔♦…⎮®⎮ ƒℵ?⊇ ↓∏⊕ϒ⎧⊂⎯⎠ − ↔⊇⎧⊂∪′⎮® |
| | |±〉|′…⎠ − ƒℵϒ?⊇…⎠ − ↔⎩≡⊇∫⎯⎠ |
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography
(1) ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ⊆⎮♦ℵℜϒ⎮ℵ′⎦♦∩ − ⎭ℜ⎫♦÷ ƒℑϒ∅′ ←⎞⋅
Reference Books : 2. ⊆?ϒ⎯ϒ − ⎭〉…⎟ƒ↵?
3. ƒ⊕. ÷′∏?|©⎟∫⎯′ − ÷|′⎮ƒℵϒ∪′ ïaY¡F ↔∪′©÷⌡ − m©zh gšfiy¡fHf«
4. ÷|′⊃′ ÷♦⊗⎩ƒ≡ϒ⎫÷⎦ − ÷⎫ℵ÷⌡ ®∫⎯÷ϒ⊗ℜ⌡
5. Ξαϖιερ − Ιντροδυχτιον το Χομπυτερ Σχιενχε
6. Ραϕαραμ − Ιντροδυχτιον το Χομπυτερ
7. Ματτηεωσ, Χ − “ν Ιντροδυχτιον το Νατυραλ Λανγυαγε Προχεσσινγ τηρουγη Προλογ.
8. r.ghÞfu‹ - jÄÊš fÂ¥bgh¿Æaš fÂ¥bgh¿Æš jÄœ - ckh gâ¥gf«, jŠir.
9. Kh. M©nlh Õ£l® - jÄG« fÂ¥bgh¿í« f‰gf« ò¤jfhya«.
10. Rg. â©z¥g‹ - fÂÅí« jÄœ¡f‰ã¤jY«
(3) Website, e-learning resources.
TLjš ghl¥ ãÇî - 1
⊕′∏⎮ℵ⎮ℵϒ…⌡ − Ις
ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ℘′ℜ⎠
⇐∨ 1: ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ⎟ →.ƒ⊕.℘ϒ. ℵ′∪⎮® − ≡©÷⎩⇑∅⎠ − ƒℵϒ∠ ⊕ϒ⎥⊕′⎠ →∈ℵϒ∈ −
⎭℘ϒ≡ϒ≡′ ƒ⎯ϒ…⎟® − ⎯ℑ′∅′÷ ↔℘≡′ℜ⎠ ↵′♦⊗ − ♣ℵ℘ϒℜ⎧ ÷?≡′ →∈ℵϒ∈
⇐∨ 2: ♦⊕⎧÷⌡ ↔∪⎮♣ℵϒ⎟ − ♣≡℘⎬ ℑϒ♣⎯⊕′ ⊂∏⊂⊗⎮ ♣ℵϒ℘ϒ?…⌡ − ♣÷ϒ⊕′⎠
∇♦∅⋅⎮ ♣ℵϒ℘ϒ?…⌡ − ⎭… ×∠⎧÷≤∈ ≡′⎧÷⎠ − ♣ℵ℘ϒℜ⎧ ÷?≡′ℜ′⊗′∏⌠∠ ⊕′⊗÷⎠ − ⊂⊇ ↔℘⊆ ⎭⎯⎥ ƒ⎯ϒ…⎨÷⎠ − ÷ϒ⌠⎯′ℜ⊇÷∧…⎬ ℑ≤〉∈⌡ ≡⌠⎯′⎮® − ↵≤⎯′⎧÷?≡′
→∈ℵϒ∈
⇐∨ 3: ⎯ℑ′⎥ ƒℑϒ∅′⎧ ÷ϒ⎮®⎮ ♣ℵϒ℘ϒ?…⌡ − ↵≤⎯′⎧÷?≡′ − ƒℵℜ⎟ ℑϒ⎫∪⌡ − ⎯′℘ϒ⊕′…⎟ ⎭ℜ⎧÷⌡
⇐∨ 4: ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ℘′⎬ ⎭⎯∅′ℜ⎫ ℵ|′÷⎦ − ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ℘′⎬ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈÷⎦ ƒℵ⎫∪ ƒ≡ℜ⎠
⊕⊇⊕⎨÷⎦ − ↔℘⊆ ←♦|÷⎦.
ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦:
1. ♣⊕. ←♦⊃©∫∠ (ℵ.←.) − ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ⎟ →.ƒ⊕.℘ϒ. ≡′⌠⎯♦⊃÷⎦ ƒ⎯ϒ⊂⎯′
2. ÷′. ⊕≤℘ℑ|′ (ƒ⎯ϒ.←.) − ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ⎟ ≡′⌠⎯♦⊃÷⎦
3. ℑϒ. ↵⎬⊃⎬ − ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ℘′ℜ⎠
4. ⎭℘ϒ. ≡⎧⊂ℵϒ⎞ (ℵ.←.) − ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ℘′ℜ⌡
5. ≡ϒℑ′ ≡′⎯⌡ℵ℘⊃ϒ⎟ − ⎯ℑ′∅⎟ ⎯♦⊗⊕⎟
6. ÷′. ⊕≤℘ℑ|′ − ƒℵ℘′ℜϒ℘′ℜ⎠
⊕′∏⎮ℵ⎮ℵϒ…⌡ −ς
×⎮ℵ′⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡
⇐∨ 1: ×⎮ℵ′⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡ − ⊕♦℘ℜ♦∪ − ⊕′∩⎧÷⌡ − ♣⎯ϒ⎫∪∫⎯′⎫÷ϒ⊃
↔⊇⎮ℵ♦…÷⎦ − ↔∪′⊕′ℜ⎠ −↓∩⊕′ℜ⎠ − ƒℑϒ∅′ℜ′ℜ⎠ − ←⎞⋅⎮
®∠♦ℑ÷⎦ − ℵℜ⎬÷⎦ − ÷∏∫∠ ♣⊕∨ℵϒ∈÷⎦.
⇐∨ 2:
×⎮ℵ′⊗⎧÷′ℜ ←⎞⋅ − ♣ℑ⊃ϒ∈÷∩′⎠ ⊕∩⎟⎩≡′ ⊕℘⊗ϒ∨ − ℵ′ƒ℘⎪⊆⎧
♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈ − ↔ƒℑ℘′⎧÷⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈ − ⎭⊕⎫∪′⎬ ⊕⎬♦ℑ ƒℑ⎬♦ℑ÷⎦ − ƒ≡⎠⊕ϒ⎧⊂ − ⎯¬⊕⎠ −″⎫∪⎠ − ℑ∏⋅⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈ − ×⎮ℵ′⊗⎧÷′ℜ
←⎞⋅ ƒ↵∪′ ©♦∪÷⎦ − ↔∪′⊕′ℜ⎠ ©♦∪ − ÷ϒ℘| ÷ϒ℘′ℜ⎧
♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈ − ↔⊇⎧÷∏∫∠⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈ − ⇐⎟⎯⊗∪⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈
⇐∨ 3: ♣⎯≡′ℜ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡ − ↓⊗÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡ − ↓⊗÷⎮ ƒℵϒ∠♦ℑ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡ − ↓⊗÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⎮ƒℵϒ∠♦ℑ⎧ ⇐∨÷⎦ − ×∏ƒℑϒ∅′ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ ×⎮ℵ≤∈ − ⎭∏ƒℑϒ∅′ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ ×⎮ℵ≤∈ − ℵ⎬ƒℑϒ∅′ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ ×⎮ℵ≤∈
⇐∨ 4: ×⎮ℵϒ⎞⋅⎧ ÷∩⎨÷⎦ − ♣ℑ⊃ϒ?∈ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⎨÷♣∩ϒ∈ ×⎮ℵ′…⎠ −
⊕…ƒℑϒ∅′ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⎨÷♣∩ϒ∈ ×⎮ℵ′…⎠ − ⎯′℘ϒ⊕′… ƒℑϒ∅′ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⎨÷♣∩ϒ∈ ×⎮ℵ′…⎠ − ℵ′∪ ⎭⌠⎯′ℜƒℑϒ∅′ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⎨÷♣∩ϒ∈ ×⎮ℵ′…⎠ −
⎯ℑ′∅′⎠ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ ×⎮ℵϒ⎞⋅ − ⊕∩⎟⎩≡′ ⊕℘⊗ϒ∨ −×⎮ℵϒ⎞⋅⎧⊂⎮ ℵ⎨⊂ℵ|′ ←⎫∪′ℜ ƒℵ∏ℑ⎧÷⎦ − ×⎮ℵϒ⎞⋅ ♣ℵϒ∠ℑϒ⊃ ↔∩⋅⎭⎠⊗ϒ♦ℑ⎧÷ϒ⊃ ÷ϒ℘|⎨÷⎦ − ⎭⎬♦∪ℜ ↔℘≡′ℜ⎠ ⇑∅⊗′⎠ ↔⎯⎬
⎭⎬∪′ℜ♦ℑℜϒ♦ℑ.
ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦
1. ÷. ♦÷⊗ϒ≡ℵ⎯′ − ×⎮ℵ′ℜ⎠ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡
2. ⎯ℑ′∅〉|⎠ − ×⎮ℵ′⊗⎧÷′ℜ ↔∪′©÷⌡, ≡⎨÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ ×⎮ℵ≤∈
(⎭∏ ƒ⎯ϒ⊂⎯′÷⎦)
3. ÷⎯′⎟. ℑ÷ϒ♣⎯⊕⎬ − ×⎮ℵ′⊗⎧÷′ℜ ♣↵ϒ⎧÷′⎠ ≡⎨÷ ÷ϒ⊗⌡
4. ?′. ?ϒ⎬≡ϒ©♣⊕⎠ − ×⎮ℵϒ⎞⋅⎧÷∩⎨÷⎦
5. ⊕. ≡⎩≡′⎯ϒ⊃⌠⎯⌡ − ×⎮ℵ′⊗⎧÷′ℜ⌡
eh‹fh« gUt«
jhŸ 1 3 - r§f ïy¡»a« ΙΙ-II
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ |Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility |
|Pre-requisities | |
|Objectives of the Course | |
|ℵϒ…∫⎯′?…⎧ ⊂∪′⎮®÷⎦ |⇐∨ 1 |⎯′∏©∏÷ϒ⎫∨⎮ℵ♦… − ©¬⊕∠⌡ |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 | |
| |⇐∨ 2 | |
| |Unit 2 |áWghzh‰W¥gil |
| |⇐∨ 3 |ℵ?⊇⊃⎮ℵϒ♦⊗ |
| |Unit 3 | |
| |⇐∨ 4 |©⎠♦⊗⎮ℵϒ?∈ − ©¬♦ℑ™⌡ |
| |Unit 4 | |
| |⇐∨ 5 |ƒ↵∈↵⎠⊕ϒ♦… |
| |Unit 5 | |
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) ℵ℘′⌠∠♦℘ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. −, 1986, ℵ∫∠⎮ℵϒ?∈, ↵′∅⎫ℵ…⎮ ℵ⎯′⎮®, ⎯ℑ′⎥⎮ ℵ⎠÷♦⊗⎧÷∅÷⌡, ⎯⎪≡ϒ⎜⎟
Recommended Texts :
(2) ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ⊆. ⊕′∫⎯′ℜϒ⊃⌠⎯⎬ − ⎯ℑ′∅⎟ ≡ϒ⎠®
Reference Books : 2. ℑϒ. ⎭℘ϒ≡ℑϒ|′⎧÷⊃ϒ⎟ − ℵ∫∠⎮ℵϒ?∈ ←℘ϒ⎞⎩≡′
3. ℑϒ. ⎭℘ϒ≡ℑϒ|′⎧÷⊃ϒ⎟ − ⎯ℑ′⎥ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ ⊕℘⊗ϒ∨ (≡⎨÷ ÷ϒ⊗⌡)
4. ⎯′. ƒ⎯. ♦≡. ≡′. 〈. ℵ. ÷∅÷⌡, ≡⎨÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ⎩ ƒ≡ϒ⎫ƒℵϒ∅′⋅
⊕℘′♦≡
5. ⊆. ƒ≡⎠⊗⎮ℵ⎬, ≡⎨÷ ⎭⊗⎧÷′ℜ∫ ♣⎯⎬ (©⎬∨ ƒ⎯ϒ⊂⎯′÷⎦)
(3) Website, e-learning resources.
jhŸ 1 4 - bjhšfh¥ãa« - vG¤jâfhu« ΙΙ
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ |Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility |
|Pre-requisities | |
|Objectives of the Course | |
|ℵϒ…∫⎯′?…⎧ ⊂∪′⎮®÷⎦ |⇐∨ 1 |↓∏ℵ′ℜ⎠ |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 | |
| |⇐∨ 2 | |
| |Unit 2 |↓ℜ′⎟ℑℜ⎨÷′ℜ⎠ |
| |⇐∨ 3 |®⎦∩′ℑℜ⎨÷′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 3 | |
| |⇐∨ 4 |⊂⎫∪′ℜ√÷℘⎮ ®|℘′ℜ⎠ Ι |
| |Unit 4 | |
| |⇐∨ 5 |⊂⎫∪′ℜ√÷℘⎮ ®|℘′ℜ⎠ ΙΙ |
| |Unit 5 | |
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) ℵ℘′⌠∠♦℘ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⎟, 2000, ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ −,sk;G+uzhH ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡, ℑ∨ℵ⎯′⎮®, ⎯′∏ƒ↵⎠♣⊕⊗′
Recommended Texts : ƒ⎯⎬⊃′⌠⎯′ℜ ♦≡⊕ ≡′∫⎯ϒ⌠⎯ 〈⎫ℵ⎯′⎮®⎧ ÷∅÷⌡, ƒ≡⎬♦⊃ − 600 018
ciuÆÈUªJ Édh¡fŸ miktJ jÉ®¡f¥g£lJ.
(2) ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ©. ≡〉©÷⌡ℵ′⎦♦∩ (±.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
Reference Books : 2. ≡. ƒ⊕. ⊆⎮ℵ′℘ℑ|′ℜ⌡ (ℵ.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
3. ⊂. ⊆⌠⎯℘©⎟∫⎯′ (±.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
4. ←. ≡′⊕⊗′⎨÷⊃ϒ⎟ − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ ↓♦℘⊕∩⌡
5. ⇑. ⎭⎬⊃ϒ≡′ − ±¬∫⎯′ℜ⎠
(3) Website, e-learning resources.
jhŸ 15 - bjhšfh¥ãa« - brhšyâfhu« ΙΙ
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ |Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility |
|Pre-requisities | |
|Objectives of the Course | |
|ℵϒ…∫⎯′?…⎧ ⊂∪′⎮®÷⎦ |⇐∨ 1 |⊕′♦⊃ℜ′ℜ⎠ Ι |
|Course Outline |Unit 1 | |
| |⇐∨ 2 | |
| |Unit 2 |⊕′♦⊃ℜ′ℜ⎠ ΙΙ |
| |⇐∨ 3 |⎭♦…ℜ′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 3 | |
| |⇐∨ 4 |↓℘′ℜ′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 4 | |
| |⇐∨ 5 |±⎩≡⊕′ℜ⎠ |
| |Unit 5 | |
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) ℵ℘′⌠∠♦℘ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⎟, 2000, ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡, nrdhtiua⎟,
ℑ∨ℵ⎯′⎮®, ⎯′∏ƒ↵⎠♣⊕⊗′
Recommended Texts : ƒ⎯⎬⊃′⌠⎯′ℜ ♦≡⊕ ≡′∫⎯ϒ⌠⎯ 〈⎫ℵ⎯′⎮®⎧ ÷∅÷⌡, ƒ≡⎬♦⊃ − 600 018
ciuÆÈUªJ Édh¡fŸ miktJ jÉ®¡f¥g£lJ.
(2) ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ©. ≡〉©÷⌡ℵ′⎦♦∩ (ℵ.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
Reference Books : 2. ≡. ƒ⊕. ⊆⎮ℵ′℘ℑ|′ℜ⌡ (ℵ.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
3. ⊂. ⊆⌠⎯℘©⎟∫⎯′ (ℵ.←.) − ƒ⎯ϒ⎠÷ϒ⎮ℵ′ℜ⌡ − ±¬∫⎯⎯′÷ϒ℘⌡
4. ⇑. ⎭⎬⊃ϒ≡′ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗′ℜ⎠
5. ƒℵϒ⎬. ♣÷ϒ⎯〉…℘ϒℑ⎬ − ⎯ℑ′∅′⊗⎧÷|⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈
(3) Website, e-learning resources.
ÉU¥g¥ghl« ςΙ
ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮ℵ′ℜ⎠
⇐∨ 1: ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮® − ⊕♦℘ℜ♦∪ − ⎭⎬♦∪ℜ ≡©÷ ↔℘≡′ℜ⎠ ƒℑϒ∅′ − ↔∪′⊕′ℜ⎠ ÷⎠⊕′⎩ ⇑∅⎠÷∩′⎠ ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮ℵ′⎬ ⎭⎬∪′ℜ♦ℑℜϒ♦ℑ.
⇐∨ 2 : ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮ℵϒ∩℘′⎬ ⎯⊂⎯′÷⎦ − ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮® ↔⊇⎮ℵ♦…⎧ ♣÷ϒ?ℵϒ∈÷⎦ − ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮® ©♦∪÷⎦.
⇐∨ 3: ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮® ⊕♦÷÷⎦ − ƒ≡ϒ⎠√⎧⊂⎩ ƒ≡ϒ⎠ ƒℑϒ∅′ ƒℵℜ⎟∫⎯⎠ ⎯¬⊕⎠
÷?…⎫∪ ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮® − ƒℑϒ∅′ℜϒ⎧÷⎮ ℵ♦…⎮® (Τρανσχρεατιον) − ⎭ℜ⌠⎯′℘ ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮® − ƒℑϒ∅′ℜϒ⎧÷⌡ ↔⎠⊗∠ ÷∏∫∠⎮ ƒℵℜ⎟⎮® − ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮® ↵♦… −
ƒℑϒ∅′ ƒℵℜ⎟⎮ℵ′⎠ ±¬⌡ ≡′⎧÷⎠÷∧⌡ ↔⊕⎫∪′⎫⊂℘′ℜ ⎯≤⎟⋅÷∧⌡.
⇐∨ 4: ƒℑϒ∅′ ƒℵℜ⎟⎮®∫ ⎯′∪⊃ϒ⎞⋅⎧⇐∨÷⎦ − ©⊗∫♦⎯ ←⎞⎯⎠ − ƒℑϒ∅′ ƒℵℜ⎟⎮ℵϒ∩℘′⎬ ♣↵ϒ⎧÷⌡ − ©⊗∫♣⎯ϒ∈ ×⎮ℵ′…⎠ − ƒℑϒ∅′ ƒℵℜ⎟⎮♦ℵ ←⎞⎯⎠ − ℑ⎯′⎮ℵ≤∈ − ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮ℵ′⎬ ⎯℘⌡.
⇐∨ 5: ⎯ℑ′∅′⊗′∏⌠∠ ←⎨÷′⊗∫⎯′√⌡ ←⎨÷′⊗∫⎯′⊗′∏⌠∠ ⎯ℑ′∅′√⌡ ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎧÷
↓℘′ℜ ℵℜ′⎫≡′÷⎦ ⎯∏⎯⎠
ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦:
1. ©. ⊕∩⎟ℑ⎯′, 1987, ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮®⎧÷♦⊗, ⎯′∏ℑ÷⎦ ↵′♦⊗ℜ⌡, ƒ≡⎬♦⊃
2. ©. ÷|ℵ⎯′⎮ℵ′⎦♦∩, ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮®⌡ ƒ≡ϒ⎠⊗ϒ⎧÷©⌡
3. ⊆. ≡〉©÷♣⊕⊗ϒ™⎯⌡, ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮ℵ′ℜ⎠
4. ♣≡∠ℑ|′ ℑ|′ℜ⎬, ƒℑϒ∅′ƒℵℜ⎟⎮ℵ′ℜ⎠
5. “λλεμωενδτ λιλαραρψ ανδ οτηερσ, 1968, Προβλεμσ οφ Τρανσλατιον, “λλ Ινδια
Ποετ∍σ Χονφερενχε, Χαλχυττα
ÉU¥g¥ghl« ςΙΙ
°…÷⊕′ℜ⎠
|©⎯⎬♦ℑ |Minimum Entry requirements for the course/ Eligibility |
|Pre-requisitie| |
|s | |
|Objectives of | |
|the Course | |
|ℵϒ…∫⎯′?…⎧ |⇐∨ 1 |ℑ⎧÷⎦ ⎯÷⊕⊗′ℜ⎠ ↔∪′©÷⌡ − ⎯⎬♦ℑ™⌡ − ±⎠♦⊗™⌡ − |
|⊂∪′⎮®÷⎦ |Unit 1 |⎯÷⊕⎠ ƒ⎯ϒ…⎟® ⊕′∩⎧÷⌡ − ƒ≡ℜ⎠©♦∪ − ℵ∫⎯′℘′♦÷∫ |
|Course Outline| |∠♦∪ℜ′⎬ ↔⊇⎮ℵ♦…⎧ ƒ÷ϒ⎦♦÷÷⎦ − ℵ∫⎯′℘′♦÷∫ |
| | |∠♦∪ℜ′⊃⎟⎧⊂∫ ♣⎯♦⊕ℜϒ⊃ ⎯⊂⎯′÷⎦ − ℵ∫⎯′℘′♦÷∫ ∠♦∪ℜ′⎬ |
| | |ƒ⎯ϒ∅′⎠ ↔⌡≡⎨÷⎦ − ℵ∫⎯′℘′♦÷∫∠♦∪, ℑ⎧÷∩ϒ?≡′ℜ′⎬ ∝⎟ |
| | |↔⎨÷⌡ − ℵ∫⎯′℘′♦÷ ∝⎟ ←⎫∪⎠ℑ′⎧÷ ≡©÷⎩ ≡⎧⎯′ −ℵ∫⎯′℘′♦÷ℜ′⎬÷…♦ℑ÷∧⌡, ≡√♦÷÷∧⌡ − ℑ⎧÷⎦ ƒ⎯ϒ…⎟® ≡ϒ⎯⊃⌡ − |
| | |⊕ϒƒ⊃ϒ⊗′ ↵′÷⎥⎩≡′÷⎦ − ⊕ϒƒ⊃ϒ⊗′ ⊕′⎯′÷⎦ − ⎯′♦℘⎮ℵ…⎨÷⎦ − |
| | |ƒ⎯ϒ♦⊗⎧÷ϒ?≡′ ↵′÷⎥⎩≡′÷⎦. |
| |⇐∨ 2 |⎭⎯∅′ℜ⎠ ⊕℘⊗ϒ∨, ƒ⎯ϒ…⎧÷ ÷ϒ⊗⌡ − ⎯ℑ′⎥ ⎭⎯∅′ℜ⎠ ⊕℘⊗ϒ∨ − |
| |Unit 2 |⎭⎯⎥÷∩′⎬ ⊕♦÷÷⎦ − ⎭⎯∅′ℜ⎠ ≡?…⎨÷⎦. ƒ≡⎞⎯′⎩ |
| | |♣≡÷℘′⎮®⌡ ƒ≡⌡♦ℑℜϒ⎧÷©⌡ − ƒ≡⎞⎯′ ←≡′℘′ℜ⎟÷⎦, |
| | |∠♦| ←≡′℘′ℜ⎟÷∩′⎬ ƒℵϒ∠⊕ϒ⊃ ℵ|′÷⎦ − ƒ⊕∩′↵ϒ?∈, |
| | |↓⎦↵ϒ?∈⎩ ƒ≡⎞⎯′÷♦∩⎮ ƒℵ∨⌡ ©♦∪ − ↔♦⊗⌠∠ ⎯′℘?∈⌡ |
| | |ƒ≡⎞⎯′÷⎦ − ƒ≡⎞⎯′÷♦∩ ♣↵⎟⎮ℵ∈∫⎯⎠. |
| |⇐∨ 3 |ℵ∫⎯′ ↔♦ℑ∫⎯√⌡, ↵′∨∫⎯⎧ ⊂∪′ℜ′…√⌡ − ƒℑϒ∅′ ↵♦…⎧⊂∪′⎮♣ℵ∈ |
| |Unit 3 |− ƒ≡⎞⎯′ ±¬⎯⎮ℵ∈⌡ ©♦∪ − ⎯♦⊗⎮® ⊕♦÷÷⎦ − ÷′♦∩ ⊕℘′ − |
| | |♣⎯⎯′ ⊕℘′ − ©÷⋅♦℘ ⊕♦÷÷⎦ − ↓…⎠ℵ⊂⎯′ − ↔⎩⊆⎮ℵ⊇∫⎯′∏∫⎯⌡ − |
| | |⊂∪′ℜ≤∈÷⎦ − ⎭⎯∅′ℜ⎠ ÷♦⊗⎩ƒ≡ϒ⎫÷⎦ − ÷?∈♦℘÷⎦ − |
| | |ƒ↵÷′⎥⋅♦℘÷⎦ − ℑ⎯′⎮®♦℘ − ÷∏∫∠⎮ℵ…⎨÷∧⌡ ♣÷⊗′⎩≡′∫⎯′℘⎨÷∧⌡ |
| | |− ⊕ϒƒ⊃ϒ⊗′, ƒ⎯ϒ♦⊗⎧÷ϒ?≡′⎧⊂ ±¬∠⌡ ©♦∪÷⎦. |
| |⇐∨ 4 |⊕′∩⌡ℵ℘∫⎯′⎬ ⎯∫∠⊕©⌡ ƒ≡ℜ⎠ℵϒ∈⌡ − ⊕′∩⌡ℵ℘ ↔∪⎨÷⎦ − ⎭⌠⎯′ℜ |
| |Unit 4 |↵ϒ?⊇⎠ ⊕′∩⌡ℵ℘⎨÷⎦. |
| |⇐∨ 5 |ℑ⎧÷⎦ ↓∪⊕′ℜ⎠, ƒ≡ϒ⎫ƒℵϒ∏⎦ ⊕′∩⎧÷©⌡, ⊕♦℘ℜ♦∪™⌡ − |
| |Unit 5 |⊕′∩⌡ℵ℘©⌡ ƒℵϒ∠ℑ⎧÷⎦ ƒ⎯ϒ…⎟®⌡ − ↔℘≡ϒ⎨÷©⌡ ℑ⎧÷⎦ ƒ⎯ϒ…⎟® |
| | |©♦∪÷∧⌡ − ⎯′?…ℑ′∈⎯⎠ − ©⊇⋅ ƒ≡⎞⎯⎠ − ℑ⎧÷⎦ |
| | |ƒ⎯ϒ…⎟® ≡ϒ⎯⊃⎨÷⎦. |
C - Core; E - Elective; ED – Extra disciplinary
(B) Bibliography:
(1) ℵ℘′⌠∠♦℘ 〈⎠÷⎦ : kh.gh. FUrhÄ - ïjÊaš fiy
Recommended Texts :
(2) ℵϒ⎟♦⊕ 〈⎠÷⎦ : 1. ⎭℘ϒ. ♣÷ϒ⎯〉…ℵϒ|′ − ⎭⎯∅′ℜ⎠
Reference Books : 2. ♣≡ϒℑƒ⊗ − ⎯ℑ′⎥ ⎭⎯⎥÷⎦
3. ←. ℵ′. ↔⌠♣⎯ϒ|′ ⎭℘ϒ⊆ − ⎭⎯∅′ℜ⎠ ∝⎟ ↔∪′©÷⌡
4. Σεν Γυπτα − ϑουρναλισμ ασ α Χαρεερ
5. ϑ. Ναταραϕαν − Ηιστορψ οφ Ινδιαν ϑουρναλισμ
(3) Website, e-learning resources.
A.C.F.2009
................
................
In order to avoid copyright disputes, this page is only a partial summary.
To fulfill the demand for quickly locating and searching documents.
It is intelligent file search solution for home and business.
Related searches
- welcome to 2nd grade printable
- welcome to relias training course
- welcome to people s bank online
- welcome to city of new haven ct
- welcome to njmcdirect
- welcome to the team letter
- welcome to school songs preschool
- welcome to this place song
- welcome to this place
- welcome to gmail email
- open house welcome to parents
- welcome to patient portal